WB170 Beaudesert Rd Water Booster Parkinson Technology

BMD

WATER BOOSTER PUMPING' STATION WB170

BEAUDESERT ROAD PARKINSON TECHNOLOGY PARK

ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARD

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Developed by:

J & P RICHARDSON INDUSTRIES CAMPBELL AVENUE

WACOL QLD 4076

ABN 23 001 952 325 ACN 001 952 325

Ph. (07) 3271 2911 Fax. (07) 3271 3623

WB170 Beaudesert Rd Water Booster Parkinson Technology Park Electrical Switchboard OM Manual

Q-Pulse Id TMS1107 Active 10/12/2014 Page 1 of 271

CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION

1.1 Operating Instructions

2.0 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION

2.1 Mode Selection 2.2 Manual Control 2.3 Automatic Control

3.0 PUMPS

4.0 VALVES

5.0 TEST SHEETS

6.0 FLOWMETER

7.0 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL INFORMATION

8.0 SWITCHBOARD WORKS TEST RESULTS



I

9

I

e

s

I INDEX A4

Ref.No.35026 made in china



GP ID

11111111111111111111111111' it

fl



J & P Richardson Industries Ply Ltd

1.0 INTRODUCTION

These operating instructions cover the WB170 Beaudesert Road Water Booster pumping station electrical equipment supplied by J & P Richardson Industries Pty Ltd in September 2008.

1.1 Operating Instructions

Normal operation of the pumping station is in the automatic mode with control by means of a Master Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)/Radio Telemetry Unit (RTU) which receives level signals from the Level Measurement System in the wet well/Electronic Level Relays/Float Switches.

Manual operation control of the station is available by means of selector switches on the motor control switchboard.

File: 11.1pr_Server/docsilsched/Masters.doc Revision 0 Date: 25 May 2001



SI 4ID II 411,

Iiiiiii3i)iiiicIA)iligli1ijilijciiiititoliftit;

2. Description of

Operation



ID ID ID MI ID ID

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1




2.0 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION

2.1 Mode Selection

The station can be operated either automatically or manually with mode selection being made by means of the mode selector switches mounted on each pump section of the switchboard. These selector switches are designated with the following mode selections AUTO-OFF-MAN.

2.2 Manual Control

Each pumping unit can be run in manual control from the motor control centre by: -

a). Selecting the "MAN" setting on the "MODE SELECTOR SWITCHES" as described in Clause 2.1.

b). Starting by "START" pushbutton. c). Stopping by "STOP" pushbutton.

N.B. DO NOT LEAVE IN MANUAL WHILE STATION UNATTENDED

2.3 Automatic Control

For automatic control of the station: -

a). The "MODE SELECTOR SWITCHES" on the switchboard should be in the "AUTO" position.

b). The "DUTY SELECTOR SWITCH" should be set to provide the desired pump operation sequence. The "DUTY SELECTOR SWITCH" is marked:-

1-2 2-1

The pumps should be alternated at regular intervals to ensure that each pump unit has a reasonably equal running time. The total running hours of each pump unit is displayed on the hourmeter located on each pump section of the switchboard.

c). The automatic Duty Selection is done via the PLC software. Refer PLC SOFTWARE Section for details. The total running hours of each pump unit is displayed on the hourmeter located on each pump section of the switchboard.

d). The automatic starting, and stopping of the pumps is controlled by signals from Master PLC.

For NORMAL OPERATION, each of the pump selector switches should have "AUTO" mode selected.

In the AUTOMATIC mode the selected Duty Pump unit will start automatically as preset by the level in the wet well. In the event of the duty pump not being capable of supplying enough flow to continue draining the wet well and the well level rises to a second preset level, then the Standby Pump unit will automatically start, to provide additional pumping. The supplementary pump unit also takes over for the respective pump duty on the occurrence of one the Duty Pump unit failing.

File: Npr_Server/docs/lsched/Masters.doc Revision 0 Date: 25 May 2001



ID MI

101111111Millcuclictokilluccoluij

(1 3. Pumps



41. ap in

Iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiij

di 410 al WB170 Beaudesert Rd Water Booster Parkinson Technology Park Electrical Switchboard OM Manual


J & P Richardson Industries Pty Ltd

3.0 PUMPS

SUPPLIER: FLOWSERVE HYDRO-TITAN

Ph: (07) 3277 9511 Fax: (07) 3277 0783

MODEL: 150x125-315 18.5kW

File: //Jpr_Server/docs/lscheci/Masters.doc Revision 0 Date: 25 May 2001



HYDRO-TITAN

Installation, Operating and Maintenance Manual

Thompsons Kelly&Lewis



HYDRO-TITAN TM

BACK PULL-OUT PUMP INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLING AND

OPERATING

CUSTOMER RECORD DATA

Size

Serial Number

When ordering spare parts for your Hydro-Titan pump, always quote the pump size and serial number indicated above. We suggest you keep this booklet in a safe and easy to obtain place for future reference.

These instructions are prepared as a guide to the correct procedures and, provided they are followed, will result in trouble- free operation of your centrifugal pump.

These instructions do not cover driver or associated equipment, and for information on these items we recommend the manufacturer or distributor be consulted direct for maintenance and/or repair instructions.

For performance characteristics and maximum speed consult your Hydro-Titan pump distributor or TKL.

INDEX

A. INSTALLATION (1) Foundation (2) Piping (3) Alignment - Direct Coupled (4) Alignment - Belt Drive (5) Gland Sealing

B. START-UP (1) Priming (2) Start-Up (3) Gland (4) Mechanical Seal (5) Special Liquids

C. TROUBLE SHOOTING (1) No Discharge (2) Low Discharge (3) Lack of Pressure (4) Absorbs Too Much Power (5) Noisy Operation (6) Vibration (7) Pump Runs Hot

D. SERVICING

E. DISMANTLING (1) Spacer Coupling (2) Rotating Assembly (3) Casing (4) Mechanical Seal

A. INSTALLATION

(1) FOUNDATION

The foundation should be sufficiently rigid to absorb any vibration and provide permanent support to the baseplate at all points.

The most satisfactory foundation is concrete.

When pouring the foundation tapered holes (Fig. 1)

approximately four times the diameter of the holding-down bolts must be left in the block to allow for final aligning and grouting.

FIGURE 1

MOO treiNG

ARPLAIII

10.0,a1C01

=1. rOvICATION (,t..

To allow for grouting under the baseplate, leave the foundation 20 to 40mm below the final setting and the surface must be left rough to ensure a good hold for the grout.

For units received with the pump and driver rigidly mounted on a

common baseplate, it should be placed on the foundation and the coupling halves or belt drive disconnected.

The baseplate should be supported on metal shims or wedges positioned as close to the holding down-bolts as possible (Fig.1).

Adjust the metal shims or wedges until the machined surfaces of the baseplate are level.

When the unit is level the holding down-bolts may be grouted in.

After grouting is set the holding down-bolts may then be tightened. After tightening, re- check baseplate to ensure it remains level.

At this stage the baseplate may be grouted using one part cement and two parts clean sand. Do not use too much water as this will cause shrinkage.

Pour grout around edges and through the grout hole in the baseplate puddling the concrete to expel air.

After the grout has set, holding down-bolts may be finally tightened followed by a check on pump-driver alignment to ensure unit has been bolted down evenly.

(2) PIPING

Suction and discharge piping and fittings must be independently supported and anchored to ensure no strains are imposed on the pump flanges. Pump and pipe flanges must be parallel and mate together without effort. Suction pipework must always be free from air leaks and air pockets. On suction lift application, pipework should slope upwards from the liquid pumped to the pump suction flange. With this type of installation it is absolutely essential that no air leaks exist as this will prevent the satisfactory operation of the pump. See Figure 2.

(3) ALIGNMENT - DIRECT COUPLED

A flexible coupling is not designed to compensate for misalignment between pump and driver shafts.

To check offset alignment, place a straight edge across the machined outside diameter of pump and motor couplings. This should be done top, bottom and both sides, ensuring straight edge rests evenly on both halves of the coupling. Misalignment should not exceed .05mm measured over the diameter of the coupling.

To check angular alignment, place a feeler gauge or taper gauge top, bottom and both sides to ensure gap between coupling halves is the same at all points. See Figure 3.

Remember your Hydro-Titan pump and driver are perfectly aligned on the baseplate when unit leaves the factory, but misalignment can occur during transportation or by bolting down the baseplate unevenly on the foundation. It is your responsibility to check alignment after bolting to foundation.



FIGURE 2

CORRECT INCORRECT

AIR POCKET

ON SUCTION LIFT ALWAYS HAVE PIPEWORK SLOPING UP TOW*RO PUMP SUCTION.

FIGURE 3

MISALIGNMENT

PUMP - SPACER COUPLING

STRAIGHT EDGE

MOTOR

OFFSET ALIGNMENT

PUMP

TAPER GAUGE (OR FEELER GAUGE)

SPACER COUPLING

ANGULAR ALIGNMENT

"--MOTOR

(4) ALIGNMENT - BELT DRIVE

Belt drives must also be carefully aligned, otherwise the life of belts will be short. Belt grooves must be opposite each other. Check this with a straight edge across the pulley faces.

Pump shaft and driver shaft must be parallel. Once again a straight edge will indicate whether pulley faces are in line.

(5) GLAND SEALING

In the Hydro-Titan pump, stuffing box packing is lubricated by water from the pressure side of the casing through an internal waterway to the lantern ring.

However, when pumping dirty.and abrasive liquids it may be necessary to bring an external supply of clean water to the lantern ring. An external plug is available on the back cover for this purpose.

When using external water supply, a block off plug is to be screwed into the internal hole leading to the, casing volute.

Refer to page with Water Seal Variations.

If a pump has been stored for a long period, the packing may have dried out and require replacement.

B. START-UP

Before starting pump, check the following:

Pump and driver correctly aligned.

Bearings well lubricated.

Rotation is correct for driver (remove coupling pins before checking driver for rotation).

Lightly tighten gland to prevent air leakage.

Check that shaft turns freely by hand.

Do not allow pump to run dry.

(1) Prime the pump casing and suction line with water from an external source.

Should you have a difficult priming situation, consult your pump distributor.

(2) Start driver with discharge valve closed. Once driver reaches full speed, slowly open discharge valve.

Should a pump need to operate for more than 2 minutes with discharge valve closed, a by-pass line should be led from pump discharge branch to suction source.



FIGURE 4

SEE VARIATIONS

024 -1002 002

024-0 583 011

527

029 017 560 019 560 035 006

518 035 571 584

551 0

008

007

551-1

602-0

001 002 006 007 008 011 014 017 019 023

515-1 - 1530-1

SEE VARIATIONS

Casing Impeller Shaft Seal Ring Wear Ring Back Cover Shaft Sleeve Gland Bearing Housing Mounting Foot

515-2 530-2 040

500-4 011 4

024-0 Impeller Nut 024-1 Impeller Washer 029 Lantern Ring 035 Bearing Cover 040 Water Thrower 500-2 Cap Screw 500-4 Bolt & Nut 515-1 Stud Casing 515-2 Stud Gland 527 Peg

530-1 530-2 518 551-0 551-1

* 560 571 583 584 602-0

A 500-2

I I.

/ 11. 023

Nut Casing Nut Gland Packing Key Impeller Key Coupling Ball Bearing Grease Nipple 0-Ring V-Ring Drain Plug

* Recommended Spares



(3) Adjust gland until a slow but consistent drip of water leaks past the gland packing. Do not be in a

hurry to adjust stuffing box leakage, as this may take some time to settle in.

In the event of excessive leakage, do not tighten gland nuts more than one flat at a time.

If there is no leakage from the stuffing box, do not back off gland nuts while the pump is running as this will allow the whole set of rings to move away from the bottom of the box. The best procedure is to stop the pump and allow the pacicing to cool before restarting.

(4) Pumps with mechanical seals should operate without visible leakage.

(5) If pumping hot or special liquids, consult TKL for recommendation.

C. TROUBLE SHOOTING

(1) No discharge Not primed. Speed too low. Discharge head too high. Suction lift too high. Blockage. Incorrect rotation. Suction leaks.

(2) Low Discharge Air Leaks. Speed low. Suction lift too high. Discharge head too high. Blockage.

(3) Lack of Pressure Speed low. Air leaks. Discharge head too high. Blockage.

(4) Absorbs too much Power Speed too high. Total head too low. Misalignment. Stuffing box too tight.

(5) Pump Noisy Worn bearings. Misalignment. Bent shaft. Suction lift too high.

(6) Vibration Impeller blockage. Misalignment. Worn Bearings. Bent Shaft.

(7) Pump Runs Hot Gland too tight. Pump not discharging. Dry bearings. Bearing temperature should not exceed 45° above ambient.

D. SERVICING

Before servicing the Hydro-Titan pump, isolate the driver to prevent accidental starting.

Servicing should be carried out at least once a year and does not require dismantling of the pump.

Remove setscrews holding bearing covers Item 035 Fig. 4, and slide cover along shaft. This will enable you to force by hand fresh grease into the ball bearings, at the same time... pushing the old grease out of the bearing into the bearing housing well. Over-greasing causes heating. Do no fill grease space more than two-thirds full.

Recommended Grease types: SUPPLIER DESIGNATION British Petroleum BP Energrease

LS2 SKF SKF LGMT 2

Esso Beacon 2

Mobil Mobilux 2

Shell Alvania R2 Ampol Liplex EP2

While above lubricants are recommended, equivalents may be substituted where necessary.

At the same time, inspect the stuffing box. If it is leaking badly and requires attention, proceed as follows:

Close discharge valve.

Remove gland nuts.

Gland is in halves, and by unbolting the two halves the whole gland may be removed.

With a packing extractor, remove packing plus lantern ring. Please note that there are two turns of packing behind the lantern ring.

Repack in same sequence. As supplied, the Hydro-Titan pump is fitted with pre-formed packing and it is only necessary to insert the correct number of turns. If using continuous packing, the ends should be cut off square leaving a gap of 3- 5mm. This joint should be staggered as each turn is inserted.

Make sure lantern ring is

located in line with water seal hole.

E. DISMANTLING

(1) SPACER COUPLING - FIG. 5

The first step in dismantling the pump is to remove the coupling spacer. Once this is done, all rotating parts of the pump can be removed for attention on the bench without disturbing casing, pipework or driver.

Isolate driver.

Close suction and discharge valve.

Remove coupling guard.

Undo coupling pin nuts Item 4,

and remove coupling pins Item 5.

Remove motor half setscrew Item 7.

Coupling spacer may now be removed. Renew coupling rubbers Item 6

before reassembly

(2) ROTATING ASSEMBLY

With the coupling spacer removed, there is sufficient space to remove the back pull-out component.

Remove casing stud nuts Fig. 4 Item 530-1 and carefully pull the rotating element out of the casing. On larger pumps, lifting tackle will be required.

Casing '0' ring Item 583 should be renewed when reassembling.

With the rotating assembly on the bench, further dismantling may be carried out as follows:

Remove impeller nut and washer Item 024-0 & 024-1.

Remove split gland Item 017.

Remove outboard end bearing cover Item 035.

Remove impeller Item 002.

Shaft and bearings may now be removed from coupling end of pump, driving gently with a piece of wood if necessary.

To replace bearings, first remove pump half coupling Fig. 5 Item 1,

using a standard wheel puller. Bearings may now be removed. If

bearings are in good condition, flush with motor spirit or solvent, grease immediately, and replace on shaft. Complete cleanliness is essential when servicing ball bearings and will result in longer bearing life.

Re-assemble in reverse order, checking the following:

If worn, both dust and splash seals Fig. 4 Item 584 should be replaced.

After complete dismantling, gland packing should be renewed. See Servicing Section D.

Inspect shaft in area of stuffing box. If badly worn, fit new shaft or machine to take shaft sleeve, Fig. 4 Item 006.

Inspect impeller hubs for wear. If badly worn or out of round machine true in lathe and fit impeller sealing rings Fig. 4



FIGURE 5

PUMP HALF

O

_a_114.111m

MOTOR HALF

1 Pump half coupling 2 Spacer 3 Motor half coupling 4 Coupling nuts

FIGURE 6

3mm

5 Coupling pins *6 Coupling rubbers

7 Motor half setscrews

Recommended Spares

Impeller Running Clearance (mm) - LLI m ,.._ a c, Li. LL

50 50

32 32

160 200

0,20 to 0,27 _

c) - Lu m a cc L.L.

50 65 65 80 80

32 40 40 50 50

250 250 315 250 315

100 100 100

80 65 65

160 200 250

0,23 to 0,31

100 65 315 Back 0,20 to 0,27 Front 0,23 to 0,31

125 125 125 125 125 125 125

80 80 80 80

100 100 100

200 250 315 400 250 315 400

0,23 to 0,31

150 150 150 150 200 200 200 200 200

125 125 125 125 150 150 150 200 200

250 315 400 500 315 400 500 400 500

0,27 to 0,36 c., _ w

250 250 400 0,32 to 0,42

Item 008, machined in their bore to suit impeller hubs. For each size Hydro-Titan impeller running clearances are given in Fig. 6.

(3) CASING

The casing has remained coupled to the pipework and will normally only require cleaning internally.

However, if the running clearances are excessive and the casing shows wear in this area, it may be desirable to remove the casing and machine to take casing sealing rings Fig. 4 Item 007.

(4) MECHANICAL SEALS

If your Hydro-Titan pump is fitted with a mechanical seal, details will be seen on Fig. 7.

The faces on mechanical seals are easily broken and dismantling should be carried out with care.

The following procedure should be adopted:

With rotating element on the workbench, remove impeller.

Remove nuts and slide seal plate, Fig. 7 Item 6, along shaft. The stationary seal ring will back off with the seal plate.

Remove hex. head capscrews that hold bearing housing to

back cover Item 011.

Back cover Fig. 4 Item 011 may now be removed from impeller end of shaft, exposing rotating seal components which may be removed from the shaft by undoing grub screw. Fig. 7 Item 2.

Seal should be cleaned and sealing faces examined. Faces should be flat and free from scratches or pitting. If the seal is in

good condition it may be cleaned with Hydrocarbon and replaced and grub screw tightened on shaft to maintain dimension "A" Fig. 7.

The utmost cleanliness should be

observed when servicing mechanical seals.

Re-assembly should be carried out in reverse order.



FIGURE 7

A - B

IIII4Var#2

611111111K Wistalmu

Typical Unbalanced Mechanical Seal

SEAL SETTINGS: Frame '07' A = 24.5mm B = 45.5mm Frame '10' A = 37mm B = 47mm Frame '12' A = 49mm B = 54mm (For Pump sizes see Fig 6)

WATER SEAL VARIATIONS

A PLUGGED WHEN EXTERNAL SEAL USED

B POINT OF CONNECTION FOR EXTERNAL SEAL

ITEM 011

1 Lock collar 2 Grub screw

' 3 Rot, Seal Head 4 Stationary Seat

*5 Seal Plate Packing 6 Seal Plate

"Recommended Spares

ITEM 011 ITEM 011

Pump Size Pump Size Pump Size Pump Size 50 x 32 - 160 50 x 32 - 250 100 x 65 - 200 125x 80 - 315 50 x 32 - 200 65 x 40 - 250 100 x 65 - 250 125 x 80 - 400

100 x 80 - 160 65 x 40 - 315 125 x 80 - 200 125 x 100 - 315 125 x 80 - 160 80 x 50 - 250 125 x 80 - 250 125 x 100 - 400 150 x 125 - 250 80 x 50 - 315 125 x 100 - 250 150x 125 - 315 200 x 150 - 315 100 x 65 - 315 150 x 125 - 400

150 x 125 - 500 200 x 150 - 400 200 x 150 - 500 200 x 200 - 400 200 x 200 - 500 250 x 250 - 400



ASSEMBLY VARIATIONS

ITEM 019 ITEM 011

ITEM 001

Pump 65 x 40 - 315 Size 80 x 50 - 315

100 x 65 - 315

ITEM 011

ITEM 001 ITEM 019

Pump Size

50 x 32 - 160 50 x 32 - 200

100 x 80 - 160 100 x 65 - 200 100 x

125 x

125 x 125 x

125 x

125 x

125 x

125 x

150 x

150 x 150 x

65 - 250 80 - 200 80 - 250 80 - 315 80 - 400

100 - 250 100 - 315 100 - 400 125 - 250 125 - 315 125 - 400

150 x 125 - 500 200 x 150 - 315 200 x 150 - 400 200 x 150 - 500 200 x 200 - 400 200 x 200 - 500 250 x 250 - 400

ITEM 011 ITEM 001 ITEM 019

Pump 50 x 32 - 250 Size 65 x 40 - 250

80 x 50 - 250

PUMP SHUT-DOWN FOR EXTENDED PERIOD

Preparation

1. Flush pump thoroughly with clean water removing any solids.

2. Dry out internals and coat with an anti-corrosion inhibitor. 3. If possible, store away from vibrations to protect bearings from brinelling. Re-starting

1. Repack stuffing box with new packing.

2. Regrease bearings.

3. Check pump is free to turn by hand.

4. Replace bearings where brinelling or damage by dampness have occurred.

WARRANTY

Thompsons, Kelly & Lewis Pty Ltd guarantees this equipment for a period of six months from the date of despatch from our works at Castlemaine.

This guarantee is limited to:

i) The cost of replacing the goods.

ii) The cost of obtaining equivalent goods.

iii) The cost of having the goods repaired whichever is the lowest.

This guarantee does not cover damage caused by misuse, or incorrect installation of the equipment, or use of any lubricants in the equipment other than those specified; and the purchaser's attention is specifically directed to the Hydro-Titan Installation and Maintenance Manual, which must be strictly adhered to.

Liabilities for consequential damages is expressly excluded.

All claims under this guarantee must be reported to Thompsons, Kelly & Lewis Pty Ltd, the installing agent, or the nearest distributor before taking action.

The purchaser's attention is drawn to the Trade Practices Act 1974 (as amended) and other applicable State Legislation governing manufacturer's warranty.


Thompsons, Kelly & Lewis Pty Ltd A.C.N. 004 249 012

26 Faigh Street Mulgrave Victoria 3170 Australia PO Box 160 Springvale Victoria 3171 Australia

Telephone: +61 3 9562 0744 Facsimile: +61 3 9562 2816

Internet: www.tkl.com.au

For further information, sales, service or technical assistance, consult your telephone directory for nearest sales office:

AUSTRALIA Sydney Melbourne Brisbane Adelaide Perth NEW ZEALAND Auckland Christchurch Hamilton EAST ASIA Singapore TM-Trademark owned by Thompsans, Keay & Leafs Ply Ltd

Alteration Rights Reserved Publication HYDRO-TITAN/ 7.1 July 1999



lgiv/ Thompsons Keilly&Lewis

HYDRO-TITAN - 3.1 May 1997

HYDRO-TITAN' Back Pull-Out Pump PUMP DIMENSIONS

0

Go

75

n2

n,

0 INLET

to.

w

PUMP DESIGNATION

DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES

044 INLET

mm

DM OUT- LET mm

NOM. DIA Imp. mm

PUMP PUMP SUPPORT MOUNTING FOOT SHAFT END

1

GAP

a I hl h2 b ml m2 nt n2 81 ti n3 s2 t2 w d I x

50 32 760 80 385 132 160 50 100 70 240 790 M72 18 :10 M72 6 285 24 50 100 50 32 200 80 385 160 180 50 100 70 240 190 M72 16 170 Mil 6 285 24 50 100 50 '32 250 100 500 780 225. 65 725 95. 320 250 A4I2 78 770 M12 6 370 32 80 100

65 50 160 80 385 132 160 150 100 70 240 190 M12 18 110 MI? 6 285 24 50 100 65 40 200 100 385 160 180 50 100 ip 265 212 A412 r8 170 6412 6 .285 24 50 700 65 40 250 100 500 180 225 65 725 95 320 250 A512 20 .170 Mr2 6 370 32 80 100

.65 40 315 125, 500 200 250 65 125 95 315 280 M12 .20 770 4/12 6 370 32 80 100

80 65 160 100 385 750 180 50 100 70 265 212 MI? 18 ITO Ml? 6 285 24 50 700 80 50 200 100 385, '760 200. 5C 100 70 265 212 4/72 18 110 6472 6 285 24 50 700 80 50 250 125 500 180 225 65 425 95 320 250 641.2 20 110 M12 6 370 32 80 700 80 50 315 125 500 225 280 65 125 95 315 280 M12 20 110 M12 6 320. 32 80 700

100 SO 160 100 500 160 200 65 125 95 250 272 M72 75 170 M72 6 370 32 80 100 100 65 200 100 500 180 225 65 125 95 320 250 M72 20 770 4412 6 370 32. 80 140 100 65 250 125 500 200 250 80 760 120 350 280 6416 24 170 A 4!2 5 370 32 80 140 700 65 315 t25 530 225 280 80 160 120 400 315 We 23 17.0 6412 6 370. 42 770 740

725 80 760 725 500 180 ,225 65 725 95 320 250 4412 78 110 6412 6 370 32 80 740 125 80 200 125 500 '780 250' 65 125 95 345 280 M12 20 110 M12 6 370 32 80 140 725 80 250 725 500 225 280 80, 160 10 400 375 641.6 23 110 M12 6 370 32 BD 740 725 60 315 125. 53.0 250 375 80 160 720 400 315 641,6 25 710 M12 6 370 42 170 740 t25 80 400 125 530 280 355 80 160 120 435 355 M16 26 170 M72 6 370 42 710 140

725 100 200 125 500 200 280 80 160 720 360 280 M7.6 2; 170 M72 6 370 32 80 140 125 700 250. 140 530 225 280 80 760 120 400 375 M76 23 170 M72 6 370 42 110 140 125 100 315 740 .530 .250 315 80 760 J20 400 315 1476 25 170 M72 6 370 42 110 140 125 700 400 140 530 280 355 700 200 750 500 400 6420 26 170 6412 6 370 42 770 740

150 125 250 140 530 250 355 80 160 720: 400 375 M76. 25 710 M72 6 370 42 770 140 750 125 375 140 530 280 355 700 200 1.50 500 400 6420. 26 710 6412 6 370 42' 710 740 750 125 400 140 530 3/5 400 700 200 750 500 400 A420' 26 710 6472 6 370 42, 170 740 150 725 500 160 670 355 450 700 200 ;50 550 850 M20 28 740 MI6 6 500 48 710 780

200 '750 250 160 530 .280 375 700 200 750 500 400 M20 26 770 M12 6 370 42 710 780 200 150 375 760 .670 315 400 700 200 150 550 450 M20 28 140 M t 6 8 500 48 770 180 200 150 .400 160 670 315 450 100 200 150 550 450 1420 28 .140 6416 8 500 48. 710 180 200 750 500 760 670 355 500 70C 250 200 '600 500 M20 30 r40 6476 8 500 55 710 780

200 200 315 180 670 375 450 100 200 150 550 450 M20 28 740 M76 8 500 48 710 180 200 200 400 780 670 355 450 100 250 200 600 500 M20 30 740 M76 8 500 55. 770 180 200 200 500 780 670 400 500 100. 250 200 600 500 M1420 30 '140 M76 8 500 55 1;0 780

250 250 400 200 670 400 500 700 250 200 500 500 1420 30 740 MIS 8 500 55 170 180

THESE PUMPS. BEYOND RANGE OF ISO 2858.1975 1E).

GAP NECESSARY FOR THE WITHDRAWAL OF THE ROTOR TOWARDS THE DRIVEN SIDE NOT AVAILABLE AT THIS STAGE

Thompsons, Kelly & Lewis Pty Ltd A.C.N. 004 249 012 Alteration Rights Reserved




HYDRO-TITAN" - 4.1 June 1992

HYDRO-TITAN TM

Back Pull-Out Pump PARTS IDENTIFICATION

SEE VARIATIONS-

8 9 10 11 12 11 28 10 13 14

1 CASING 2 IMPELLER NUT 3 IMPELLER WASHER 4 IMPELLER

*5 '0' RING

15 MOUNTING FOOT

18 STUD: GLAND 19 NUT: GLAND 20 STUD: CASING-

BEARING HOUSING

SEE VARIATIONS. MAJOR ITEMS

6 BACK COVER 7 LANTERN RING

8 PACKING 9 GLAND

10 BEARING COVER

OPTIONAL EXTRAS

16 SEALING RING

SUNDRY ITEMS

21 NUT: CASING- BEARING HOUSING

22 KEY: IMPELLER 23 KEY: COUPLING

RECOMMENDED SPARES

Therndsons. Kelly 8. Lewis Pty Ltd A.C.N. 004 249 012

11 BALL BEARING 12 BEARING HOUSING 13 V-ring 14 PUMP SHAFT 28 GREASE NIPPLE 29 WATER THROWER

17 SHAFT SLEEVE

24 DRAIN PLUG 25 SCREW: BEARING COVER 26 PEG 27 BOLT & NUT

GLAND ASSEMBLY

Alteration Rights Reserved



el

i[OIIIIIIIII1111111111111111111111111111111110

4. Valves



ID di

0

Iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiitui11111




4.0 VALVES

SUPPLIER: TYCO WATER

Ph: (07) 3866 7670 Fax: (07) 3260 2142

MODEL: 0150 REFLUX VALVE

SUPPLIER: TYCO WATER

Ph: (07) 3866 7670 Fax: (07) 3260 2142

MODEL: 0150 M.S. SLUICE VALVE

File: inpr_Server/docs/!sched/Masters.doc Revision 0 Date: 25 May 2001



tax Flow Control

e

Features

Ductile Iron body and cover for high strength and impact resistance

Ductile Iron components are fusion coated with Rilsan Nylon 11 for long life corrosion protection

Full bore design for minimum head loss

No debris pockets

Disc held in open position by positive pressure to avoid fluctuations

Free acting and counterweight versions available. Interchangeable in the field

Limit switch fit out available.

Free acting version features EPDM encapsulated gunmetal disc with pressure activated lip seal and fully flexible rubber hinge

Counterweight version features EPDM encapsulated gunmetal disc with pressure activated lip seal and solid stainless steel shaft

Counterweight utilises separate shaft located in the cover to enable rapid closing and lessen fluctuations

Adjustable counterweight can be mounted on either side of the valve

Integral body seat for maintenance free operation

Integral cast feet for safe and easy storage

Counterweight shaft seals are 0- Ring type to ensure leak free operation

Isolated fasteners for corrosion protection Slotted holes on top of inlet flange to facilitate bolt insertion when connecting to adjacent valves

A.B.N. 75 087 415 745

SUPERCHECK Resilient Seated swing check valves unique design enables faster closing with reduced water hammer.

General Application

Swing check valves are suitable for water and wastewater applications. Used to prevent backflow within a pipeline.

Technical Data

Size Range: DN100 - DN150 Allowable Operating Pressure: 1600 kPa Minimum Flow: 1.4 m/s End Connections: Flanged to AS 4087 Figure B5 Standards: AS 4794 - Non-Return Valves For Waterworks Purposes Certifications: Certified to AS 4020 - Suitable for contact with drinking water.

Copyright by Tyco InternationaHltd. chan e roduct des, ns and ectficahons without notice. Tyco Water reserves the.° htto

TWSCV/03/04



No Description Material Standard

1 Body Ductile Iron AS 1831-400/15

Disc Flexible Gun Metal (EPDM coated) AS 1565 C83600

Countersunk Screws

Coating

High Tensile Alloy Steel

'Rilsan Nylon11 AS/NZS 4158

Dimensions DN Length Width Height

100 330 215 254

150 410 329

0 ee e

I I .



counterweight Swing pieckyalve

10

4

14

Partt Ltist

11/12

No

1

Description

Body

Material Standard

Ductile Iron AS 1831-400/15

Ductilealron AS .183l 400/15:

3 Disc hinged

Gesket

5 Countersunk Screws

Hinge Bush

7 Anvil

8 Lever

Weight

10 Shaft

Gun Metal (EPDM coated) AS 1565 C83600

High Tensile Alloy Steel

Gunmetal

Gunmetal

,:Staiiiless"steel

Ductile Iron

StainleSs Steel!

11 Bush - Hollow (hidden Gunmetal

AS 1565 C83600

AS 1565 C83600

ASTM.A240-316

AS 1831-400/15

'''ASTM A276:431

AS 1565 C83600

13 Bush - Blank (not shown)

Nitrile Rubber

Gunmetal AS 1565 C83600

14 1 Coating Rilsan Nylon 11 'ASIN2S 4158'

IDimensions DN Length Width Height

100 330 269 254

Copyright by Tyco International TWSCV/03/04

Tycopaterreservesihejright,to change,product;designsandspecificahonsmithouknotice.



SUPERVIEeK Swing DN100- DN150

idal SpaCi ing

Specifying a DN150 free acting, resilient seated check valve with AS 4087 Figure B5 flanges

Example

Nominal Size

150

Item Type

Resilient Seat Check Valve

RS CHK VLV

End Type

Flanged - AS 4087 Figure, B5

TC

Action FA - Frees Acting

CWT - Counterweight

FA

Extra Information FC Co'ated

FC,

- 0 0 Specification

Swing check valves shall be resilient seated conforming to AS 4794.

The allowable operating pressure shall be 1600kPa

Disc shall be fully open at a velocity of 1.4m/s.

The valve body and cover shall be cast in Ductile Iron and coated with a

thermally applied polymeric coating to AS/NZS 4158

The disc shall be encapsulated in EPDM rubber to AS 1646.

Fasteners shall be completely isolated from the external environment.

Where a lever and weight is required :

The counterweight shaft seal shall be affected by a minimum of two 0-rings.

The disc hinge pin and counterweight shaft shall be separate to facilitate rapid

closing of the disc.

The lever shall be grade 316 stainless steel to ASTM A240.

The weight shall be ductile iron coated with a thermally applied polymeric

coating conforming to AS/NZS 4158

0 International Ltd. s -

TWSCV/03104



Features

Ductile Iron body and bonnet for high strength and impact resistance. Solid gunmetal gate for DN80- DN200, ductile iron fusion coated gate with gunmetal rings for larger sizes. Grade 431 Stainless Steel spindle for high strength and corrosion resistance. Gunmetal dezincification resistant top casting incorporating dual 0-ring seals and wiper ring for long life operation. Back seal facility to allow for replacement of seals under full operating pressure. Thermally bonded polymeric coating for long life corrosion protection. Isolated fasteners for corrosion protection. Anti-friction thrust washer for low operating torques. Integral cast in feet for safe and easy storage. Integral lifting lugs for installation convenience. Anticlockwise closing or clockwise closing available. Key, handwheel or gearbox operation available.

A.B.N. 75 087 415 745

. :I, 0 *II'

to - 00 -

Figure 400 metal seated gate valves are designed and manufactured to AS 2638.1

General Application

Figure 400 metal seated gate valves are suitable for use with drinking water and waste water, in below or above ground applications. Used for the isolation of sections and branches in

pipelines.

- .

Technical Data Size Range: DN80-DN900 Allowable Operating Pressure: 1600 kPa or 3500 kPa Maximum Temperature: 40°C End Connections: Flanged to AS 4087 Fig B5 or B6 TYTON® Socket Certifications: WSAA Appraisal No. 02/07 ISC AS 2638 Certified Product License No. PRD/R61/0412/2 (DN80-DN750) Certified to AS 4020 - suitable for contact with drinking water.

G t . yK



15

14

9

12

10

1

18

No

1

Description

Body

Material

Ductile Iron

3 Seal Retainer

Ductile Iron

Gunmetal

5

6.

7

Spindle

Spindle Cap

Thrust Washer

DN80-DN200 Gunmetal

DN225-DN906:Duatile,fron:.:

Stainless Steel

:.Ductile Irdn

Acetal

f, 8 Botldiikef 9 Bonnet Gasket

EPDM

EPDM

Standard

AS 1831 400-15

ASS 1831,400-15

AS 1565 C83600

AS 1565 C83600

AS1861 466-15

ASTM A 276 431

AS 1831 400 -15.

AS 1646

AS 1646 i

10' Gate,Nut Gunmetal. AS 1565 C83600

11 Socket Head Screws High Tensile Alloy Steel

12: counter'sbnk ScieWs: HigKlerisile Alloy Steel

13 Hex Head Screw Stainless Steel ASTM A276 316

14, ' 0-Rings

15 Wiper Ring

16

17 Backseal Grommet

18 Polymeric Coating

Nitrile Rubber

Nitrile Rubber

Gunmetal

Nitrile Rubber

AS 1646

AS 1646

.,;,As;1565.083600

AS 1646

AS/NZS .4158



0

Flange

Socket

Dimensions

Valve

Size C

80 367

7I00 ' 402

150 502

200 610

225 649 ,

250 723

300 810

17375 ; 960

450 1145

1290:

600 1467

[fig: .-: 2255

900 2550

ID -7 PN 35 PN 16

MON Flange Flange Turns Approx.

Socket AS4087 AS4087 to Mass

Fig B5 Fig B6 Close kg

203 280 20 18

'150 . 170

____-__... 229 ... _

267

' :. ' 305_

330

23

26 43

.195

205

292

305

380

405

34

38

75

85

235

245

' 275

330 .........

356

:: 420 ........:

430

42

50

.

;

..... 1.10

160

381

432

... . ..

,': 610

660

62

76

: .. : 340

560

:..47 ..:,:71P 82 710 .:...,..

508 785

711 711 (PN 25)

74 3500

Note: For compatability with Series 1 PVC (white) pipe, PLASTYT gaskets may be used in TYTON sockets.

( i ) S - S .



DN Fl-Fl

80

Metal Seated Gate Valves

Inside Screw PN 16 PN 35

Sc-Sc I Fl-Fl

300

375

450

600

750

900

Fig No.

Coating

400 400

PN25

400

Polymeric Coating

Options

Anticlockwise Closing .Clockwise Closing Gear Actuator Flange Fig B5 (TC)

Flange Drilling Fig B6 (HP)

- Specification

Gate valves shall be metal seated conforming to AS2638.1. The allowable operating pressure shall be 1600 kPa/3500 kPa. Operation shall be by means of a key/handwheel. The direction of closing shall be anticlockwise/clockwise. The valve body and bonnet shall be cast in Ductile Iron and coated with a thermally applied polymeric coating to AS/NZS 4158. The gate shall be cast in Ductile Iron and coated with a thermally bonded polymeric coating. Gate sealing rings shall be dezincification resistant copper alloy mechanically fixed to the body and gate. Solid gunmetal gates are also acceptable. The spindle shall be Grade 431 Stainless Steel incorporating a failsafe thrust collar. The spindle seal retainer shall be manufactured from a dezincification resistant copper alloy to AS1565. The spindle seal shall be affected by a minimum of two 0-rings, which can be replaced under full operating pressure. Fasteners shall be completely isolated from the external environment. Valves shall be manufactured under a product certification scheme and each valve marked in accordance with the certification body's requirements.



MO ID II

5. Test Sheets



I.

Ililliiiiiiiiiiiilliiiiill

ID II. I.

.



J & P Richardson Industries Pry Ltd

5.0 TEST SHEETS

File: / /Jpr _Server /docs /!sched/Masters.doc Revision 0 Date: 25 May 2001



Thompsons Keily&Lewis PUMP DATA SHEET

EPSILON ver: 6.043 05/09/07

JP Richardson Parkinson Technology Park VVB 170

Proposal No - 0365 B07

Pump type Pump size Pump Curve no No. of Stages

: HYDRO-TITAN

: 150x125-315

: R24100/2

: 1

Selection file : UNTITLED Suction diameter : 150 mm

Catalog : TKL-50HZ.MPC Discharge diameter : 125 mm

Version : 5.1

Rated Conditions Pump Limits Rated flow : 55 Us Maxi

.

mum Impeller dia. : 324 mm

Rated head : 22 m Maximum sphere size : 22.5 mm

NPSH available

Max. solids size

: - m

: -- mm

Minimum Flow : 18.3 Us

Fluid Details Motor Details Fluid type : Water Power : 18.5 kW Specific Gravity : 1 Frame : 180M

Viscosity : 1.1 cP Enclosure : TEFC Temperature : 15.6 t Sizing Criteria : NOL Power Vapour pressure : 1.8 kPa

Pump Performance Pump speed : 1470 r/min Shutoff Head : 29.2 m

Impeller dia. : 286 mm Shutoff dP : 286 kPa

Design flow : 55 Us Flow at BEP : 48.7 Us Design head : 22.1 m BEP efficiency : 84.6 %

Pump efficiency : 83 % Design flow as % of BEP : 112.9 %

NPSH required : 2 m Head rise to Shutoff : 32.3 %

Absorbed Power : 14.3 kW Impeller dia. as % of max : 88.3 % NOL Power : 15.3 kW NOL Power (max. curve) : 22.3 kW

so 324entn

70

E 259nrn

20

- 10 so

1 w 9.

a

0 40

-------

2 cf) O. 2 _

0 20

o

t

o 20 40 60 80

Volumetric Flow Rate - Lls



II el

110111119[1111111111.111111111111111111111119111111J

6. Flowmeter



GI ID 41111 la

IIII111111minum111111




6.0 FLOWMETER

File: 11.1pr_Server/docs/lsched/Masters.doc Revision 0 Date: 25 May 2001



Fullstand Druck ua Durchfluss

0 ° Ar Temperatur FlOssigkeits- Registrierung Systeme Services

analyse Komponenten

Brief Operating Instructions

Pro line Promag 10 Electromagnetic Flow Measuring System

KA032D/06/en/01.08 71067518

Solutions

These Brief Operating Instructions are not intended to replace the Operating Instructions provided in the scope of supply. Detailed information is provided in the Operating Instructions and the additional documentation on the CD-ROM supplied.

The complete device documentation consists of:

These Brief Operating Instructions Depending on the device version: - Operating Instructions and the Description of Device Functions - Approvals and safety certificates - Special safety instructions in accordance with the approvals for

the device (e.g. explosion protection, pressure equipment directive etc.)

- Additional device-specific information

Endress+Hauser People for Process Automation



Table of contents Pro line Promag 10

Table of contents

1 Safety instructions 3 1.1 Designated use 3

1.2 Installation, commissioning and operation 3

1.3 Operational safety 3

1.4 Safety conventions 4

2 Installation 5

2.1 Transporting to the measuring point 5

2.2 Installation conditions 6

2.3 Installing the Promag W sensor 11

2.4 Installing the Promag P sensor 12

2.5 Tightening torques for Promag W and Promag P 14

2.6 Installing the Promag H sensor 20

2.7 Installing the transmitter housing 21

2.8 Post-installation check 23

3 Wiring 24 3.1 Connecting the various housing types 25

3.2 Connecting the remote version connecting cable 26

3.3 Potential equalization 29

3.4 Degree of protection 30

3.5 Post-connection check 30

4 Commissioning 31 4.1 Switching on the measuring device 31

4.2 Operation 32

4.3 Navigating within the function matrix 33

4.4 Device functions to be configured during commissioning 34

4.5 Troubleshooting 35

2 Endress+Hauser



Pro line Promag 10 Safety instructions

1 Safety instructions

1.1 Designated use

The measuring device is to be used only for measuring the flow of conductive liquids in closed pipes. Most liquids can be measured as of a minimum conductivity of 50 µS /cm. Any use other than that described here compromises the safety of persons and the entire measuring system and is, therefore, not permitted. The manufacturer is not liable for damage caused by improper or non-designated use.

1.2 Installation, commissioning and operation

The measuring device must only be installed, connected, commissioned and maintained by qualified and authorized specialists (e.g. electrical technicians) in full compliance with the instructions in these Brief Operating Instructions, the applicable norms, legal regulations and certificates (depending on the application). The specialists must have read and understood these Brief Operating Instructions and must follow the instructions they contain. If you are unclear on anything in these Brief Operating Instructions, you must read the Operating Instructions (on the CD-ROM). The Operating Instructions provide detailed information on the measuring device.

II The measuring device should only be installed in the pipe in a de-energized state free from outside loads or strain. The measuring device may only be modified if such work is expressly permitted in the Operating Instructions (on the CD-ROM). Repairs may only be performed if a genuine spare parts kit is available and this repair work is

expressly permitted. If performing welding work on the piping, the welding unit may not be grounded by means of the measuring device.

1.3 Operational safety

The measuring device is designed to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested, and left the factory in a condition in which it is safe to operate. Relevant regulations and European standards have been observed. The information specified on the warning notices, nameplates and connection labels fitted on the measuring device must be observed. These contain important data, including information on the permitted operating conditions, the application of the measuring device and data on

materials. If the measuring device is not operated at atmospheric temperatures, compliance with the relevant basic conditions specified in the device documentation provided (on the CD-ROM) is absolutely essential The measuring device must be wired in accordance with the wiring diagrams and connection labels. Interconnecting must be permitted. All parts of the measuring device must be integrated into the potential matching system of the plant.

Endress+Hauser 3



Safety instructions Pro line Promag 10

The cables, tested cable glands and tested dummy plugs must suit the prevailing operating conditions, e.g. the temperature range of the process. Housing openings that are not used need to be sealed with dummy plugs. The measuring device can only be used in conjunction with fluids to which all the wetted parts of the measuring device are adequately resistant. With regard to special fluids, including fluids used for cleaning, Endress+Hauser will be happy to assist in clarifying the corrosion-resistant properties of wetted materials. However, minor changes in temperature, concentration or in the degree of contamination in the process may result in variations in

corrosion resistance. For this reason, Endress+Hauser does not accept any responsibility with regard to the corrosion resistance of wetted materials in a specific application. The user is

responsible for the choice of suitable wetted materials in the process. Hazardous areas Measuring devices for use in hazardous areas are labeled accordingly on the nameplate. Relevant national regulations must be observed when operating the device in hazardous areas. Hygienic applications Measuring devices for hygienic applications have their own special labeling. Relevant national regulations must be observed when using these devices. Pressure instruments Measuring devices for use in systems that need to be monitored are labeled accordingly on the nameplate. Relevant national regulations must be observed when using these devices. The documentation on the CD-ROM for pressure instruments in systems that need to be

monitored is an integral part of the entire device documentation. The installation regulations, connection data and safety instructions provided in the Ex documentation must be observed. Endress+Hauser will be happy to assist in clarifying any questions on approvals, their application and implementation.

1.4 Safety conventions

,A Warning! "Warning" indicates an action or procedure which, if not performed correctly, can result in injury or a safety hazard. Comply strictly with the instructions and proceed with care.

Caution! "Caution" indicates an action or procedure which, if not performed correctly, can result in incorrect operation or destruction of the device. Comply strictly with the instructions.

Note! "Note" indicates an action or procedure which, if not performed correctly, can have an indirect effect on operation or trigger an unexpected response on the part of the device.

O

4 Endress+Hauser



Pro line Promag 10 Installation

2 Installation

2.1 Transporting to the measuring point Transport the measuring device to the measuring point in the original packaging. Do not remove the covers or caps until immediately before installation.

2.1.1 Transporting flanged devices DN 5 300 12")

A0008978

A0008979

To transport the unit, use slings slung around the process connections or use lugs (if available).

Warning! Risk of injury! The device can slip. The center of gravity of the measuring device may be higher than the holding points of the slings. Always ensure that the device cannot slip or turn around its axis.

Do not lift measuring devices by the transmitter housing or the connection housing in the case of the remote version. Do not use chains as they could damage the housing.

2.1.2 Transporting flanged devices DN > 300 (> 12")

Use only the metal eyes provided on the flanges to transport, lift or position the sensor in the piping.

6 Caution! Do not attempt to lift the sensor with the tines of a fork-lift truck beneath the metal casing!

This would buckle the casing and damage the internal magnetic coils.

/ // ////////, A0008153

Endress+Hauser 5



Installation Pro line Promag 10

2.2 Installation conditions

2.2.1 Dimensions

For the dimensions of the measuring device, see the associated Technical Information on the CD-ROM.

2.2.2 Mounting location

The accumulation of air or formation of gas bubbles in the measuring tube can result in an increase in measuring errors. For this reason avoid the following mounting locations in the pipe:

At the highest point of a pipeline. Risk of air accumulating! Directly upstream from a free pipe outlet in a down pipe.

A0008154

Installation of pumps

Do not install the sensor on the intake side of a pump. This precaution is to avoid low pressure and the consequent risk of damage to the lining of the measuring tube. It might be necessary to

use pulse dampers in systems incorporating piston pumps, piston diaphragm pumps or peristaltic pumps.

Information on the measuring system's pressure tightness and resistance to vibration and shock ---> can be found in the Operating Instructions of the CD-ROM.

A0003203

6 Endress+Hauser




a

Partially filled pipes

Partially filled pipes with gradients necessitate a drain-type configuration. The empty pipe detection (EPD) function offers additional protection by detecting empty or partially filled pipes.

Caution! Risk of solids accumulating! Do not install the sensor at the lowest point in the drain. It is

advisable to install a cleaning valve.

"NooM11., , 2 x DN

\A-CDN A0008155

Installation in a partially filled pipe

Down pipes

Install a siphon or a vent valve downstream of the sensor in down pipes longer than 5 meters (16 ft). This precaution is to avoid low pressure and the consequent risk of damage to the lining of the measuring tube. This measure also prevents the system losing prime, which could cause air pockets. For information on the pressure tightness of the measuring tube lining, --> see the Operating Instructions on the CD-ROM.

A0008157

Measures for installation in a down pipe (h > 5 m/16 ft)

1. Vent valve

2. Siphon

Endress+Hauser 7




6

2.2.3 Orientation

An optimum orientation helps avoid gas and air accumulations and buildup in the measuring tube. The measuring device, nevertheless, supplies a range of functions and tools to measure problematic fluids correctly:

Electrode cleaning circuitry (ECC) to prevent electrically conductive deposits in the measuring tube, e.g. for fluids causing buildup Empty pipe detection (EPD) for detecting partially filled measuring tubes, e.g. in the case of

degassing fluids or varying process pressures Exchangeable measuring electrodes for abrasive fluids (only Promag W)

Vertical orientation

A0008158

Horizontal orientation

This orientation is optimum for self-emptying piping systems and when using empty pipe detection (EPD) or open electrode detection (OED).

The measuring electrode plane should be horizontal. This prevents brief insulation of the two electrodes by entrained air bubbles.

Caution! In the case of horizontal orientation, empty pipe detection only works correctly if the transmitter housing is facing upwards. Otherwise there is no guarantee that empty pipe detection will

respond if the measuring tube is only partially filled or empty.

2

A0008159

1. EPD electrode for empty pipe detection (not for Promag H, DN 2 to 8, 1/12" to 5/16").

2. Measuring electrodes for signal detection

3. Reference electrode for potential equalization (not for Promag H)

8 Endress+Hauser




Inlet and outlet runs

If possible, install the sensor upstream from fittings such as valves, T-pieces, elbows, etc.

5 x DN 2 x DN

A0008160

2.2.4 Vibrations

The following inlet and outlet runs must be observed in order to meet accuracy specifications:

Inlet run: 5 x DN Outlet run: 2 x DN

Secure and fix both the piping and the sensor if vibrations are severe.

A000816I

Measures to prevent device vibration (L > 10 m/33 ft)

6 Caution! It is advisable to install the sensor and transmitter separately if vibration is excessively severe. For information on the permitted shock and vibration resistance -) , see the Operating Instructions on the CD-ROM.

Endress+Hauser 9




2.2.5 Foundations, supports

If the nominal diameter is DN 350 14"), mount the sensor on a foundation of adequate load-bearing strength.

6 Caution! Risk of damage! Do not support the weight of the sensor on the metal casing. This would buckle the casing and damage the internal magnetic coils.

'300000°

'://r1/ /2/////2/

A0008163

2.2.6 Length of connecting cable

Comply with the following instructions in order to ensure correct measuring results: Secure the cable run or route the cable in an armored conduit. Movement of the cable can falsify the measuring signal, particularly if the fluid conductivity is low. Route the cable well clear of electrical machines and switching elements. Ensure potential equalization between the sensor and transmitter, if necessary. The permissible cable length Lim, depends on the fluid conductivity.

10

[µS /cm]

200 -

100

50

50 100

I I I 1

0 200 400

[m] 200 L max

' '

600

A0008981

Gray shaded area = permissible range

Lmax = length of connecting cable in [m] /]ft]

Fluid conductivity in [µS /cm]

Endress+Hauser




a

2.3 Installing the Promag W sensor

2.3.1 Seals

a0008105

Note! Screws, nuts, seals, etc. are not included in the scope of supply and must be supplied by the customer.

The sensor is installed between the two pipe flanges: The requisite torques must be observed

Page 14 ff.

Information on the installation of additional ground disks -) Page 11

Comply with the following instructions when installing seals: Hard rubber lining additional seals are always required! Polyurethane lining additional seals are recommended. For DIN flanges, only use seals to DIN EN 1514-1. Make sure that the mounted seals do not protrude into the piping cross-section.

Caution! Risk of short circuit! Do not use electrically conductive sealing compounds such as graphite! An electrically conductive layer could form on the inside of the measuring tube and short-circuit the measuring signal.

2.3.2 Ground cable (DN 25 to 2000, 1" to 78")

If necessary, special ground cables can be ordered as accessories for potential equalization.

2.3.3 Mounting ground disks (DN 25 to 300, 1" to 12")

Depending on the application conditions, e.g. in the case of lined or floating pipes, it may be necessary to also mount ground disks between the sensor and the pipe flange for potential equalization. Ground disks can be ordered from Endress+Hauser as a separate accessory.

Caution! When using ground disks (incl. seals), the face-to-face length is increased! For information on the dimensions, see the associated Technical Information on the CD-ROM. Hard rubber lining -> additional seals must be mounted both between the sensor and ground disk as well as between the ground disk and pipe flange. Polyurethane lining -* additional seals must be mounted between the ground disk and pipe flange.

Endress+ Hauser 11




A0008167

1. Place the ground disk and the additional seals between the measuring device flange and pipe flange (see graphic).

2. Insert the screws through the flange bores. Tighten the nuts so that they are still loose.

3. Now rotate the ground disk as shown in the graphic until the handle strikes the screws. This correctly centers the ground disk automatically.

4. Tighten the screws to the required torque -> Page 14

5. Wire the ground disks in accordance with the grounding concept of the plant.

2.4 Installing the Promag P sensor Caution!

The plates mounted on the two sensor flanges protect the PTFE which is turned over the flanges and, consequently, should not be removed until immediately prior to mounting the sensor. The protective plates must always remain mounted while the device is in storage. Make sure that the lining at the flange is not damaged or removed.

a 0008165

Ckb, Note! Screws, nuts, seals, etc. are not included in the scope of

supply and must be supplied by the customer.

The sensor is installed between the two pipe flanges: The requisite torques must be observed -> Page 14 ff.

Information on the installation of additional ground disks -> Page 13

12 Endress+Hauser




a

a

2.4.1 Seals

Comply with the following instructions when installing seals: No seals are required for PFA or PFTE measuring tube lining. For DIN flanges, only use seals to DIN EN 1514-1. Make sure that the mounted seals do not protrude into the piping cross-section.

Caution! Risk of short circuit! Do not use electrically conductive sealing compounds such as graphite! An electrically conductive layer could form on the inside of the measuring tube and short-circuit the measuring signal.

2.4.2 Ground cable (DN 25 to 600, 1" to 24")

If necessary, special ground cables can be ordered as accessories for potential equalization.

2.4.3 Mounting ground disks (DN 25 to 300, 1" to 12")

Depending on the application conditions, e.g. in the case of lined or floating pipes, it may be necessary to also mount ground disks between the sensor and the pipe flange for potential equalization. Ground disks can be ordered from Endress+Hauser as a separate accessory.

Caution! When using ground disks (incl. seals), the face-to-face length is increased! For information on the dimensions, see the associated Technical Information on the CD-ROM. PTFE and PFA lining additional seals must be mounted between the ground disk and pipe flange.

A0008167

1. Place the ground disk and the additional seal(s) between the device flange and the pipe flange.

2. Insert the screws through the flange bores. Tighten the nuts so that they are still loose.

3. Now rotate the ground disk as shown in the graphic until the handle strikes the screws. This correctly centers the ground disk automatically.

4. Tighten the screws to the required torque -4 Page 14

5. Wire the ground disks in accordance with the grounding concept of the plant.

Endress+Hauser 13



Installation Proline Promag 10

2.5 Tightening torques for Promag W and Promag P

The tightening torques listed below are for lubricated threads only. Always tighten the screws uniformly and in diagonally opposite sequence. Overtightening the screws will deform the sealing faces or damage the seals. The values listed below apply only to pipes not subjected to tensile stress.

2.5.1 Tightening torques for pressure ratings in accordance with EN (DIN)

..

Nominal ,

diameter

[mm]

.

,

EN (DIN)

Pressure rating

[bar]

Screws

Max.

Promag

Hard rubber

tightening torque

W

,Polyurethane

[Nm]

Promag P

PTFE

25 PN 40 4 xM 12 - 15 26

32 PN 40 4 xM 16 - 24 41

40 PN 40 4 xM 16 - 31 52

50 PN 40 4 xM 16 - 40 65

65 * PN 16 8 x M 16 32 27 43

65 PN 40 8 x M 16 32 27 43

80 PN 16 8 x M 16 40 34 53

80 PN 40 8 x M 16 40 34 53

100 PN 16 8 x M 16 43 36 57

100 PN 40 8 x M 20 59 50 78

125 PN 16 8 xM 16 56 48 75

125 PN 40 8 xM 24 83 71 111

150 PN 16 8 x M 20 74 63 99

150 PN 40 8 xM 24 104 88 136

200 PN 10 8 xM 20 106 91 141

200 PN 16 12 xM 20 70 61 94

200 PN 25 12 xM 24 104 92 138

250 PN 10 12 xM 20 82 71 110

250 PN 16 12 xM 24 98 85 131

250 PN 25 12 xM 27 150 134 200

300 PN 10 12 x M 20 94 81 125

300 PN 16 12 xM 24 134 118 179

300 PN 25 16 xM 27 153 138 204

350 PN 10 16 xM 20 112 118 188

350 PN 16 16 xM 24 152 165 254

350 PN 25 16 xM 30 227 252 380

400 PN 10 16 xM 24 151 167 260

400 PN 16 16 xM 27 193 215 330

400 PN 25 16 xM 33 289 326 488

450 PN 10 20 xM 24 153 133 235

14 Endress+Hauser



Proline Promag 10 Installation,

Nominal diameter

[mm]

EN :(151.N),

,Pressure rating,

[bar],

Screwsa

Max.

Promag

Hard rubber

tightening`torque:[Nin]

W ,

'Polyurethane

. Promag P;

PTFE

450 PN 16 20 xM27 198 196 300

450 PN 25 20 xM33 256 253 385

500 PN 10 20 xM24 155 171 265

500 PN 16 20 xM30 275 300 448

500 PN 25 20 xM33 317 360 533

600 PN 10 20 xM27 206 219 345

600* PN 16 20 xM33 415 443 658

600 PN 25 20 xM36 431 516 731

700 PN 10 24 xM27 246 246 - 700 PN 16 24 xM33 278 318 - - 700 PN 25 24 xM39 449 507 - 800 PN 10 24xM30 331 316 - 800 PN 16 24 xM36 369 385 - 800 PN 25 24 xM45 664 721 - 900 PN 10 28 xM30 316 307 - 900 PN 16 28 xM36 353 398 - 900 PN 25 28 xM45 690 716 - 1000 PN 10 28 xM33 402 405 - 1000 PN 16 28 xM39 502 518 - 1000 PN 25 28 xM52 970 971 - 1200 PN 6 32 xM30 319 299 - 1200 PN 10 32 x M 36 564 568 - 1200 PN 16 32 xM 45 701 753 - 1400 PN 6 36 xM 33 430 398 - 1400 PN 10 36 xM39 654 618 - 1400 PN 16 36 xM 45 729 762 - 1600 PN 6 40 xM33 440 417 - 1600 PN 10 40 xM45 946 893 - 1600 PN 16 40 xM52 1007 1100 - 1800 PN 6 44 xM36 547 521 - 1800 PN 10 44 xM45 961 895 - 1800 PN 16 44 xM52 1108 1003 - 2000 PN 6 48 xM39 629 605 - 2000 PN 10 48 xM45 1047 1092 - .

2000 PN 16 48 xM56 1324 1261 - * Designed in accordance with EN 1092-1 (not to DIN 2501)

Endress+Hauser 15




2.5.2 Tightening torques for pressure ratings in accordance with JIS

NOminal chaMeter, -

(Mini

JIS

Pressure rating

[bar]

.Screlks

Max.

Promag

Hard.ruhher

tightening torque-

W

; Polyurethane

(Nmj

PromagP,

PTFE .

25 10K 4 xMl6 - 19 32

25 20K 4 xMl6 - 19 32

32 10K 4 xMl6 - 22 38

32 20K 4 xMl6 - 22 38

40 10K 4 xMl6 - 24 41

40 20K 4 xMl6 - 24 41

50 10K 4 xMl6 - 33 54

50 20K 8 xMl6 - 17 27

65 10K 4 xMl6 55 45 74

65 20K 8 xMl6 28 23 37

80 10K 8 xM 16 29 23 38

80 20K 8 xM20 42 35 57

100 10K 8 xM 16 35 29 47

100 20K 8 xM20 56 48 75

125 10K 8 xM20 60 51 80

125 20K 8 xM22 91 79 121

150 10K 8 xM20 75 63 99

150 20K 12 xM22 81 72 108

200 10K 12 xM20 61 52 82

200 20K 12 xM22 91 80 121

250 10K 12 xM22 100 87 133

250 20K 12 xM24 159 144 212

300 10K 16 xM22 74 63 99

300 20K 16 xM24 138 124 183

16 Endress+Hauser



Proline Promag 10 Installation

2.5.3 Tightening torques for pressure ratings in accordance with ANSI

Nominal ,

'._ diameter

[inch]

, ANSI`

Pressure rating '

[ibs]

Screws

, Max,tightening

Promag,W,

Hard rubber ,

torque,' _

-rolyurethanei

bf ft] .

. _

,Promag P

PTFE -

1" Class 150 4 x 1/2" - 5.2 8.1

1" Class 300 4 x 5/8" - 5.9 10

11/2" Class 150 4 x 1/2" - 7.4 18

11/2" Class 300 4 x 3/4" - 11 25

2" Class 150 4 x 5/8" - 16 35

2" Class 300 8 x 5/8" - 8 17

3" Class 150 4 x 5/8" 44 32 58

3" Class 300 8 x 3/4" 28 19 35

4" Class 150 8 x 5/8" 31 23 41

4" Class 300 8 x 3/4" 43 30 49

6" Class 150 8 x 3/4" 58 44 78

6" Class 300 12 x 3/4" 52 38 54

8" Class 150 8 x 3/4" 79 59 105

10" Class 150 12 x 7/8" 74 55 100

12" Class 150 12 x 7/8" 98 76 131

14" Class 150 12 x 1" 100 117 192

16" Class 150 16 x I" 94 1 I 1 181

18" Class 150 16 x 0/8" 150 173 274

20" Class 150 20 x 1'/8" 135 160 252

24" Class 150 20 x 11/4" 198 226 352

Endress+Hauser 17




2.5.4 Tightening torques for pressure ratings in accordance with AS 2129

Nominal diameter

Imin1

AS 2129

Pressure rating Screws

Max. tightening

Promag W

Hard rubber

torque [Nin]

Promag P,

PTFE

25 Table E 4xM12 - 21

50 Table E 4 x M 16 - 42

80 Table E 4 x M 16 49 - 100 Table E 8 x M 16 38 - 150 Table E 8 x M 20 64 - 200 Table E 8 x M 20 96 - 250 Table E 12 xM20 98 - 300 Table E 12 xM 24 123 - 350 Table E 12 xM24 203 - 400 Table E 12 xM24 226 - 500 Table E 16 xM24 271 - 600 Table E 16 xM30 439 -

2.5.5 Tightening torques for pressure ratings in accordance with AS 4087

Nominal y

4"° diameter

mmj

AS 4087 '

Pressure ,"- rating Screws

Max. tightening

,,Promag W

',Hard rubber

torqiie. [Nmj

- '777'- , Promag P

PTFE

50 PN 16 4 x M 16 - 42

80 PN 16 4 x M 16 49 - 100 PN 16 4 x M 16 76 - 150 PN 16 8 x M 20 52 - 200 PN 16 8 x M 20 77 - 250 PN 16 8xM20 147 - 300 PN 16 12 x M 24 103 - 350 PN 16 12 xM24 203 - 400 PN 16 12 xM24 226 - 500 PN 16 16 xM24 271 - 600 PN 16 16 x M 30 393 -

18 Endress+Hauser



Proline Promag 10 Installation

2.5.6 Tightening torques for pressure ratings in accordance with AWWA

Nominal diameter

[inch]

AWWA" Pressure

rating Screws

.Max. tightening

Promag .

Hard' rubber

torquellbf ft]..

W:

-- Polyurethane ,

28" Class D 28 x 1 '/4" 182 215

30" Class D 28 x 1 '/, 212 223

32" Class D 28 x 1 I /2" 291 311

36" Class D 32 x 1 1/2" 309 317

40" Class D 36 x 1 '/2" 310 352

42" Class D 36 x 1 Y2" 389 382

48" Class D 44 x 1 I/2" 407 392

54" Class D 44 x 1 3/4" 538 467

60" Class D 52 x 1 3/4" 559 614

66" Class D 52 x 1 3/4" 698 704

72" Class D 60 x 1 3/4" 719 802

78" Class D 64 x 2" 629 580

Endress+Hauser 19




a

a

a

2.6 Installing the Promag H sensor Depending on the order specifications, the sensor is supplied with or without ready-mounted process connections. Mounted process connections are fixed to the sensor with 4 hexagonal-headed bolts.

Caution! Depending on the application and length of the pipe, the sensor may have to be supported or

additionally secured. The sensor must be secured if using plastic process connections. An

appropriate wall mounting kit can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser as an accessory.

2.6.1 Seals

When mounting the process connections, make sure that the seals in question are free from dirt and centered correctly.

Caution! The screws must be securely tightened in the case of metal process connections. Together with the sensor, the process connection forms a metal connection that ensures defined seal compression. The seals should be replaced periodically depending on the application, particularly if molded seals are used (aseptic version)! The intervals between seal replacement depend on the frequency of the cleaning cycles and the fluid and cleaning temperatures. Replacement seals can be ordered as an accessory.

2.6.2 Welding the sensor into the pipe (weld nipples)

Caution! Risk of destroying the electronics! Make sure that the welding system is not grounded via the sensor or transmitter.

a. Secure the sensor with a few welding points in the pipe. A welding jig suitable for this purpose can be ordered separately as an accessory.

b. Release the screws on the process connection flange and remove the sensor, including the seal, from the pipe.

c. Weld the process connection into the pipe.

d. Mount the sensor back into the pipe. In doing so, make sure the seals are clean and correctly positioned.

Note! When welding is performed correctly with thin-walled pipes carrying food, the seal is not damaged by the heat even when it is mounted. It is recommended, however, to disassemble the sensor and seal. For the disassembly work, it must be possible to open the pipe approx. 8 mm (0.31 in) in total.

20 Endress+Hauser




2.7 Installing the transmitter housing

2.7.1 Turning the transmitter housing

Turning the aluminum field housing

Aluminum field housing for non-Ex area

b

2.7.2 Turning the onsite display

4 x 45°

d

A C

A0003237

A0008982

a. Unscrew cover of the electronics compartment from the transmitter housing.

b. Remove the display module from the transmitter retaining rails.

c. Turn the display to the desired position (max. 4 x 45° in each direction).

d. Fit the display back onto the retaining rails.

e. Screw the cover of the electronics compartment firmly back onto the transmitter housing.

Endress+Hauser 21




6

2.7.3 Mounting the transmitter (remote version)

The transmitter can be mounted in the following ways: Wall mounting Pipe mounting

The transmitter and the sensor must be mounted separate in the following circumstances: Poor accessibility Lack of space Extreme fluid/ambient temperatures Severe vibration (>2 g/2 h per day; 10 to 100 Hz)

Caution! The ambient temperature range (-20 to +60°C) may not be exceeded at the mounting location. Avoid direct sunlight. If the device is mounted to a warm pipe, make sure that the housing temperature does not exceed +60 °C, which is the maximum permissible temperature.

Mount the transmitter as illustrated in the diagram.

A

Fig. 1: Mounting the transmitter (remote version)

A Mounted directly on the wall B Pipe mounting

B

A0003216

22 Endress+Hauser




2.8 Post-installation check

Is the measuring device damaged (visual inspection)? Does the device correspond to specifications at the measuring point, including process temperature and pressure, ambient temperature, minimum fluid conductivity, measuring range, etc.? Does the arrow on the sensor nameplate match the actual direction of flow through the pipe? Is the position of the measuring electrode plane correct? Is the position of the empty pipe detection electrode correct? Were all screws tightened to the specified torques when the sensor was installed? Were the correct seals used (type, material, installation)? Are the measuring point number and labeling correct (visual inspection)? Were the inlet and outlet runs respected? - Inlet run 5 x DN

- Outlet run 2 x DN

Is the measuring device protected against moisture and direct sunlight? Is the sensor adequately protected against vibration (attachment, support)? Acceleration up to 2 g by analogy with IEC 600 68-2-8

Endress+Hauser 23



Wiring Pro line Promag 10

3 Wiring /!\ Warning!

Risk of electric shock! Components carry dangerous voltages. Never mount or wire the measuring device while it is connected to the power supply. Before connecting the power supply, check the safety equipment. Route the power supply and signal cables so they are securely seated. Seal the cable entries and covers tight.

Caution! Risk of damaging the electronic components!

Connect the power supply in accordance with the connection data on the nameplate. Connect the signal cable in accordance with the connection data in the Operating Instructions or the Ex documentation on the CD-ROM.

a

a

a

In addition, for the remote version:


Only connect sensors and transmitters with the same serial number. Observe the cable specifications of the connecting cable -> Operating Instructions on the CD-ROM.

Note! Install the connecting cable securely to prevent movement.

In addition, for measuring devices with fieldbus communication:


Observe the cable specification of the fieldbus cable -> Operating Instructions on the CD-ROM. Keep the stripped and twisted lengths of cable shield as short as possible. Screen and ground the signal lines --> Operating Instructions on the CD-ROM. When using in systems without potential equalization -> Operating Instructions on the CD-ROM.

In addition, for Ex-certified measuring devices:

Warning! When wiring Ex-certified measuring devices, all the safety instructions, wiring diagrams, technical information etc. of the related Ex documentation must be observed Ex documentation on the CD-ROM.

24 Endress+Hauser



Pro line Promag 10 Wiring

3.1 Connecting the various housing types Wire the unit using the terminal assignment diagram inside the cover.

3.1.1 Compact version

A0007545

Transmitter connection:

1 Connection diagram inside the connection compartment cover

2 Power supply cable 3 Signal cable or fieldbus cable 4 Optional

3.1.2 Remote version (transmitter)

A0008218

3.1.3 Remote version (sensor)



2 Power supply cable 3 Signal cable or fieldbus cable 4 Optional

Connecting the connecting cable (-> Page 26 ff.):

5 Sensor/transmitter connecting cable



Connecting cable connection:

A0008037 5 Sensor/transmitter connecting cable

Endress+Hauser 25




3.2 Connecting the remote version connecting cable

3.2.1 Connecting cable for Promag W and P

Connecting cable termination

Terminate the signal and coil current cables as shown in the figure below (Detail A).

Fit the fine-wire cores with cable end ferrules (Detail B).

Signal cable termination

Make sure that the cable end ferrules do not touch the wire shields on the sensor side! Minimum distance = 1 mm (0.04 in), exception "GND" = green cable.

mm (inch) a* = 170 (6.69) b* = 20 (0.79) c = 80 (3.15) d = 17 (0.67) e = 8 (0.31) f = 50 (1.97) g = ?_ 1 (.?_ 0.04)

Sensor

A

B

Transmitter

a0008983

0 = Cable end ferrules, red, 0 1.0 mm (0.041; = Cable end ferrules, white, 0 0.5 mm (0.02") * = Stripping for armored cables only

Coil current cable termination

mm (inch) a* = 100 (3.94) b = 80 (3.15) c 50 (1.97) d = 17 (0.67) e = 8 (0.31)

Insulate one core of the three-core cable at the level of the core reinforcement; you only require two cores for the connection.

mm (inch) a* = 160 (6.3) b* = 20 (0.79) c = 70 (2.76) d = 50 (1.97) e = 8 (0.31)

= 10 (0.39)

O

0

A

B

Transmitter

a0008984

O = Cable end ferrules, red, 0 1.0 mm (0.04"); = Cable end ferrules, white, 0 0.5 mm (0.02") * = Stripping for armored cables only

mm (inch) a* = 90 (3.54) b = 70 (2.76) c = 50 (1.97) d = 10 (0.39) e = 8 (0.31)

26 Endress+Hauser




3.2.2 Promag H connecting cable

Connecting cable termination

Terminate the signal and coil current cables as shown in the figure below (Detail A).

Fit the fine-wire cores with cable end ferrules (Detail B).

Signal cable termination

Make sure that the cable end ferrules do not touch the wire shields on the sensor side! Minimum distance = 1 mm (0.04 in), exception "CND" = green cable.

mm (inch) a = 80 (3.15) b = 15 (0.59) c = 17 (0.67) d = 8 (0.31) e = 1 0.04)

Sensor

A

7--- ____ L____. ---,:__.-

----- --,_

10:1'1..d n, B -cr.C)

_

GND GND o ®

0 © 0

Transmitter

a0008985

@ = Cable end ferrules, red, 0 1.0 mm (0.04"); 0 = Cable end ferrules, white, 0 0.5 mm (0.02")

Coil current cable termination

mm (inch) a = 80 (3.15) b = 50 (1.97) c = 17 (0.67) d = 8 (0.31)

Insulate one core of the three-core cable at the level of the core reinforcement; you only require two cores for the connection.

mm (inch) a = 70 (2.76) b = 40 (1.57) c = 15 (0.59) d = 8 (0.31)

Sensor Transmitter

60008986

O = Cable end ferrules, red, 0 1.0 mm (0.04"); 0 = Cable end ferrules, white, 0 0.5 mm (0.02")

mm (inch) a = 70 (2.76) b = 50 (1.97)

= 10 (0.39) d = 8 (0.31)

Endress+Hauser 27




3.2.3 Connecting cable connection

A

b

D

S1 El E2 S2GNDE S

I ler AL M7 36

RIMOSP 6 8 4

n.c.

.111

41110

VAL 111r41 a 42 41

©0 4 11101101t

El E2GNDE

A Transmitter housing on connection housing, remote version

B Sensor connection housing, remote version for Promag W/P C Sensor connection housing, remote version for Promag H, DN 25 D Sensor connection housing, remote version for Promag H, DN 40

a Ground terminals (are provided for potential equalization connection) b Coil circuit connecting cable c Signal circuit connecting cable (electrodes)

n.c. = not connected, isolated cable shields

Cable colors for terminal numbers: 5/6 = brown 7/8 = white 4 = green 36/37 = yellow

n.c.

a -v #I t 1 42 41

A0008987

28 Endress+Hauser




3.3 Potential equalization Perfect measurement is only ensured when the medium and the sensor have the same electrical potential. Most sensors have a reference electrode installed as standard, which guarantees the required potential connection. This usually means that the use of ground disks or other measures are unnecessary.

Promag W Reference electrode available as standard. Promag P

- Reference electrode available as standard for electrode material: 1.4435 (AISI 316L), Alloy C-22 and tantalum

- Reference electrode optionally available for electrode material: Pt/Rh Promag H

- No reference electrode available. There is always an electrical connection to the fluid via the metal process connection.

- In the case of plastic process connections, potential equalization must be ensured through the use of grounding rings.

Note! When installing in metal pipes, it is advisable to connect the ground terminal of the transmitter housing to the piping. Pay particular attention to company-internal grounding concepts.

4a'

000

A0003195

6 Caution! For sensors without reference electrodes or without metal process connections, carry out potential equalization as per the instructions for special cases described in the Operating Instructions (see the CD). These special measures are particularly important when standard grounding practice cannot be ensured or extremely strong equalizing currents are expected.

Endress+Hauser 29




3.4 Degree of protection The devices meet all the requirements for IP 67.

After mounting in the field or service work, the following points have to be observed to ensure that IP 67 protection is retained:

Install the measuring device in such a way that the cable entries do not point upwards. Do not remove the seal from the cable entry. Remove all unused cable entries and plug them with suitable drain plugs.

A0007549

A0007550

3.5 Post-connection check

Tighten the cable entries correctly.

The cables must loop down before they enter the cable entries ("water trap").

Are cables or the device damaged (visual inspection)? Does the supply voltage match the information on the nameplate? Do the cables used comply with the necessary specifications? Do the mounted cables have adequate strain relief and are they routed securely? Is the cable type route completely isolated? Without loops and crossovers? Are all screw terminals firmly tightened? Have all the measures for grounding and potential equalization been correctly implemented? Are all cable entries installed, firmly tightened and correctly sealed? Cable routed as a "water trap" in loops? Are all the housing covers installed and securely tightened?

In addition, for measuring devices with fieldbus communication: Are all the connecting components (T-boxes, junction boxes, connectors, etc.) connected with each other correctly? Has each fieldbus segment been terminated at both ends with a bus terminator? Has the max. length of the fieldbus cable been observed in accordance with the specifications? Has the max. length of the spurs been observed in accordance with the specifications? Is the fieldbus cable fully shielded and correctly grounded?

30 Endress+Hauser



Pro line Promag 10 Commissioning

4 Commissioning

4.1 Switching on the measuring device

On completion of the installation (successful post-installation check), wiring (successful post-connection check) and after making the necessary hardware settings, where applicable, the permitted power supply (see nameplate) can be switched on for the measuring device.

When the power supply is switched on, the measuring device performs a number of power-up checks and device self-checks. As this procedure progresses the following messages can appear on the onsite display:

Display examples:

PROMAG 16

V XX.XX.XX '

Start-up message

The measuring device starts operating as soon as the startup procedure is complete. Various measured values and/or status variables appear on the display.

Note! If an error occurs during startup, this is indicated by an error message.

Endress+Hauser 31



Commissioning Pro line Promag 10

4.2 Operation

4.2.1 Display elements

3 4

+48.25 xx/yy +3702.6 x

Display lines/fields

1. Main line for primary measured values

2. Additional line for additional measured variables/status variables

3. Current measured values

4. Engineering units/time units

A0007557

4.2.2 Operating elements

Esc , Operating keys

1. (-) Minus key for entering, selecting

0 0 0 2. (+) Plus key for entering, selecting

2

3. Enter key for calling the function matrix, saving

When the +/- keys are pressed simultaneously (Esc): \ji \I \I3 A0007559 Exit the function matrix step-by-step:

> 3 sec. = cancel data input and return to the measured value display

4.2.3 Displaying error messages

I. Type of error:

P XXXXXXXXXX P = Process error, S = System error 1 5

2. Error message type:

#000 00:00:05 = Fault message, ! = Notice message

3. Error number

3 4 4. Duration of the last error that occurred:

Hours: Minutes: Seconds

A0007561 5. Error designation List of all error messages, see associated Operating Instructions on the CD-ROM

32 Endress+Hauser




4.3 Navigating within the function matrix

O

A0007562

1. --> Enter the function matrix (starting with measured value display)

2. -> Select the group (e.g. OPERATION) E Confirm selection

3. ra -> Select function (e.g. LANGUAGE)

4. -> Enter code 10 (only for the first time you access the function matrix) E Confirm entry

-> Change function/selection (e.g. ENGLISH)

CI ---> Confirm selection

5. 6S -> Return to measured value display step by step

6. ffi > 3 s -> Return immediately to measured value display

Endress+Hauser 33



Commissioning Proline Promag 10

4.4 Device functions to be configured during commissioning

Check the values and settings of the device functions not marked gray in the following function matrix (UNIT VOL. FLOW, UNIT VOLUME, LANGUAGE, CURRENT RANGE etc.) and adapt them to your application.

A complete description of all the device functions is provided in the Operating Instructions on the CD-ROM.

Group Functions

SYSTEM UNITS

OPERATION

.USER INTERFACE

TOTALIZER

CURRENT OUTPUT

PULSE/ STATUS OUTP.

COMMUNICA- TION

PROCESS. PARAM.

SYSTEM PARAM.

SENSOR DATA -

SUPERVISION

SIMULAT. SYSTEM'

SENSOR VERSION

AMPLIFIER vERS.

UNIT VOL. FLOW

UNIT VOLUME

, ACCESS CODE

DEFINE'PRIV. CODE

FORMAT , CONTRAST

' LCD

TEST DISPLAY

SUM OVERFLOW RESET

TOTALIZER

CURRENT VALUE TIME RANGE 20 mA CONSTANT

OPERATING PULSE PULSE OUTPUT MODE VALUE WIDTH SIGNAL

ASSIGN SWITCH-ON SWITCH-OFF STATUS POINT POINT

TAG ' TAG BUS HART. WRITE MANUFAC- DEVICE NAME ' DESCR. ADDRESS PROTECT. . TORER: ID Jp

LOW, FLOW

, ,CUT OFF , t r:

PD EPD ADJ:

INSTALL. MEASURING POS. SYSTEM DIRECTION MODE ZERO-RET. DAMP.

K-FACTOR ZERO POINT NOMINAL DIAMETER

MEASURING PERIOD

EPD ELECTRODE

FAILSAFE

MODE ALARM DELAY

SYSTEM RESET

SELF CHECKING

SIM. Sim: - VALUE- sm., FAILSAFE ';MEASURAND MEASURAND

SERIAL- NUMBER

SENSOR TYPE

SW REV.

34 Endress+Hauser




4.5 Troubleshooting

A complete description of all the error messages is provided in the Operating Instructions on the CD-ROM.

Note! The output signals (e.g. pulse, frequency) of the measuring device must correspond to the higher-order controller.

Endress+Hauser 35



www.endress.com/worldwide

Endress+Hauser People for Process Automation

KA032D/06/en/01.08 71067518 FM+SGML 6.0



Endress+Hauser

Flow Calibration with Adjustment

40036294-1921942

52713317 FCP-3

People for Process Automation

Purchase order number Calibration rig

AU-49225603-10 / Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG 75.0 dm3/s ( 100%) Order N°/Manufacturer Calibrated full scale

10W1F-S50A1AN4A4AA Calibration Interface Order code Calibrated output

PROMAG 10 W DN150 1.0219 Transmitter/Sensor Calibration factor

A5003820000 0 Serial N° Zero point

31.6 °C Tag N° Water temperature

Flow Flow

1%1 WO/s/

5.0 46.3

46.5 98.8

3.75 34.7 34.9 74.1

Duration lsec1

30.2 29.9

29.8 29.8

*as.: of rate

'Calculated value (4 -20 mAl

V target V meas. A or.' Outp. ** Id m'l 1%1 1mAl

113.374 1038.10

1039.34 2210.82

112.777 1038.30 1039.17 2207.83

-0.53 0.02

-0.02 -0.14

4.80 11.41

11.44 19.79

Measured error % o.r.

1.5 -

0.5 -

0

Tolerance limb (±0.5% or.' ± z.s.1

---

-as-

-1-

0 --- --- ---

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Flo v 1%1

*z.s.: Zero stability

For detailed data concerning output specifications of the unit under test, see technical informations (TI), chapter Performance characteristics. Traceability to the national standard for all test instruments used for the calibration is guaranteed.

Endress+Hauser Flowtec operates ISO/IEC 17025 accredited calibration facilities in Reinach (CH), Cernay (FR), Greenwood (USA)

and Aurangabad (IN).

27/05/2008 Date of calibration

Page 1 / 1

Laxman A. Magar Operator

Certified acc. to ISO 9001



Endress+Ha user People for Process Automation

Parameter Setting

1921942

52713317 PROMAG 10 W Purchase order number Transmitter/Sensor

AU-49225603-10 / Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG DN150 Order N°/Manufacturer Nominal diameter

10W1F-S50A1AN4A4AA Order code

A5003820000 Serial N°

Current output 1

Value 20 mA

Current span

Tag N°

150 m3/hr 4-20 mA HART NAMUR

Pulse output 1

Pulse value 0.025 m3/P Output signal passive/negative

The above parameters are set according to your order. Please refer to the Operating Manual for any parameters not mentioned.

27/05/2008 Date

Endress+Hauser Flowtec (India) Pvt. Ltd.

M-174/175, Waluj MIDC Aurangabad - 431 136, India

Page I / I



ID

7. Electrical Equip. Technical Inform



GI ID IR ID ID

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1




7.0 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL INFORMATION

File: //.1pr_Server/docs/lsched/Masters.doc Revision 0 Date: 25 May 2001



sprecher+ Technical Information

I schuh I CA7 3-Pole Contactors

Electrical Data

Rated Insulation Voltage U,

IEC, AS,BS,SEV, VDE 0660

UL, CSA

CA7-9 CA7-12 CA7-16 CA7-23 CA7-30 CA7-37 CA7-43 CA7-60

690V

600V

CA7-72 CA7-85

- 0

0 Rated Impulse Voltage U,,,,,, (kV] 8kV

Rated Voltage 1/ -Main Contacts

AC 50/60Hz

DC

115, 200, 208, 230, 240, 380, 400, 415, 460, 500,

24, 48, 110, 115, 220, 230, 300, 440V

575, 690V CA7

Operating Frequency for AC Loads [Hz) 50...60Hz

Switching Motor Loads

Standard IEC Ratings

AC-2, AC-3, AC-4 230V [A] 12 15 20 26.5 35 38 44 62 72 85

DOL Reversing 240V [A] 12 15 20 26.5 35 38 44 62 72 85

50Hz/60' C 400V [A] 9 12 16 23 30 37 43 60 72 85

415V [A] 9 12 16 23 30 37 43 60 72 85

500V [A] 7 10 14 20 25 30 38 55 67 80

690V [A] 5 7 9 12 18 21 25 34 42 49

230V [kW] 3 4 5.5 7.5 10 11 13 18.5 22 25

240V [kW] 3 4 5.5 7.5 10 11 13 18.5 22 25

400V [kW] 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 32 40 45

415V [kW] 4 5.5 7.5 11 15 20 22 32 40 45

500V [kW] 4 5.5 7.5 13 15 20 25 37 45 55

690V [kW] 4 5.5 7.5 10 15 18.5 22 32 40 45

UL/CSA/IEC

DOL Reversing 115V [A] 9.8 9.8 16 24 24 34 34 56 56 80

60Hz/60' C 10 230V [A] 10 12 17 17 28 28 40 50 68 68

0 115V [HP] 1/2 1/2 1 2 2 3 3 5 5 7-1/2

230V [HP] 11/2 2 3 3 5 5 7-1/2 10 15 15

200V [A] 7.8 11 17.5 17.5 25.3 32.2 32.2 48.3 62.1 78.2

30 230V [A) 6.8 9.6 15.2 22 28 28 42 54 68 80

460V [A] 7.6 11 14 21 27 34 40 52 65 77

575V [A] 9 11 17 17 27 32 32 52 62 62

200V [HP] 2 3 5 5 7-1/2 10 10 15 20 25

230V [HP] 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 10 15 20 25 30

460V [HP] 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60

575V [HP] 7-1/2 10 15 15 25 30 30 50 60 60

AC2 [ops/hr] 450 450 450 400 400 400 400 300 250 200 Maximum Operating Rate AC3 (at max. amps)

AC4

[ops/hr]

[ops/hr]

700

200

700

150

700

120

600 600 600 600

80 80 70 70

500

70

500

60

500

50

0 Approved by Lloyd's register of shipping.

Discount Schedule A-1 A39



i sprecher+ schuh

Technical Information

CA7 3-Pole Contactors

1:7 ] Electrical Data

a..

CA7-9 CA7-12 CA7-16 CA7-23 CA7-30 CA7-37 CA7-43 CA7-60 CA7-72 CA7-85

0 4-0

CC

0

Switching Motor Loads (continued)

AC-4 230V [A] 4.3 6.6 9 10 12 14 16.5 25.5 31 38

200,000 Op. Cycles 240V [A] 4.3 6.6 9 10 12 14 16.5 25.5 31 38

CA7 50Hz 400V [A] 4.3 6.6 9 10 12 14 16.5 25.5 31 38

415V [A] 4.3 6.6 9 10 12 14 16.5 25.5 31 38

500V [A] 4.3 6.6 9 10 12 14 16.5 25.5 31 38

690V [A] 4.3 6.6 9 10 12 14 16.5 25.5 31 38

230V [kW] 0.75 1.5 2.2 2.2 3 3.7 4 6.3 7.5 11

240V [kW] 0.75 1.5 2.2 2.2 3 4 4 7.5 7.5 11

400V [kW] 1.8 3 4 4 5.5 6.3 7.5 13 15 20

415V [kW] 1.8 3 4 4 5.5 6.3 7.5 13 17 20

500V [kW] 2.2 3.7 5.5 5.5 7.5 7.5 10 15 20 25

690V [kW] 3 5.5 7.5 7.5 10 11 15 22 25 32

60Hz 10 115V [A] 4.3 6.6 9 10 12 14 16.5 25.5 31 38

230V [A] 4.3 6.6 9 10 12 14 16.5 25.5 31 38

115V [HP] 1/8 1/4 1/3 1/2 1/2 3/4 1 2 2 3

230V [HP] 1/3 1/2 1 1-1/2 2 2 2 3 5 5

200V [A] 4.3 6.6 9 10 12 14 16.5 25.5 31 38

30 230V [A] 4.3 6.6 9 10 12 14 16.5 25.5 31 38

460V [A] 4.3 6.6 9 10 12 14 16.5 25.5 31 38

575V [A] 4.3 6.6 9 10 12 14 16.5 25.5 31 38

200V [HP] 3/4 1 2 2 3 3 3 7-1/2 7-1/2 10

230V [HP] 1 1-1/2 2 3 3 3 5 7-1/2 10 10

460V [HP] 2 3 5 5 7-1/2 10 10 15 20 25

575V [HP] 3 5 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 10 10 20 25 30

Maximum Operating Rate [ 250 250 220 200 200 200 200 120 120 120

Wye-Delta (Star Delta) 230V [kW] 5.5 7.5 10 13 17 20 22 32 37 45

50 Hz 240V [kW] 5.5 7.5 10 13 18.5 20 22 32 40 50

400V [kW] 7.5 10 13 20 25 32 40 55 63 80

415V [kW] 7.5 11 15 22 25 37 40 55 63 80

500V [kW] 7.5 11 15 22 25 32 45 63 80 90

690V il<Wl 7.5 10 13 18.5 25 32 40 55 63 80

200V [HP] 5 5 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 15 20 30 40 50

60 Hz 230V [HP] 5 7-1/2 10 10 15 20 25 40 50 60

460V [HP] 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 75 100 125

575V [HP] 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 75 100 125

AC Elevator Control Ratings

UL / CSA Max FLC [A] 8.0 11.0 16.0 21.0 27.0 31.0 37.0 43.0 54.0 62.0

500.000 operations 200V [A] 7.8 11.0 11.0 17.5 25.3 25.3 32.2 32.2 48.3 62.1

230V [A] 6.8 9.6 15.2 15.2 22.0 28.0 28.0 42.0 54.0 68.0

460V [A] 7.6 11.0 14.0 21.0 27.0 27.0 34.0 40.0 52.0 65.0

575V [A] 6.1 9.0 11.0 17.0 22.0 27.0 32.0 41.0 52.0 62.0

200V [HP] 2 3 3 5 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 10 15 20

230V [HP] 2 3 5 5 7-1/2 10 10 15 20 25

460V [HP] 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 20 25 30 40 50

575V [HP] 5 7-1/2 1 0 15 20 25 30 40 50 60

A40 Discount Schedule A-1



[11

sprecher+ schuh


Electrical Data


CA7-9 CA7-12 CA7-16 CA7-23 CA7-30 CA7-37 CA7-43 CA7-60 CA7-72 CA7-85 C,

AC-1 Load, 30 Switching lu, [A] 32 32 32 32 65 65 85 100 100 100

Ambient Temperature 40° C 230V

240V

[kW]

[kW]

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

26

27

26

27

34

35

40

42

40

42

40

42 C` ca

400V [kW] 22 22 22 22 45 45 59 69 69 69

415V [kW] 23 23 23 23 47 47 61 72 72 72

500V

690V

[kW]

[kW]

28

38

28

38

28

38

28

38

56

78

56

78

74

102

87

120

87

120

87

120 CA7

Ambient Temperature 60° C I,,

230V

[A]

[kW]

32

13

32

13

32

13

32

13

65

26

65

26

80

32

100

40

100

40

100

40

240V [kW] 13 13 13 13 27 27 33 42 42 42

400V [kW] 22 22 22 22 45 45 55 69 69 69

415V [kW] 23 23 23 23 47 47 57 72 72 72

500V [kW] 28 28 28 28 56 56 69 87 87 87

690V [kW] 38 38 38 38 78 78 95 120 120 120

Maximum Operating Rate [ 1.000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 300 600 600 600

Continuous Current (UUCSA)

General Purpose Rating (40°1 Open [A] 25 25 30 30 45 55 60 90 90 100

Enclosed [A] 25 25 30 30 55 60 75 90 90 100

Maximum Operating Rate [ 1,400 1,400 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,000 1000 700 700 600

Lighting Loads 0 Elec.Dischrglamps-AC-5a, Open [A] 22.5 25 28 29 40.5 45 77 81 85 90

single compensated Enclosed [A] 22.5 25 28 29 37 41 57 57 81 90

Max. capacitance at prospective 10kA [0] 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 2,700 2,700 3,200 4,000 4,000 4,700

short circuit current available at 20kA [ut] 500 500 500 500 1,350 1,350 1,600 2,000 2,000 2.350

the contactor 50kA 200 200 200 200 540 540 640 800 800 940

Incandescent Lamps - AC -5b

_Ilif] Electrical endurance - 100,000 operations [A] 12 16 18 22 30 37 43 60 70 76

Switching power transformers AC-6a

50Hz

Inrush = n

Rated transformer current

[A] 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 20 20 23 40.8 40.8 40.8

n=30 230 VAC [kVA] 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 8 8 9.2 16 16 16

240 VAC [kVA] 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 8.3 8.3 10 17 17 17

400 VAC [kVA] 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 14 14 16 28 28 28

415 VAC [kVA] 7.8 7.8 7.8 7.8 14 14 17 29 29 29

500 VAC [kVA] 9.4 9.4 9.4 9.4 17 17 20 35 35 35

690 VAC [kVA] 13 13 13 13 24 24 27 49 49 49

[A] 16.3 16.3 16.3 16.3 30 30 34.5 61.3 61.3 61.3

n=20 230 VAC [kVA] 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 12 12 13.7 24.4 24.4 24.4

240 VAC [kVA] 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 12.5 12.5 14.3 25.5 25.5 25.5

400 VAC [kVA] 11.3 11.3 11.3 11.3 20.8 20.8 23.9 42.5 42.5 42.5

415 VAC [kVA] 11.7 11.7 11.7 11.7 21.6 21.6 24.8 44.1 44.1 44.1

500 VAC [kVA] 14.1 14.1 14.1 14.1 26 26 29.9 53.1 53.1 53.1

690 VAC [kVA] 19.5 19.5 19.5 19.5 35.9 35.9 41.2 73.3 73.3 73.3

[A] 22 22 22 22 40 40 46 82 82 82

n=15 230 VAC [kVA] 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 4.3 4.3 5.0 8.8 8.8 8.8

240 VAC [kVA] 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 4.5 4.5 5.2 9.2 9.2 9.2

400 VAC [kVA] 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 7.5 7.5 8.6 15.3 15.3 15.3

415 VAC [kVA] 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2 7.8 7.8 8.9 15.9 15.9 15.9

500 VAC (kVA] 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 9.4 9.4 10.8 19.1 19.1 19.1

690 VAC [kVA] 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 12.9 12.9 14.9 26.4 26.4 26.4

0 CA7 ratings for lighting loads are provided for technical reference. For cUL rated

and labeled devices, see CAL7 contactors listed in this section.




Isprecher+ schuh



oElectrical Data

o`cn

O

CA7


Switching power transformers AC-6a

60Hz

Inrush

Rated transformer current

n=30

n=20

n=15

DC-1 Switching - 60°C

1 Pole

2 Poles in Series

3 Poles in Series

DC-2, 3, 5 Switching - 60°C

Starting, reverse current brak- ing, reversing. DC-5. 60°C

Shunt Wound

3 Poles in Series

Series-wound Motors

3 Poles in Series

A42

=n

[A] 10.9 10.9 10.9 10.9 20 20 23 40.8 40.8 40.8

200 VAC [kVA] 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 6.9 6.9 8.0 14.1 14.1 14.1

208 VAC [kVA] 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 7.2 7.2 8.3 14.7 14.7 14.7

240 VAC [kVA] 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 8.3 8.3 9.6 17 17 17

480 VAC [kVA] 9.1 9.1 9.1 9.1 16.6 16.6 19.1 33.9 33.9 33.9

600 VAC [kVA] 11.3 11.3 11.3 11.3 20.8 20.8 23.9 42.4 42.4 42.4

660 VAC [kVA] 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 22.9 22.9 26.3 46.6 46.6 46.6

[A] 16.3 16.3 16.3 16.3 30 30 34.5 61.3 61.3 61.3

200 VAC [kVA] 5.6 5.6 5.6 5.6 10.4 10.4 12 21.2 21.2 21.2

208 VAC [kVA] 5.9 5.9 5.9 5.9 10.8 10.8 12.4 22.1 22.1 22.1

240 VAC [kVA] 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 12.5 12.5 14.3 25.5 25.5 25.5

480 VAC [kVA] 13.6 13.6 13.6 13.6 24.9 24.9 28.7 51 51 51

600 VAC [kVA] 16.9 16.9 16.9 16.9 31.2 31.2 35.9 63.7 63.7 63.7

660 VAC [kVA] 18.6 18.6 18.6 18.6 34.3 34.3 39.4 70.1 70.1 70.1

[A] 22 22 22 22 40 40 46 82 82 82

200 VAC [kVA] 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 13.9 13.9 15.9 28.4 28.4 28.4

208 VAC [kVA] 7.8 7.8 7.8 7.8 14.4 14.4 16.6 29.5 29.5 29.5

240 VAC [kVA] 9 9 9 9 16.6 16.6 19.1 34.1 34.1 34.1

480 VAC [kVA] 18.1 18.1 18.1 18.1 33.3 33.3 38.2 68.2 68.2 68.2

600 VAC [kVA] 22.6 22.6 22.6 22.6 41.6 41.6 47.8 85.2 85.2 85.2

660 VAC [kVA] 24.9 24.9 24.9 24.9 45.7 45.7 52.6 93.7 93.7 93.7

24VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 45 45 50 70 80 80

48VDC [A] 20 20 20 20 25 25 30 40 40 40

60VDC [A] 20 20 20 20 25 25 30 40 40 40

110VDC [A] 6 6 6 6 8 8 9 11 11 11

220VDC [A] 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2

440VDC [A] 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

24VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 45 45 50 70 80 80

48VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 45 45 50 70 80 80

60VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 45 45 50 70 80 80

110VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 45 45 50 70 80 80

220VDC [A] 8 8 8 8 10 10 10 15 15 15

440VDC [A] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.5 1.5 1.5

24VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 45 45 63 90 90 100

48VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 45 45 63 90 90 100

60VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 45 45 63 90 90 100

110VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 45 45 63 90 90 100

220VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 45 45 50 70 80 80

440VDC [A] 3 3 3 3 3.5 3.5 4 5 5 5

24VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 45 45 63 90 90 100

48VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 45 45 50 70 70 80

60VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 45 45 50 70 70 80

110VDC [A] 20 20 25 - 25 30 30 35 70 70 80

220VDC [A] 6 6 6 10 15 15 20 25 25 30 440VDC [A] 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6

24VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 45 45 63 90 90 100

48VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 45 45 50 70 70 80

60VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 45 45 50 70 70 80 110VDC [A] 20 20 25 25 30 30 35 70 70 80

220VDC [A] 6 6 6 10 15 15 20 25 25 30

440VDC [A] 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6

Discount Schedule A-1



sprecher+ schuh


Electrical Data



Capacitor Ratings 0 Capacitor Switching AC-6b-50 Hz

C, o - = si Single Capacitor - 40°C 230 V [kVar] 8 8 8.5 9 14 14 24 28 28 28 o

240 V [kVar) 8 8 8.5 9 14 14 25 29 29 29

400 V [kVar) 8 8 10 12.5 20 24 35 48 48 48

415 V [kVar) 8 8 10 12.5 20 25 35 50 50 50

500 V [kVal 8 8 10 12.5 20 25 35 50 55 60 CA7

690 V [kVar] 8 8 10 12.5 20 25 35 50 55 60

Single Capacitor - 60°C 230 V [kVarl 8 8 8.5 9 12.5 12.5 18 28 28 28

240 V [kVar] 8 8 8.5 9 12.5 12.5 18 29 29 29

400 V [kVar) 8 8 10 12.5 20 21.5 30 42 48 48

415 V [kVar) 8 8 10 12.5 20 22 30 42 50 50

500 V [kVar] 8 8 10 12.5 20 25 30 42 50 55

690 V [kVar] 8 8 10 12.5 20 25 30 42 50 55

Capacitor Bank - 40°C 0 230 V [kVar] 5 5 8 9 12.5 14 20 28 28 28

240 V [kVar] 5 5 8 9 12.5 14 20 29 29 29

400 V IkVarj 5 5 8 10 15 20 25 40 48 48

415 V [kVar) 5 5 8 10 15 20 25 40 50 50

500 V [kVar] 5 5 8 10 15 20 25 40 50 50

690 V [kVar] 5 5 8 10 15 20 25 40 50 50

Capacitor Bank - 60°C 0 230 V [kVar] 5 5 8 9 12.5 12.5 18 28 28 28

240 V [kVar] 5 5 8 9 12.5 12.5 18 29 29 29

400 V [kVar] 5 5 8 10 15 20 25 40 48 48

415 V [kVar] 5 5 8 10 15 20 25 40 50 50

500 V [kVar] 5 5 8 10 15 20 25 40 50 50

690 V [kVar] 5 5 8 10 15 20 25 40 50 50

Capacitor Switching - 60Hz

Single Capacitor - 40°C 200 V [kVar] 5 5 8 9 12.5 14 20 28 28 28

230 V [kVar] 5 5 8 9 12.5 14 20 29 29 29

460 V (kVar] 5 5 8 10 15 20 25 40 50 50

600 V [kVar] 5 5 8 10 15 20 25 40 50 60

Capacitor Bank - 40°C 200 V [kVar] 5 5 8 9 12.5 12.5 18 28 28 28

230 V [kVar) 5 5 8 9 12.5 12.5 18 29 29 29

460 V [kVar) 5 5 8 10 15 20 25 40 50 50

600 V [kVar] 5 5 8 10 15 20 25 40 50 50

0 CA7 capacitor ratings are provided for technical reference. For cUL rated and

labeled devices. see CAO7 contactors listed in this section.

0 CA7-9 ...CA7-30 = L min. 30 pH; CA7-37...CA7-85 = L min. 6 pH




1

sprecher+ schuh



,g Electrical Data CA7-9 CA7-12 CA7-16 CA7-23 CA7-30 CA7-37 CA7-43 CA7-60 CA7-72 CA7-85

Resistance and Watt Loss I. AC3

Resistance per power pole [mQ] 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.5 0.9 0.9 0.9

Watt Loss - 3 power poles [W] 0.66 1.2 2.1 3.2 5.4 8.2 8.3 9.7 14.0 19.5

Coil and 3 power poles AC

DC

[W]

[W]

3.3

6.7

3.8

7.2

4.7

8.1

6.2

12.4

8.4

14.6

11.2

17.4

11.5

18.4

11

11

13.8

13.8

17.5

17.5

Coil only AC

DC

[W]

[W]

2.6

6.0

2.6

6.0

2.6

6.0

3.0

9.2

3.0

9.2

3.0

9.2

3.2

10.0

4.5

4.9

4.5

4.9

4.5

4.9

Short-Circuit Coordination Max. Fuse or circuit breaker ratings

DIN Fuses -gG, gL

Available Fault Current [A] 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA

Type "1" (690V) 0 [A] 50 50 50 80 125 125 160 250 250 250

Type "2" (690V) 0 [A] 25 35 35 40 80 80 100 160 160 160

BS 88 Fuses


Type "1" (690V) 0 [A] 25 32 35 50 63 80 100 100 125 160

Type "2" (690V) 0 [A] 25 32 35 50 63 80 100 100 125 160

Class Kl, RK1 Fuses

Available Fault Current [A] 10010 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA

Type "2" (600V) @ [A] 15 20 20 30 40 50 50 80 100 100

cUL Short-Circuit Ratings Class Kl, RK1, K5, and RK5 Fuses


cUL Max. Rating (600V) 49 Type 1 [A] 35 40 70 90 110 125 150 200 250 300

Class CC & CSA HRCI Fuses

Available Fault Current [A] 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA

cUL Max. Rating (600V) 0 Type 2 [A] 15 20 30 30

Class J CSA & HRCI-J Fuses


cUL Max. Rating (6001) 0 Type 2 [A] 15 20 30 30 50 50 70 80 100 150

Inverse-Time Circuit Breaker 0 Available Fault Current [A] 5 KA 5 KA 5 KA 5 KA 5 KA 5 KA 5 KA 5KA 10 KA 10 KA

cUL Max. Rating 4813V 0 Type 1 [A] 30 30 50 50 125 125 125 250 250 250

cUL Max. Rating 600V 0 Type 1 [A] - - - - 125 125 125 250 250 250

Short Time Current Withstand Ratings

lc", 60° C 10 s [A] 170 170 170 215 300 304 375 700 700 700

Off Time Between Operations [MM.] 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20

O When used as a Branch Circuit Protection device, NEC 430-152 defines the maximum rating of an Inverse-time circuit breaker to be sized at 250% of the motor nameplate FLA for most applications. UL Listed Combination. (UL File E41850) Per UL508A, NEC409 abd CSA 22.2 No.14

for contactor and fuses or circuit breaker only.

Per IEC 60947-1 for contactor and fuses only.




sprecher+ schuh


Electrical Data

CA7 Contactors & Overload Relay

Short Circuit Coordination /e AC3

Type 2 Coordination Combinations (contactor, overload and fuses) - Per UL 508 and IEC 60947-4-1

Contactor Overload Relay

Withstand Rating

Maximum Voltage

Max. Amp Rating

(UL Class CC or J Fuses)

CA7-9

CEP7-M/A/B32-0.32... 100kA 600V 1

CEP7-M/A/B32-1.0... 100kA 600V 2

CEP7-M/A/B32-2.9... 100kA 600V 6

CEP7-WA/B32-5... 100kA 600V 10

CEP7-M/A/B32-12... 100kA 600V 15

CA7-12... CEP7-M/NB32-12... 100kA 600V 20

CA7-16... CEP7-M/A/B32-32... 1001(A 600V 20

CA7-23... CEP7-M/A/B32-32... 100kA 600V 30

CA7-30... CEP7-WA/B37-37... 100kA 600V 40

CA7-37... CEP7-WA/B37-37... 1001(A 600V 50

CA7-43... CEP7-M/A/B45-45... 1001(A 600V 50

CA7-60... CEP7-M/A/B85-85... 100kA 600V 80

CA7-72... CEP7-M/A/B85-85... 100kA 600V 100

CA7-85... CEP7-M/A/B85-85... 100kA 600V 100

UL Listed Combinations (contactor, overload and circuit breaker) - Per UL 508

Contactor Overload Relay

Withstand Rating

Maximum Voltage

Max. Amp Rating

(UL Listed Circuit Breaker)

CA7-9...12 CEP7-M/A32-2.9...12

5kA 480V 30 C17-24-0.16...10

CA7-12 CT7-24-16

CA7-16...23 CEP7-M/A32-2.9...32

5kA 480V 50 CT7-24-0.16...16

CA7-23 CT7-24-24

CA7-30...37 CEP7-M/A37-12...37

5kA 600V 125 CT7-24-16...CT7-45-30

CA7-37 CT7-45-45

CA7-43 CEP7-M/A45...45

5kA 600V 125 CT7-45-30...45

CA7-60 CEP7-M/A85...85

5kA 600V 250 CT7-75-30...60

CA7-72 CEP7-WA85...85

10kA 600V 250 CT7-75-30...75

CA7-85 CEP7- M/A85...85

10I(A 600V 250 CT7-75-30...CT7-100-90

CEP7 First Generation

Scheduled for Obsolesence 2006


CA7



pI sprecher+ Technical Information

schuh 1 CA7 Contactors & Overload Relay

[7, i \ Short Circuit Ratings

0 cs as

4.10.

0 C.)

CA7

CEP7 Second Generation Cat. No.

Max. available fault

current (kA)

Conditional S.C. current,

lq (kA) S.C.P.D.

CEP7

ED1AB, EEAB

ED1BB, EEBB 1

600

Suitable for use

with fuses only

ED1CB, ED1DB.

ED1EB, EECB,

EEDB, EEEB, EEED,

EEFD, EEPB, EERB,

EESB, EETD

5 Not restricted

to

EEEE, EEFE. EEGE.

EEUE 10

High Fault Short Circuit Ratings per UL508 and CSA 22.2 No.14

IEC Short Circuit Ratings per EN60947-4-1

CEP7 Second Generation

No

Prospective S.C. current ,

Ir (kA)

Condi- tional

S.C.

current, lq jkA)

Max. . lt- age (V)

S.C.P.D.

CEP7

ED1AB, EEAB

ED1BB, EEAB 1

100 690

Suitable for use

with fuses only

ED1CB, ED1DB.

EECB,EEDB,

EEPB. EERB

1

Not restricted

to

ED1 EB, EEEB,

EEED, EEFD,

EEEE, EEFE.

EESB, EETD

3

EEGE, EEUE 5


Cat No.

Contactor Cat No.

Max. starter FLC (A)

Max. available fault

current (kA)

Max.

voltage (V)

UL Class J and

CSA HRCI -J fuse (A)

CEP7

ED1AB, EEAB CA7-09

0 5 .

100 600

3

ED1BB,EEBB 1 6

ED1CB, ED1DB,

ED1EB, EEEB,

EECB,EEDB

CA7-09 09 20

CA7-12 12 20

CA7-16 16 30

CA7-23 23 30

EEED, EEFD

CA7-30 30 50

CA7-37 37 50

CA7-43 43 70

EEEE, EEFE

EEGE

CA7-60 60 80

CA7-72 72 100

CA7-85 85 150

IEC Type 1 and Type II Fuse Coordination with CA7 Series contactors per EN60947-4-1


Cat No.

Contactor Cat No.

Max. starter FLC (A)

Prospective S.C. current,

Ir (kA)

Conditional S.C. current,

lq (kA)

Max. voltage

(V)

Type I with Class J fuse

(A)

Type II with Class J fuse

(A)

CEP7

ED1AB, EEAB CA7-09

0.5 1

100 600

3 3

ED1BB,EEBB 1 6 6

ED1CB, ED1DB,

EECB,EEDB

CA7-09 09

1

20 15

CA7-12 12 20 20

CA7-16 16 30 30

CA7-23 23 30 30

ED1EB, EEEB

CA7-09 09

3

20 15

CA7-12 12 20 20

CA7-16 16 30 30

CA7-23 23 30 30

EEED, EEFD

CA7-30 30

3

50 50

CA7-37 37 50 50

CA7-43 43 70 70

EEEE, EEFE

CA7-60 60

3

80 80 CA7-72 72 100 100 CA7-85 85 150 150

EEGE

CA7-60 60

5

80 80 CA7-72 72 100 100 CA7-85 85 150 150




I


schuh Electro-Mechanical Data


Service Life

Mechanical

Electrical AC-3 (400V)

Shipping Weights

AC - CA7

AC -CAU7

DC - CA7

DC - CAU7

AC

DC

AC

Terminations - Power

Description

[Mill [Mil.]

[Mil.]

CA7-9

13

13

1.3

CA7-12

13

13

1.3

CA7-16

13

13

1.3

CA7-23

13

13

1.3

[kg] 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39

[Lbs.] 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86

[kg] 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85

[Lbs.] 1.89 1.89 1.89 1.89

[kg] 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.73

[Lbs.] 1.32 1.32 1.32 1.61

[kg] 1.27 1.27 1.27 1.53

(Lbs.] 2.81 2.81 2.81 3.39

One saddleclamp per pole:

cross, slotted or Pozidrive No. 2/blade

No. 3 screw

1 Wire [mm'] 1...4 1...4

2 Wires [mm'] 1...4 1...4

1 Wire [mal 1.5...6 1.5...6

2 Wires [mm'] 1.5...6 1.5...6

1 Wire [AWG] 16...10 16...10

2 Wires [AWG] 16...10 16...10

Torque Requirement Requirement [Nm] 1.0...2.5 1.0...2.5

[Lb-in] 9...22 9...22

Terminations - Control

Description

Coils 1 or 2 [mm']

Wires [AWG]

Control Modules 1 or 2 [mmil

Wires [AWG]

Torque Requirement [Nm]

[Lb-in]

Degree of Protection - contactor

CA7-30 CA7-37 CA7-43 CA7-60 CA7-72 CA7-85

13

13

1.3

13

13

1.3

0.48 0.49

1.06 1.08

1.08 1.08

2.39 2.39

0.85 0.85

1.87 1.87

1.81 1.81

4.00 4.00

12 10

13 10

1.0 1.0

0.51 1.45

1.12 3.20

1.15 3.14

2.54 6.92

1.00 1.47

2.20 3.24

2.13 3.22

4.70 7.10

Dual connection; one saddleclamp

and one box lug per pole; cross,

slotted or Pozidrive No. 2/blade No.

4 screw

B

10

10

1.0

10

10

1.0

1.45 1.45

3.20 3.20

3.14 3.14

6.92 6.92

1.47 1.47

3.24 3.24

3.22 3.22

7.10 7.10

Dual connection;

two box lugs per pole

Allen Head: 4mm, 5/32

1...4 1...4 2.5...10 2.5...10 2.5...16 2.5...35 2.5...35 2.5...35 1...4 1...4 2.5...10 2.5...10 2.5...10 2.5...25 2.5...25 2.5...25

1.5...6 1.5...6 2.5...16 2.5...16 2.5...25 2.5...50 2.5...50 2.5...50 1.5...6 1.5...6 2.5...16 2.5...16 2.5...16 2.5...35 2.5...35 2.5...35

16...10 16...10 14...4 14..4 14...4 14...1 14...1 14...1

16...10 16...10 14...4 14..4 14...4 14...1 14...1 14...1

1.0...2.5 1.0...2.5 2.5...3.5 2.5...4 2.5...4 3.5...6 3.5...6 3.5...6

9...22 9...22 22...31 22...35 22...35 31...53 31...53 31...53

MMMZZ. Z. M Combination Screw Head: Cross, Slotted, Pozidrive

1.5...6

16...12

1.5...6

16...12

1...2.5

9...13

IP 2LX per IEC 529 and DIN 40 050 (with wires installed)

Protection Against Accidental Contact Safe from touch by fingers and back-of-hand per VDE 0106; Part 100

Environmental and General Specifications Ambient Temperature

Storage

Operation

Conditioned 15% current reduction after AC-1 at >60" C

Altitude at installed site Resistance to Corrosion/Humidity

Shock Resistance

Vibration Resistance

Pollution Degree

Operating Position

Standards

Approvals

-55...+80" C (-67...176' F) - [CRI7E Electronic Interface -50...+80' C (- 58...176' F)]

-25...+60" C (-13...140' F)

-25...+70' C (-13...158' F)

2000 meters above sea level per IEC 947-4

Damp-alternating climate: cyclic to IEC 68-2, 56 cycles

Dry heat: IEC 68-2, +100'C (212* F), relative humidity <50%, 7 days.

Damp tropical: IEC 68 -2, +40"C (104'F), relative humidity <92%, 56 days.

IEC 68-2: Half sinusoidal shock 11 ms, 30g (in all three directions)

IEC 68-2: Static > 2g, in normal position no malfunction <5g

3

Refer to Dimension Pages

IEC947-1/4, EN 60947; UL 508; CSA 22.2, No. 14

CE, UL, CSA


.t\l

0'

CA7



isprecher+ Technical Information

I schuh I CA7 3-Pole Contactors

r7 V1 Lug Kit and Paralleling Link Specifications U CA7-P-

KN23 / KL23 U)

Ca L.

Approvals

vs ti Conformity to Standards

c, Protection Against Accidental Contact o

c.) Terminations

CA7 Description

CA7-P-K37 CA7-P-K43 CA7-P-K85 CA7-P-B23 CA7-P-B37

Cross, slotted or Pozidrive screw

Wire Size

5 ( 1 Wire [mma 4...16 4..16

5 (<7-7) $--(as, 1 Wire [mnfj 4...25 4..25

`? ?_ _.( 1 Wire [AWG] 10...4 10...4

Torque Requirement [Nm] 2...3 2...3

[Lb-in] 18...27 18...27

Coil Data

UL Listed: CSA Certified; C

UL508; CSA 22.2 No. 14; IEC 60947-4 1P21.)( Finger Protection

Allen Head:

5mm, 3/16

ff1

7)

Allen Head;

7 mm, 15/32

6...35 10..70 35...70 35...70

6 . 50 10...95 35...95 35...95

8...2 8..2/0 0...2/0 0...2/0

3..6 8...12 6...12 6....12

27...54 72...108 54...108 54...108

Voltage Range

AC: 50Hz, 60Hz, 50/60 Hz

DC

Pickup

Dropout

Pickup

Dropout

[xU,]

[xL/J

[xU,]

[x11,1

CA7-9 CA7-12 CA7-16 CA7-23 CA7-30 CA7-37 CA7-43 CA7-60

0.85...1.1

0.3...0.6

0,8_1.1 (9V coils = 0.65...1.3; 24V coils = 0.7...1.25)

0.1...0.6

CA7-72 CA7-85

Coil Consumption

AC: 50Hz, 60Hz, 50/60 Hz Pickup [VA/W] 70/50 70/50 70/50 70/50 80/60 80/60 130/90 200/110 200/110 200/110

Hold-in [VANV] 8/2.6 8/2.6 8/2.6 9/3 9/3 9/3 10/3.2 16/4.5 16/4.5 16/4.5

True DC Coils (CA7C) Pickup [W] 6.5 6.5 6.5 9.2 9.2 9.2 10.1 - - - Hold -in [W] 6.5 6.5 6.5 9.2 9.2 9.2 10.1 - - -

Two Winding DC Coils Pickup [W] 120 120 120 200 200 200 200 200 200 200

CA7Y & CA7D Hold-in [W] 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.3 4.5 4.5 4.5

Operating Times

AC: 5011z, 60Hz, 50/60 Hz Pickup [ms] 15...30 15...30 15...30 15...30 15...30 15...30 15...30 20...40 20...40 20...40

Dropout [ms] 10...60 10...60 10...60 10...60 10...60 10...60 10...60 10...60 10...60 10...60

with RC Suppressor Dropout [ms] 10...60 10...60 10...60 10...60 10...60 10...60 10...60 10...60 10...60 10...60

True DC Coils (CA7C) Pickup [ms] 40...70 40...70 40...70 40...70 50...80 50...80 50...80 - - - without Suppression Dropout [ms] 7...15 7...15 7...15 7...15 7...15 7...15 7...15 - - with Integrated Suppression Dropout [ms] 14...20 14...20 14...20 17...23 17...23 17...23 17...23

with External Suppression Dropout [ms] 70...95 70...95 70...95 80...125 80...125 80...125 80...125 - - - Two Winding DC Coils (CA7Y/D) Pickup [ms] 17...26 17...26 15...27 15...27 15...27 15...27 15...27 20...40 20...40 20...40

with Internal Suppression Dropout [ms] 9...20 9...20 14...24 14...24 14...24 14...24 14...24 20...35 0 20...35 0 20...35 0

0 s 220V.




Ui sprecher + Technical Information

schuh 1 CA7 4-Pole Contactors

Electrical Data [7'

CA7-9- M40(31; 22)

CA7-12- M40(31; 22)

CA7-16- CA7-23- CA7-40-M22 CA7-40-M40

M40(31; 22) M40(31; 22)

CA7-90-M22 CA7-90-M40

Rated Insulation Voltage lA

IEC, AS, BS, SEV, VDE 0660 690V

UL; CSA 600V o'

Rated Impulse Voltage L 8 kV

Rated Voltage U." Main Contacts

AC 50/60Hz 115, 200, 208, 230, 240, 380, 400, 415, 460, 500, 575, 690V CA7 DC 24. 48, 110. 115, 220, 230, 300, 440V

Operating Frequency for AC Loads 50...60Hz

Switching Motor Loads

Standard IEC Ratings

AC-2, AC-3, AC-4 230V [A] 12 15 20 26.5 38 38 85 85

DOL & Reversing 240v [A] 12 15 20 26.5 38 38 85 85

50Hz/60°C 400V [A] 9 12 16 23. 37 37 85 85

415V [A] 9 12 16 23 37 37 85 85

500V [Aj 7 10 14 20 29 30 80 80

690V [A] 5 7 9 12 9 21 22 49

230V [kW] 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 11 25 25

240V [kW] 3 4 5.5 7.5 11 11 25 25

400V [kW] 4 5.5 7.5 11 18.5 18.5 45 45

415V [kW] 4 5.5 7.5 11 18.5 18.5 45 45

500V [kW] 4 5.5 7.5 13 18.5 20 55 55

690V [kW] 4 5.5 7.5 10 7.5 18.5 18.5 45

UUCSA/IEC

DOL & Reversing 115V [A] 7.2 9.8 16 24 34 34 80 80

60Hz/60°C 10 230V [A] 18 12 17 17 28 28 68 68

115V [HP] 1/2 1/2 1 2 3 3 7-1/2 7-1/2

230V [HP] 1-1/2 2 3 3 5 5 15 15

200V [A] 7.8 11 17.5 17.5 32.2 32.2 78.2 78.2

230V [A] 6.8 9.6 15.2 22 28 28 80 80

460V [A] 7.6 11 14 21 34 34 65 77

575V [A] 9 11 17 17 17 32 22 52

200V [HP] 2 3 5 5 10 10 25 25

230V [HP] 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 10 30 30

460V [HP] 5 7-1/2 10 15 25 25 50 60

575V [HP] 7-1/2 10 15 15 15 30 20 50

Maximum Operating Rate AC2 [ops/hr] 450 450 450 400 400 400 200 200

(at max. amps) AC3 [ops/hr] 700 700 700 600 600 600 500 500

AC4 rops/hrl 200 150 120 80 70 70 50 50




CA7


schuh I CA7 4-pole Contactors

Electrical Data CA7-9-

M40(31; 22) CA7-12-

M40(31; 22)

CA7-16- M40(31; 22)

CA7-23- M40(31; 22)

CA7-40-M22 CA7-40-M40 CA7-90-M22 CA7-90-M40

AC-1 Load, 30 Switching [A]

Ambient Temperature 40°C I.,

230V

[kW]

]kW]

32

13

32

13

32

13

32

13

75

30

75

30

130

52

130

52

240V [kW] 13 13 13 13 31 31 54 54

400V [kW] 22 22 22 22 52 52 90 90

415V [kW] 23 23 23 23 54 54 93 93

500V [kW] 28 28 28 28 65 65 113 113

690V [kW] 38 38 38 38 90 90 155 155

lie (kW] 32 32 32 32 60 60 110 110

230V [kW] 13 13 13 13 24 24 44 44

Ambient Temperature 60° 240V [kW] 13 13 13 13 25 25 46 46

400V (kW) 22 22 22 22 42 42 76 76

415V (kW) 23 23 23 23 43 43 79 79

500V [kW] 28 28 28 28 52 52 95 95

690V [kW] 38 38 38 38 72 72 131 131

Max Operating Rate [ops/hour] 1,000 1,000, 1,000, 1,000 300 300 600 600

Continuous Current (1.1L/CSA)

General Purpose Rating (40°) Open [A] 25 25 30 30 60 60 125 130

Enclosed [A] 25 25 30 30 60 60 125 130

Max. Operating Rate [ops/hour] 1,400 1,400 1,200 1,200 1,000 1.000 600 600

Lighting Loads 0 Elec. Dischrglamps-AC-5a, Open [A] 22.5 25 28 29 65 65 115 115

single compensated Enclosed [A] 22.5 25 28 29 54 54 95 95

Incandescent Lamps AC-5b,

Electrical endurance-100,000 operations 12 16 18 22 18 25 60 75

DC-1 Switching - 60°C 24VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 45 45 80 80

48VDC [A] 20 20 20 20 25 25 40 40

1 Pole 60VDC [A] 20 20 20 20 25 30 40 40

110VDC [A] 6 6 6 6 10 10 11 11

220VDC [A] 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.8 1.8

440VDC [A] 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.5

24VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 45 45 80 80

48VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 45 45 80 80

2 Pole in Series 60VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 45 45 80 80

110VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 45 45 80 80

220VDC [A] 8 8 8 8 10 10 15 15

440VDC [A] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.5 1.5

24VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 48 - 100

48VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 48 100

3 Poles in Series 60VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 48 - 100

110VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 48 100

220VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 48 80 440VDC [A] 3 3 3 3 3.5 - 5

24VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 60 - 110 48VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 60 - 110

4 Poles in Series 60VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 60 - 110 110VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 60 - 110 220VDC [A] 25 25 32 32 60 - 100 440VDC [A] 8 8 8 8 10 - 15

0 CA7 ratings for lighting loads are provided for technical reference. For cUL rated

and labeled devices, see CAL7 contactors listed in this section.





schuh 1 CA7 4-pole Contactors

Electrical Data

Resistance and Watt Loss 4AC3

Resistance per power pole

Watt Loss - 4 power poles

Coil and 4 power poles AC

DC (true)

DC (2 winding)

CA7-9- CA7-12- CA7-16- M40(31; 22) M40(31; 22) M40(31; 22)

2.7 2.7 2.7

2.8 2.8 2.8

13.7 13.7 13.7

17.6 17.6 17.6

- - - Short Circuit Coordination

DIN Fuses -gG, gL

Available Fault Current [A] 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA

Type "1" (690V) 0 [A] 50 50 50

Type "2" (690V) 0 [A] 25 35 35

BS 88 Fuses

Available Fault Current [A] 80 KA 80 KA 80 M Type "1" (690V) 0 [A] 25 32 35

Type "2" (690V) 0 [A] 25 32 35

Class K1, RK1 Fuses


Type "2" (600V)49 [A] 15 20 20

cUL Short-Circuit Ratings

Class K1, RK1, K5, and RK5 Fuses


cUL Max. Rating (600V) 0 [A] 35 40 70

Type 1

Class CC & CSA HRCI Fuses


cUL Max. Rating (600V) 0 Type 2 [A] 15 20 30

Class J CSA & HRCI-J Fuses


cUL Max. Rating (600V) 0 Type 2 [A] 15 20 30

Inverse-Time Circuit Breaker 0 Available Fault Current [A] 5 KA 5 KA 5 KA

cUL Max. Rating 480V 0 Type 1 [A] 30 30 50

cUL Max. Rating 600V 49 Type 1 [A] - -

Short Time Current Withstand Ratings

60° C [A] 170 170 170

Off Time Between Operations [Min.] 20 20 20

0 When used as a Branch Circuit Protection device, NEC 430-152 defines the maxi-

mum rating of an Inverse-time circuit breaker to be sized at 250% of the motor

nameplate FLA for most applications.

UL Listed Combination. (UL File E41850) Per UL508A, NEC409 abd CSA 22.2 No.14

for contactor and fuses or circuit breaker only.

O Per IEC 60947-1 for contactor and fuses only.

O UL Testing not complete a the time of printing this catalog.

CA7-23- CA7-40-M22 CA7-40-M40 CA7-90-M22 CA7-90-M40 ° M40(31;22)

- 0-

2.0 2.0 1.5 0.8 0.7

2.0 11.3 8.4 13.5 11.8 ST) '

10.8 26.1 37.4 36.0 56.3 :,.(,)°`..

17.4 32.6 43.9 - - - 32.5 52.8 CA7

100 KA 50 KA 50 KA 50 KA 50 KA

80 160 160 250 250

40 100 100 160 160

80 KA - 50 - - - 50 - -

100 KA 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA

30 70 70 100 100

5 KA 5 KA 5 KA 10 KA 10 KA

90 125 125 300 300

100 KA

30

100 KA 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA 100 KA

30 70 0 70 0 150 0 150 0 .

5 KA 5 KA 5 KA 10 KA 10 KA

50 125 125 250 250

- 125 125 250 250

215 304 304 700 700

20 5 5 5 5





schuh CA7 4-pole Contactors

[MI Mechanical Data

L. 0 4-0 cU CU

0

CA7

Service Life

Mechanical

Shipping Weights

AC - CA7

DC - CA7

Terminations - Power

AC [Mil.]

DC [Mil.]

CA7-9- M40(31; 22)

13

13

CA7-12- M40(31; 22)

13

13

CA7-16- M40(31; 22)

13

13

CA7-23- M40(31; 22)

13

13

CA7-40-M22

10

10

CA7-40-M40

10

10

CA7-90- M22

10

10

CA7-90- M40

10

10

[kg] 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.51 0.51 1.45 1.45

[Lbs.] 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 1.12 1.12 3.20 3.20

[kg] 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.73 1.00 1.00 1.47 1.47

[Lbs.] 1.32 1.32 1.32 1.61 2.20 2.20 3.24 3.24

Description

5 (('a 1 Wire [mm2

2 Wires [mml

1 Wire [mm2]

2 Wires [mm2]

1 Wire [AWG]

2 Wires [AWG]

[Nm]

[Lb-in]

Dual connection;

two box lugs per pole

Allen Head: 4mm, 5/32

2.5...16 2.5...35

2.5...10 2.5...25

2.5...25 2.5...50

2.5...16 2.5...35

14...4 14...1

14...4 14...1

2.5...4 3.5...6

22...35 31...53

Dual connection; one saddleclamp

and one box lug per pole; cross,

slotted or Pozidrive No. 2/blade

No. 4 screw

2.5...10 2.5...10 2.5...10 2.5...10

2.5...16 2.5...16 2.5...16 2.5...16

14...6 14..6

14...6 14..6

2.5...4 2.5...4

22...35 22...35

One saddleclamp per pole:

cross, slotted or Pozidrive No. 2/blade No. 3 screw

1...4 1...4 1...4 1...4

1...4 1...4 1...4 1...4

1.5...6 1.5...6 1.5...6 1.5...6

1.5...6 1.5...6 1.5...6 1.5...6

16...10 16...10 16...10 16...10 16...10 16...10 16...10 16...10

1.0...2.5 1.0...2.5 1.0...2.5 1.0...2.5

9...22 9...22 9...22 9...22

( -n

ÈgEEz

Torque Requirement

Terminations - Control

Description

Coils

Wires

Control Modules

Wires

Torque Requirement

1 or 2 [mml [AWG]

1or 2 [mml [AWG]

[Nm]

[Lb-inj

Combination Screw Head: Cross, Slotted, Pozidrive

1.5...6

16...12

1.5...6

16...12

1...2.5

9...13

Degree of Protection - contactor IP 2LX per IEC 529 and DIN 40 050 (with wires installed)

Protection Against Accidental Contact Safe from touch by fingers and back-of-hand per VDE 0106; Part 100

Environmental and General Specifications Ambient Temperature

Storage

Operation

Conditioned 15% current reduction after AC-1 at >60' C

Altitude at installed site Resistance to Corrosion/Humidity

Shock Resistance Vibration Resistance

Pollution Degree

Operating Position

Standards

Approvals

-55...+80' C (-67...176' F) - [CRI7E Electronic Interface -50...+80' C (-58...176' F)]

-25...+60' C (-13...140' F)

-25...+70' C (-13...158' F)

2000 meters above sea level per IEC 947-4

Damp-alternating climate: cyclic to IEC 68-2, 56 cycles

Dry heat: IEC 68-2. +100'C (212' F), relative humidity <50%, 7 days. Damp tropical: IEC 68-2, +40'C (104'F), relative humidity <92%, 56 days.

IEC 68-2: Half sinusoidal shock 11ms, 30g (in all three directions)

IEC 68-2: Static > 2g, in normal position no malfunction <5g 3

Refer to Dimension Pages

IEC947-1/4, EN 60947; UL 508; CSA 22.2, No. 14

CE. UL, CSA




I

sprecher+ schuh


CA7 Contactors

Coil Data (CA7 4-Pole)

Voltage Range

CA7-9- M40(31; 22)

CA7-12- M40(31; 22)

CA7-16- M40(31; 22)

CA7-23- CA7-40- CA7-40- CA7-90- CA7 -90- M40(31; 22) M22 M40 M22 M40

O

AC: 50Hz, 60Hz, 50/60 Hz Pickup [xUs] 0.85...1.1

Dropout [xt/J 0.3...0.6

DC Pickup [x U] 0.8...1.1 (9V coils = 0.65...1.3; 24V coils = 0.7...1.25)

Dropout [xUs] 0.1...0.6

Coil Consumption

AC: 50Hz, 60Hz, 50/60 Hz Pickup [VA/W] 70/50 70/50 70/50 70/50 130/90 130/90 400/240 400/240 CA7

Hold-in [VA/W] 8/2.6 8/2.6 8/2.6 9/3 12/3.6 12/3.6 24/9 24/9

True DC Coils (CA7C) Pickup [W] 6.5 6.5 6.5 9.2 10.1 10.1 - - Hold -in [W] 6.5 6.5 6.5 9.2 10.1 10.1 - -

Two Winding DC Coils Pickup [W] - - - - - - 325 325

CA7Y & CA7D Hold-in [W] - - - - 5.5 5.5

Operating Times

AC: 50Hz, 60Hz. 50/60 Hz Pickup [ms] 15...30 15...30 15...30 15...30 15...30 15...30 20...30 20...30

Dropout [ms] 10...60 10...60 10..,60 10...60 10...60 10...60 20...40 20...40

with RC Suppressor Dropout [ms] 10...60 10...60 10..,60 10...60 10...60 10...60 20...40 20...40

True DC Coils (CA7C) Pickup [ms] 40...70 40...70 40...70 40...70 50...80 50...80 - - without Suppression Dropout [ms] 7...15 7...15 7...15 7...15 7...15 7...15

with Integrated Suppression Dropout [ms] 14...20 14...20 14,..20 17...23 - - - with External Suppression Dropout [ms] 70...95 70...95 70...95 80...125 - - - -

Two Winding DC Coils Pickup [ms] - - - - 15...20 20...25

with Internal Suppression Dropout [ms] - - - - - 20...25 20...25

Technical Information - Auxiliary Contact Data

Mounted Standard Auxiliary

Built-in Auxiliary Contacts in Contac- for CA7-9...CA7-23

Front Mounted Auxiliary Contacts

CA7-PV, CS7-PV, CZE/A7, CV7

Front Mounted Bifurcated Auxiliary Contacts

Side Mounted Auxiliary Contacts

CA-PA, CM7

Electrical Contact Ratings - NEMA A600, P600 A600, 0600 A600, 0600

Min. Contact Rating 17V, 10 mA 17V, 5 mA 5V, 3 mA 17V, 10 mA

24V 10A 6A 3A 6A 48V 10A 6A 3A 6A 120V 10A 6A 3A 6A

Contact Ratings - IEC AC-15 (solenoids,

contactors) rated voltage IEC 60947-5-1

240V

400V

10A

6 A

5 A

3 A

3 A

2 A

5 A

3 A

480V/500V 2.5 A 1.6 A 1.2 A 1.6 A

600V 1 A 1 A 0.7 A 1 A

690V 1 A i A 0.7 A 1 A

Ith 20A 10A 10A 10A

40 °C 230V

400V

8 kW

14 kW

AC-12 (Control of resistive 690V 24 kW

loads) IEC 60947-5-1

60 °C

1,,

230V

400V

20 A

8 kW

14 kW

6 A 6 A 6 A

690V 24 kW

24V 12A 12A 6A 6A

DC-12 Switching DC Loads 48V 9 A 9 A 3.2 A 3.2 A

Vs< 1 ms, Resistive Loads 110V 3.5 A 3.5 A 0.45 A 0.45 A

IEC 60947-5-1 220V 0.55 A 0.55 A 0.18 A 0.18 A

440V 0.2A 0.2A 0.1 A 0.1 A

24V 5A 5A 2.5A 5A

DC-13 IEC 60947-5-1, Solenoids and

contactors

48V

110V

3 A

1.2 A

3 A

1.2 A

1.5 A

0.6 A

3 A

1.2 A

220V 0.6A 0.6A 0.3A 0.6A

440V 0.3A 0.15A 0.15A 0.15A





schuh

3 0111 .._ Auxiliary Contacts

CA7

Built-in Auxiliary Contacts in Contactor CA7-9...CA7-23

Continuous Current Rating per UUCSA

Rated Voltage AC

Continuous Rating 40°C

Continuous Rating

[A)

DC [A)

600 max.

10 A general purpose

Heavy pilot duty (A600)

5A, 600 max.

Standard pilot duty (P600)

Front Mounted Auxiliary Contacts CA7-PV, CS7-PV, CZE/A7, CV7

600 max.



2.5A, 600 max.

Standard pilot duty (0600)

CA7 Contactors

Side Mounted Auxiliary Contacts CA-PA, CM7

600 max.



2.5A, 600 max.

Standard pilot duty (0600)

Short-Circuit Protection -gGFuse

Type 2 Coordination

Rated Impulse Voltage U., Insulation Voltage (between control and

load circuit) per DIN< VDE 0103, Part 101

(NAMUR recommendation)

Mechanically Linked Contacts (per IEC60947-5-1

()Annex L (SUVA Third-party certified)

LA] 20 10 10

8 8 6

IV] 380 440 440

Mutually unrestricted between all NO and NC contacts

Mutually unrestricted between all NO & Mutually unrestricted between all NC contacts. CZE & CV7 not mechanically NO and NC contacts

linked with contactor main contacts

Terminals

Terminal Type

Maximum Wire Size per IEC 947-1 2xA4 2xA4 2xA4

Flexible 1 conductor

with Wire-End [mm'] 1...4 0.5...2.5 0.5...2.5

Fernule 2 conductor [mm,] 1...4 0.75...2.6 0.75...2.6

Solid /Stranded- 1 conductor [mm2] 1.5...6 0.5...2.5 0.5...2.5

Conductor 2 conductor [mm'] 1.5...6 0.75...2.6 0.75...2.6

Recommended Tightening Torque [Nm] 1...2.5 1...15 1...15

Max. Wire Size per UUCSA [AWG] 16...10 18...14 18...14

Recommended Tightening Torque [lb -inj 9...22 9...13 9...13

Accessories Latch Attachment Release, CV7-11

Coil Consumption

Contact Signal Duration

Time Attachment

Reset Time

at min. time setting

at max. time setting

Repeat Accuracy

PAM [W1

[min/max]

AC 45/40

DC 25W

0.03...15s

(ins]

Ems)

10

70

± 10%

Positively-Guided Contacts ( Mechanically-linked) SUVA Certified

Restricted guidance guarantees without restrictions from contactor to auxiliary contact and

auxiliary contact to contactor.0

0 See Section G for additional details.

Contact Ratings (Per NEMA/UL A600 & 0600)

Standard Circuit

Voltage Make

(AmpsNA) Break

(AmpsNA Continuous

Amps

A600

120AC

240AC

480AC

600AC

60A/7200VA

30A/7200VA

15A/7200VA

12A/7200VA

6A/720VA

3A/720VA

1.5A/720VA

1.2A/720VA

10

0600 125DC

250DC

301-600DC

0.55A/69VA

0.27A/69VA

0.1A/69VA

0.55A/69VA

0.27A/69VA

0.1A/69VA

25





schuh CA7 Contactors - Contact Life

Determining Contact Life To determine the contactor's estimated electrical life, follow these

guidelines:

1. Identify the appropriate Utilization Category from Table A.

2. On the following pages, choose the graph for the Utilization

Category selected.

3. Locate the Rated Operational Current (/e) along the bottom of the chart and follow the graph lines up to the intersection of the appropriate contactor's life-load curve.

4. Read the estimated contact life along the vertical axis.

Table A - IEC Special Utilization Categories, AC Ratings 0

Category Typical Applications Rated Current

Conditions for testing electrical life

Ops .

Conditions for testing making and

breaking capacity Ops.

Make. :. Break ' Make., ' Break ,

1/le. ;Ulue_ cos. Ic/le Ur/Ue cos : I/le Uke cos, I/le U/ue cos

AC-1

Non-inductive or slightly

inductive loads; resistance furnaces

All values 1' 0.95 1 1 0.95 6000 ,

.,.

5 1,05 cf.s,. , --,

1.5 1.05 0.8 50

AC-2 Slip-ring motors:

Starting, plugging All values 2 - 1.05 0.65 2 1.05 0.65 6000

. ,...., ,

.1.05 0.65: 4 1.05 0.65 50

AC-3

, Slip-ring motors:

Starting, switching off

motors during running

le 17Amp

17Amp <le 100Amp

Ie> 100Amp

048 6 1 0.35

6 1 0.35

1 0.17 0.65

1 0.17 0.35

1 0.17 0.35

6000

. 10 1. 0.65: -10 .1.1. 9.35: .8.0 1.1 0.35

8 1.1 0.65

8 1.1 0.35

6 0 1.1 0.35

50

irc) .:5, c., IS =.

, ,::,,

, fJ

AC-4 Squirrel-cage motors:

Starting, plugging, inching

le 17Amp

17Amp <le 100Amp

le> 100Amp

0:65,

1 0.38 1 0.35

6 1 0.65

6 1 0.35

6 1 0.35

6000

..12 ,,1 1. 0.65"

12 - 1 1: 0:35

X- -10 0 1 0.35'

10 1.1 0.65

10 1.1 0.35

8 0 1.1 0.35

50

AC-5a lamp control

Switching of electric discharge 2 1 05 0,45 2 1.05 0A5 6000 ::1:05 0:45,, 3 1.05 0.45 50

AC-5b Switching of incandescent lamps 1 1 05 1 1.05 6000. 1.5 .1:05'. 1.5 1.05 50

AC-6a Switching of transformers Rating derived from AC-3 rating (x 0.45)

AC-6b Switching of capacity banks Depends on circuit conditions of application

AC-12

Control of resistive loads and

solid state loads with isolation by

opto couplers

All values 1 1 0 9 1 1 0.9 6050

AC-13 Control of solid state loads

with transformer isolation

1 0.65 1 1 0.65 6050 - - -

.10'. -.1.1.. 0.65_, 1.1 1.1 0.65 10

c_a

'.. AC-14 5 Control of small electromagnetic loads

72 VA

.

0.3 1 1 0.3 6050 G .1.1 0.7 6 1.1 0.7 10

cp ' -it ,'- 22.

2 '

AC-15 Control of electromagnetic loads 72 VA 10 1 ..0.3:. 1 1 0.3 6050 1 0.3: 10 1.1 0.3 10

AC-20 Connecting and disconnecting

under no load conditions No testing required

AC-21 Switching or resistive loads,

including moderate overloads All values

,-,

1 0.95 1 1 0.95 10000 .1 5 . .1.05 . 0.95. 1.5 1.05 0.95 5

cn, I" ' AC-22 x" c., =

Switching of mixed resistive &

inductive loads, including moder-

ate overloads

All values 1 0.8: 1 1 0.8 10000 1.05. 0 65 3 1.05 0.65 5

3. 41) AC-23

..,

Switching of motor loads or

other highly inductive loads All values 1 1 0.65 1 1 0.65 10000 10 1.05. 0.45 - 8 1.05 0.45 5

Legend Ue Rated operational voltage

U Voltage before make

Ur Recovery voltage

be Rated operational current

I Making current

Ic Breaking current

1. Inductance of test circuit

R Resistance of test circuit

O Utilization categories and test conditions for AC & DC. For contactors according to

IEC 158-1, starters according to IEC 292-1 ... 4 and control switches according to

IEC 337-1 and IEC 337-1A. With a minimum value of 1000A for /or lc.

0 With a minimum value of 800A for Ic.

0 With a minimum value of 1200A for I.

0 Plugging is understood as stopping or reversing the motor rapidly by reversing

the motor primary connections while the motor is running. Inching [or jogging] is

understood as energizing a motor once or repeatedly for short periods to obtain

small movements of the driven mechanism.


CA7




schuh CA7 Contactors - Contact Life

0 C6

,

.0

0

Determining Contact Life To determine the contactor's estimated electrical life, follow these

guidelines:

1. Identify the appropriate Utilization Category from Table A.

2. On the following pages, choose the graph for the Utilization Cat-

egory selected.

3. Locate the Rated Operational Current (/d along the bottom of the

chart and follow the graph lines up to the intersection of the ap-

propriate contactor's life-load curve.

4. Read the estimated contact life along the vertical axis.

CA7 Table A - IEC Special Utilization Categories, DC Ratings 0

Category Typical Applications Rated Current

Conditions for testing electrical life

Ups.

Conditions for testing making and

breaking capacity Ops. tilke ' Break ' . Make Break

I/le U/ue cos lc/le Ur/Ue cos /// U/ue cos 1/le Ulue cos

DC-1

Non-inductive or slightly

inductive loads, resistance

furnaces

All Values 1 1 1 1 1 1 1:5 0 1.1 0 1 0 ..

1.5 0 1.1 0 10

DC-2

Shunt-motors: Starting, switching off motors during running

All Values 2.5 T 2 1 0.1 7.5 1.1.:... 2.5.. 4 1.1 2.5

DC-3 Shunt motors:

Starting, plugging, inching All Values 2:5 1. 2,5 1 2 1.1 2.5 , 4 1.1 2.5

DC-4

Series-motors:

Starting , switching

off motors during running

All Values 2.5 ' 1 7.5 1 0.3 10 1 15 ' 4 1.1 15

DC-5 Series-motors: Starting, plugging, inching

All Values : 2.5 5 . . 2.5 1 7.5 4 11 15 4 1.1 15

DC-15 Electromagnets for contactors,

valves, solenoid actuators All Values 1 1. 6.x po 1 1 6 xP 0 , 11 11 - 6 x P0 1.1 1.1 6x P

Legend Ue Rated operational voltage

U Voltage before make

Ur Recovery voltage

le Rated operational current

/ Making current

lc Breaking current L Inductance of test circuit

R Resistance of test circuit

0 Utilization categories and test conditions for AC & DC. For contactors according to

IEC 158-1, starters according to IEC 292-1 ... 4 and control switches according to IEC

337-1 and (EC 337-1A.

0 Only according to VDE.

P= Ue x le rated power K. The value "6 x P" has been derived from an empiric

relationship which covers most magnetic loads for DC up to an upper limit of P = 50W.




sprecher + Technical Information

UI schuh CA7 Contactors - Contact Life

Predicting Electrical Life Sprecher + Schuh contactors are designed for superior performance in a wide variety of applications, by giving consideration to the specific load, utilization category arid required electrical life, you can purchase exactly the type

(--1) Identify they appropriate utilization

category. For this example, we will de-

termine CA7 contact life for inching and

plugging squirrel-cage motors. 0

and size of contactor required. This assures reliable operation and high value the ability to very closely match the contactor to the application.

Utilization Category Definition

AC-1 Resistance Furnaces Non inductive or slightly inductive loads, Resistive

Furnaces

AC-2 Slip-ring motors Starting and stopping of running motors

AC-3 Squirrel-cage motors Starting and stopping of running motors

AC-4

Lis',..._

Squirrel-cage motors Starting, plugging, and inching

(Plugging is understood as stopping or reversing the

motor rapidly by reversing the motor primary connec-

tions while the motor is running. Inching [or jogging] is

understood as energizing a motor once or repeatedly for

short periods to obtain small movements of the driven

mechanism.)

AC-15 Electromagnets Electromagnets for contactors, valves, solenoid actuators

© Choose the graph for the utilization

category selected. (a graph pertaining to

most Utilization Categories can be found

in each contactor section.)

Locate the Rated Operational Current

(le) along the bottom of the chart and

follow the graph lines up to the intersec-

tion of the appropriate contactor's

life-load curve.

Read the estimated contact life along

the vertical axis.

Starting with inching and plugging; tie = 230...460 VAC

CAJ CA772 CA785

11 a g

= 2

0 A comprehensive list of Utilization Categories can be found in each contactor section,

however, these are the primary categories used in most industrial motor applications. The life-load curves shown here are based on Sprecher+Schuh tests according to the

requirements defined in IEC 60947-4-1. Since contact life in a given application is

dependent on environmental conditions and duty cycle, actual application contact life

may vary from that indicated by the curves shown here.

10

Rated operational current le AC-4 (Al (3)


CA7



F1 sprecher+ Li schuh CA7


Contactors - Life Load Curves

TU Life-Load Curves

e

03

0 C.3

CA7

Locate the Rated Operational

Current (le) along the bottom of the

chart and follow the graph lines up

to the intersection of the appropri-

ate contactors life-load curve.

Read the estimated contact life

along the vertical axis.

AC-1 (to 690V)

0

Uo "6 0

(a

10

0.1

CA7.9 CA7,2

Non or slightly Inductive loads, resistive furnaces; Ue.230...690 VAC

CA7-03 CA7-23 CA730 CA7-37

r \

CA7-43 C4740 CA7.72

, 1-- -11 .b6..

INS=911. 'VMISMNZOIL. 114 NM241 n lat.

wli ' Il

10

Rated operational current le AC-1 [A]

Starting and stopping of slip-ring motors; Ue = 230...460VAC

CV -IA 07.23 CAI 061.37 07-43 CA7-60 01.72 01.$5

0

tot-

AC-3 (lo 460V)

NOTE: The life-load curves shown here are

based on Sprecher+Schuh tests according to

the requirements defined in IEC 60947-4-1.

Since contact life in any given application is

dependent on environmental conditions and

duty cycle, actual application contact life

may vary from that indicated by the curves

shown here.

0 575V applications use 90% of curve value.

10

Rated operational curve t ie AC 2 [A]

Starting and stopping of running squirrel-cage induction motors; Ue = 230...460 VAC

CA7.0 007.12 CA, 6

0.1

047.23 CA -40 Cm." 001 -43 00740 0074,

r

1-0%1A AC-3

U

10

Rated operationa current to AC-3 [A]





I schuh I CA7 Contactors - Life Load Curves

Life-Load Curves

Locate the Rated Operational

Current (e) along the bottom of the

chart and follow the graph lines up

to the intersection of the appropri-

ate contactor's life-load curve.

Read the estimated contact life

along the vertical axis.

AC-3 Starting and stopping of running squirrel-cage induction motors; Lie = 500...575V AC

(to 575)

AC-4 (to 69011)

NOTE: The life-load curves shown here are

based on Sprecher+Schuh tests according to

the requirements defined in IEC 60947-4-1.

Since contact life in any given application is

dependent on environmental conditions and

duty cycle, actual application contact life

may vary from that indicated by the curves

shown here.

0, C 2

411C! 2), to

c o o a/ (.7

10

0,1

CA7-9 CA7-12 CA7.16 CA7.23 CM-30 CA7-37 CA7-43 CA7-60 CA7.72 _,-CA7-85

AC-3

CA7

10

Rated operational current /e AC-3 [A]

Starting with inching and plugging; Ue = 230...690VAC

ca/-42 Cfy-91

100

10

Rated operational current le AC-4 [A]

100




I sprecher+ Technical Information

schuh I CA7 Contactors - Life Load Curves

DAi Life-Load Curves

0.

O rJ

CA7

AC-3 (90%), AC-4 (10%)

Mixed operation of squirrel-cage motors; Ue = 230...460 VAC 0 AC-3 90% Starting and stopping of running motors

AC-4 10% Starting with inching or plugging

CA7 -12 CA7 16 CA7.23 CA7-30, CA7 37 CA7-13 CA7-60 CA7 72

CA7-85

10

0.1

AC-3 (90%), AC-4 (10%)

witreak.mqk NEIIMAISik

10

Rated operational current ie AC-3 / AC-4 (A]

Contact Life for Mixed Utilization Categories AC-3 and AC-4 In many applications, the utilization category cannot be defined as

either purely AC-3 or AC-4. In those applications, the electrical life

of the contactor can be estimated with the following equation:

Lmixed = Lad [1+13,4x (1.3/L444 1)]. where:

Lmixed Approximate contact life in operations for a mixed

AC-3/AC-4 utilization category application.

Lan Approximate contact life in operations for a pure AC-3

utilization category (from the AC-3 life-load curve).

L1,4 Approximate contact life in operations for a pure AC-4

utilization category (from the AC-4 life-load curve).

Paca Percentage of AC-4 operations

0 575V applications use 85% of curve value.

100

Heavy Duty Starting and Regular Short-time Operation

CA740.37 C4740.72.1 CAT4/12/16 \

100

MIIMMA 1111MINNIMMIIIIINMIM rr4rukiayakz=iglrr....== IMIIMME111111111111111=111111111111=1111111111111111011

MM111111111M1=11111111111111111111111111111EMMI

1 MininirnMINMIUMMIL'Es MUM

10 100 1000

Starting Current / Short-time current (A)

0000

NOTE: The life-load curves shown here are based on Sprecher+Schuh tests according to the requirements defined in IEC 60947-4-1. Since contact life in any

given application is dependent on environmental conditions and duty cycle, actual application contact life may vary from that indicated by the curves shown here.





L schuh 1 CA7 Contactors - Operating Rates

Operating Rates The estimated contact life shown in the life-load curves is based

on the standard operating rates shown in Table B below. For ap-

plications requiring a higher operating frequency, the maximum

operating power (Pn in kW or HP) for a given contactor must be

reduced to maintain the same contact life.

To find a contactor's maximum operating power, for an operating

rate greater than shown in Table B, follow these guidelines:

1. Identify the appropriate curve for the contactor and utilization

category from Table B.

2. Locate the appropriate Maximum Operating Rate curve on the

following pages.

3. Locate the intersection of the curve with the application's operating rate (ops/hr.) found on the vertical axis.

4. Read the percent of maximum operating power (Pn) of the con-

tactor from the horizontal axis.

5. Multiply the % maximum power by the standard power rating.

Example: The contactor selected for an AC-4 utilization category

application is a CA7-16 (10HP at 460V), however, the application

requires an operating rate of 200 ops/hr., compared to the standard

operating rate of 120 ops/hr. as shown in Table B.

1. Locate the AC-4 Maximum Operating Rate curve on the following

pages.

2. Locate the intersection of 200 ops/hr on the CA7-16 curve. The

data shows that the maximum operating power of the CA7-16

contactor in this application is 60%.

3. Therefore, the maximum horsepower that can be switched by the

CA7-16 contactor in this application is 6 HP (0.60 x 10HP).

Table B - Standard Operating Rates by Contactor and Utilization Category

Contactor

AC-1 Max. ops/hr.

AC-2 Max. ops/hr.

AC-3 Max. ops/hr.

AC-4 Max. ops/hr.

@I AC -4 le for 200K ops.

Max. ops/hr.

Operating Parameters and Start Time

40% Duty Cycle

250ms 0 250ms 250ms

CA-9 1000 500 700 200 400

CA-12 1000 500 700 150 300

CA-16 1000 500 700 120 240

CA-23 1000 400 600 80 160

CA-30 1000 400 600 80 160

CA-37 1000 400 600 70 140

CA-43 1000 400 600 70 140

CA-60 800 300 500 70 140

CA-72 800 250 500 60 120

CA-85 600 200 500 50 140

0 Duty Cycle or Load Factor -Defined as the "on" time for a given operating

cycle per hour including the "start time." A 40% Duty Cycle is calculated in

the following manner:

Contactor switches six (6) times per minute (tpm), 250ms start time;

40% duty cycle.

To determine the "on" time and "off" time: Operations per hour = 360; [60 min x 6 tpm = 360]

One operating cycle = 10 sec; [60 min ÷ 6 tpm = 10 sec]

"On" time at 40% duty cycle = 4 sec; [10 sec x 0.4 (40%) = 4 sec]

4 sec "on" time includes the start time of 250ms

"Off" time at 40% duty cycle = 6 sec; DO sec -4 sec = 6 sec]


[PO 0 -S




schuh I CA7 Contactors - Operating Rates

1-7 1-1 Operating Rate Curves U

0 AC-1

CO

c.,

CA7

AC-2

3000

2500

2000

1500

1000

500

Non or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces; Ue = 230...690 VAC

3

0

0

10000

1000

100

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

P/Pn [%]

Slip-ring motors: starting. switching off; Ue = 230...460 VAC

0 10 20 30 40 50

P/Pn [%1

60 70 80 90

CA7V,7. INCA7,4

CA7.,N0A7 N0CA7.37CA74]

C, 00

047.72

CA7 46

100




sprecher+ I schuh

Operating Rate Curves

AC-3

AC-4

10000

1000


CA7 Contactors - Operating Rates

Squirrel-cage motors: starting, switching off motors during running; U8 = 230...460 VAC Relative operating time 40%, Starting time IA= 0.25s

AC 3

100

0

CA7 VCA7 12/CA7,6

CA7-23:CA7-30/CA7-37:CA7-43

CA760/CA7-72,CA725

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

P/Pn (%)

Squirrel-cage motors: starting, plugging, inching; U8 = 230 ...460 VAC

Starting Time 4, = 0.25$

CA7 23,20 CA7-37:43,60

CA7-72

CA7-85


ova

CA7



CA7

sprecher+ Dimensions

schuh I CA7 Contactors

Series CA7, CAU7, I CAQ7 CNX, CANTand CAL7 (Contactors, Reversing Contactors & Special Use Contactors)

Dimensions are in millimeters (inches) 1 '

:-

' , ,, Dimensions not intended for

- - ._ 0 . 0 - manufacturing purposes

',- ' :

-1

,

,

I

, firm

+...

0

,

L _ _ 4 ___,_,

d2

1

,

c1

a c

Catalog Number a b c cl c2 od dl d2

CA7-9...CA7-23; CA07-16; CAN7-12, 45 80 80.5 75.5 6 2-4.5 60 35

CNX-205...208; CAN7-12, CA(147-20 (1-25/32) (3-3/16) (3-11/64) (3-3/32) (1/4) (2-3/16) (2-23/64) (1-25/64)

CA7-30...CA7-37; CNX-209; CAN7-30... 45 81 97.5 92.6 6.5 2-4.5 60 35

CAN7-37 (1-25/32) (3-3/16) (4) (3-49/64) (17/64) (2-3/16) (2-23/64) (1-25/64)

AC CA7

59 81 100.5 95.5 6.5 2-4.5 60 45 -40

Contactors (2-21/64) (3-3/16) (4-7/64) (3-49/64) (17/64) (2-3/16) (2-23/64) (1-25/32)

54 81 100.5 95.5 6.5 2-4.5 60 45 CA7-43, CNX-212

(2-1/8) (3-3/16) (4-7/64) (3-49/64) (17/64) (2-3/16) (2-23/64) (1-25/32)

CA7-60...CA7-85 72 122 117 111.5 8.5 4-5.4 100 55 CNX-218 (2-53/64) (4-51/64) (4-49/64) (4-35/64) (21/64) (4-7/32) (3-15/16) (2-11/64)

CA7-90 95 81 117 111.5 8.5 4-5.4 100 55

(3-3/4) (3-3/16) (4-49/64) (4-35/64) (21/64) (4-7/32) (3-15/16) (2-11/64)

CA7-9C...CA7-16C, CA07-16C 45 81 106.5 101.5 6 2-4.5 60 35 CNX-205C...206C; CAN7-12C (1-25/32) (3-3/16) (4-3/16) (4) (1/4) (2-3/16) (2-23/64) (1-25/64)

CA7-23C 45 81 123.5 119 6 2-4.5 60 35 CNX-207C...208C (1-25/32) (3-3/16) (4-55/64) (4-43/64) (1/4) (2-3/16) (2-23/64) (1-25/64) - - True CA7-30C...CA7-37C: CA07-37C; 45 81 141.5 136.5 6.5 2-4.5 60 35

DC CNX-209C; CAN7-30C...CAN7-37C (1-25/32) (3-3/16) (5-37/64) (5-3/8) (17/64) (2-3/16) (2-23/64) (1-25/64) Contactors

CA7-40C 59 81 144.5 139.5 6.5 2-4.5 60 45

(2-21/64) (3-3/16) (5-11/16) (5-1/2) (17/64) (2-3/16) (2-23/64) (1-25/32)

54 81 144.5 140 6.5 2-4.5 60 45 CA7-430 CNX-212C (2-1/8) (3-3/16) (5-11/16) (5-33/64) (17/64) (2-3/16) (2-23/64) (1-25/32)

Reversing Contactors, Capacitor Contactors & Accessories (+...)

Contactors with... Dim. [mm] Dim. [inches] Mounting Position

ii41

.

auxiliary contact block-front mounting 2-, or 4-pole c/c1 + 39 c/c1 +1-37/64

(CA07) capacitor switching deck -front mounting c/c1 + 39 c/c1 +1-37/64

I .

I

auxiliary contact block-side mounting 1-, or 2 pole a + 9 a + 23/64 T. - _ _ _

pneumatic timing module c/c1 + 58 c/c1 + 2-23/64 i . . - - - - - 7-'-----...1 , LI_1

electronic timing module on coil terminal side b + 24 b + 15/16

reversing contactor w-mechinterlock on side of contactor a+9+a a+ 23/64+a AC contactors

95° mechanical latch c/c1 + 61 c/c1 +2-31/64 \ --s-4.-&,/

25°

=1

interface module on coil terminal side b + 9 b + 23/64

surge suppressor on coil terminal side b + 3 b + 1/8

label sheet +0 +0 13,..-- Labeling with... marking tag sheet with clear cover +0 +0

-----,y-

1----r marking tag adapter for V7 Terminals +5.5 +7/32 True DC contactors

AM Discount Schedule A-1



01 sprecher+ schuh

Dimensions

,Series CA7'with Two Winding,DC Coil

CA7 Contactors

Dimensions are in millimeters (inches)

Dimensions not intended for

manufacturing purposes :

-I: , 1 '

: Ø d , c2 I _ o o

,

- _

+.

-

r

.

1 I

0 I -4-,

MEI

+.

d2 cl

a c ___r. ...r......

Catalog Number a b c cl c2 ad di d2

CA7-9Y...CA7-23Y 54 90 80.5 75.5 6 2-4.5 60 35

(2-9/64) (3-35/64) (3-11/64) (3-3/32) (1/4) (2-3/16) (2-23/64) (1- 25/64)

CA7-30Y, CA7-37Y 54 90 97.5 92.6 6.5 2-4.5 60 35

(2-9/64) (3-35/64) (4) (3-49/64) (17/64) (2-3/16) (2-23/64) (1- 25/64)

AC CA7-43Y

63 90 100.5 95.6 6.5 2-4.5 60 45

Contactors (2-31/64) (3-35764) (4-7/64) (3-7/8) (17/64) (2-3/16) (2-23/64) (1- 25,32)

CA7-600...CA7-85D 81 131 117 111.5 8.5 4-5.4 100 55

CAN7-72D, CNX-218D (3-3/16) (5-5/32) (4- 49/64) (4-35/64) (21/6.4) (4-7/32) (3-15/16) (2-11/64)

95 122 117 111.5 8.5 4-5.4 100 55 CA7-90D (3-3/4) (4-51/64) (4-49/64) (4-35/64) (21/64) (4-7/32) (3-15/16) (2-11/64)

Reversing Contactors, Capacitor Contactors & Accessories (+...)

Contactors with... Dim. [mm] Dim. [inches] Mounting Position -

auxiliary contact block-front mounting 2-, or 4-pole c/c1 + 39 c/c1 +1-37/64 0-4

auxiliary contact block- left side mounting 1-, or 2 pole a + 9 a + 23/64

pneumatic timing module c/c1 + 58 c/c1 + 2-23/64 1 ii _....----r---.1,_" 1

Ill. electronic timing module on coil terminal side b + 24 b + 15/16 L__I_I b mechanical latch c/c1 + 61 c/c1 +61

interface module on coil terminal side b + 9 c/cl + 2-31/64 Two Winding DC contactors

Labeling with... label sheet +0 +0

marking tag sheet with clear cover +0 +0 marking tag adapter for W Terminals +5.5 +7/32


oja

en-

CA7



Cn

0

CCS

0

CA7

Ul sprecher+ Dimensions

schuh I CA7 Contactors

CA7 Contactors with Termiiial


Dimensions not intended for manufacturing purposes

CA7-P-KN23 / KL23

125.2

!I:o _....0 oi

* to 0 - oil CA7-P-K37

CA7-P-K85

Catalog

Number With AC Operated Contactor DC Operated Contactor

Contactor hi h2 h3 h4 ht h2 h3 h4

CA7-9...16 61.6 78.6 87.2 104.2 - -

CA7-P-KN23 / (2-27/64) (3-3/32) (3-7/16) (4-3/32)

KL23 CA7-23

61.6 (2-27/64)

78.6 (3-3/32) - 105.2

(4-9/64)

122.2 (4-13/16) - -

CA7-P-K37 CA7-30 & 37 67.6 84.6 71.5 88.5 111.2 128.2 115.1 132.1

(2-21/32) (3-21/64) (2-13/16) (3-31/64) (4-3/8) (5-3/64) (4-17/32) (5-13/64)

69.0 85.0 74.5 90.5 112.6 128.6 118.1 134.1 CA7-P-K43 CA7-43 (2-23/32) (3-11/32) (2-15/16) (3-9/16) (4-7/16) (5-1/16) (4-21/32) (5-9/32)

79.7 104.7 86.7 111.7 79.7 104.7 86.7 111.7 CA7-P-K85 CA7-60...85 (3-1/8) (4 -1 /8) (3-13/64) (4-3/8) (3-1/8) (4-1/8) (3-13/64) (4-3/8)




sprecher+ Dimensions

UIschuh I CA7 Contactors

ontactors,with Paralleling Links


Dimensions not intended for manufacturing purposes

CA7-P-B23 CA7-P-B37

Catalog With Number Contactor

AC Operated Contactor DC Operated Contactor

CA7-P-B23

CA7-9...16

CA7-23

CA7-P-K37 CA7-30 & 37

111 h2

65.1 90.1

(2-9/16) (3.9/16)

65.1 90.1 (2-9/16) (3-9/16)

69.0 94.0 12-23/321 (3-45/64)

h3 h4 ht h2 h3 h4

90.7 (1/4)

104.2 (2-3/16)

108.7 133.7 (4-9/32) (5-17/64)

74.5 99.5 112.6 137.6 118.1 143.1

(2-15/16) (3-29/32) (4-7/16) (5-13/32) (4-21/32) (5-5/8)




Miniature circuit breakers Din-T6 series 6 kA MCB

CI Standards AS/NZS 4898

D Approval No. N17481

CI Current range 2-63 Amps 1, 2 and 3 pole

Sealable and lockable handle

Cl Available in curve type C and D

Mounts on CD chassis (250 A and 355 A)

1 pole 1 module In (A) C - Curve 5-10 In

2

4

6

10

13

16

20

25

32

40

50

63

DTCB6102C

DTCB6104C

urct6lok

'DTCB6110C

DTCB6113C

DCB6116C

,DTCB6120C

DTCB6125C

iDTCB6132C

DTCB6140C

DTCB6150C, -

DTCB6163C

2 pole 2 modules

2

4

6

10

13

16

20

25

32

40

50

63

3 pole 3

2

4

6

10

13

16

20

25

32

40

50

63

DTC136202C

DTCB6204C

-DTCB6206C

DTCB6210C

DTCB6213C

DTCB6216C

DTC136220C

DTCB6225C

DTCB6232C

DTCB6240C

DTCB6250C

'DTC86263C

modules

DTCB6302C

DTCB6304C

DTCB6306C

DTCB6310C

DTCB6313C

DTCB6316C

DTCB6320C

DTCB6325C

DTCB6332C

DTCB6340C

DTCB6350C

DTCB6363C

ui

DTCB6

1 pole

Short circuit capacity 6 kA In (A) 2 - 63

1P

2P

3P

DC use

Short circuit

Max.voltage (DC)

1P

20 kA

48 V

240 V AC

240 - 415 V AC

240 - 415 V AC

2 P')

25 kA

110 V

Use at DC

When using Din-T6 in a DC application the magnetic

tripping current is approximately 40 % higher than in

AC 50/60 Hz.

Shock resistance (In X, Y, Z directions). 20 g with shock duration 10 ms (minimum 18 shocks).

40 g with shock duration 5 ms (minimum 18 shocks).

Vibration resistance (In X, Y, Z directions). 3 g in frequency range 10 to 55 Hz

(operating time at least 30 min).

According to IEC 60068-2-6.

Storage temperature From -55 °C to +55 °C, according to IEC 88 part 2 - 1

(duration 96 hours).

Operating temperature From -25 °C to +55 °C, according to

VDE 0664 parts 1 and 2.

Use at 400 Hz

At 400 Hz the magnetic trip current is approximately

50 % higher than in AC 50/60 Hz.

Notes: ') 2 pole MCB connected in series.

The line side is the "OFF" (bottom) side of the MCB, and connects to CD chassis tee-offs. Available on indent only.



aInnovatory in Proteedom Technology TERASAK1

Din-T MCBs Technical data Characteristics according to BS EN 60898

Miniature Circuit Breakers are intended for the protection of Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (Icn) wiring installations against both overloads and short-circuits in Is the value of the short-circuit that the MCB is capable of domestic or commercial wiring installations where operation is withstanding in the following test of sequence of operations: possible by uninstructed people 0-t-CO.

Tripping characteristic curves

Magnetic release

An electromagnet with plunger ensures instantaneous tripping in

the event of short-circuit. The NHP Din-T range has 3 different types, following the current for instantaneous release: types B, C

and D curve.

Icn Test Tripping Applications (A) current time

B 3 x In 0.1<t<45 s (In<32 A) Only for resistive loads eg:

5 x In 0.1<t<90 s (In>32 A) electrical heating water heater

t<0.1 s stoves.

C 5 x In 0.1<t<15 s (In<32 A) Usual loads such as:

10 x In 0.1<t<30 s (In>32 A) lighting socket outlets

t<0.1 s small motors

D 10 x In 0.1<t<4 5(**) (In<32 A) Control and protection of

20 x In 0.1<t<8 s (In>32 A) circuits having important transient inrush currents

t<0.1 s (large motors)

Thermal release

The release is initiated by a bimetal strip in the event of overload. The standard defines the range of releases for specific overload values. Reference ambient temperature is 30 °C.

Test Tripping current time

1.13 x In t ? 1 h (In < 63 A)

t ? 2 h (In > 63 A)

1.45 x In t < 1 h (In < 63 A) t < 2 h (In > 63 A)

2.55 x In 1 s < t < 60 s (In < 32 A)

1 s < t < 120 s (In >32 A)

After the test the MCB is capable, without maintenance, to withstand a dielectric strength test at a test voltage of 900 V.

Moreover, the MCB shall be capable of tripping when loaded

with 2.8 In within the time corresponding to 2.55 In but greater than 0.1s.

Service short-circuit breaking capacity (Ics) Is the value of the short-circuit that the MCB is capable of withstanding in the following test of sequence of operations: 0-t-CO-t-CO.

After the test the MCB is capable, without maintenance, to withstand a dielectric strength test at a test voltage of 1500 V.

Moreover, the MCB shall not trip at a current of 0.96 In. The MCB

shall trip within lh when current is 1.6 In.

0 - Represents an opening operation

C - Represents a closing operation followed by an

automatic opening.

t - Represents the time interval between two successive

short-circuit operations: 3 minutes.

The relation between the rated short-circuit capacity (Icn) and the rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (Ics) shall be as follows:

Icn (A) Ics (A)

< 6000 6000

> 6000 < 10000

0.75 Icn min. 6000

> 10000 0.75 Icn min. 7500

In both sequences all MCBs are tested for emission of ionized gases during short-circuit (grid distance), in a safety distance between two MCBs of 35 mm when devices are installed in two different rows in the enclosure. This performance allows the use of any NHP/Terasaki enclosure.



aInnovator., in Protection rethnoloR TERASAK1

Din-T MCBs Technical data

Tripping curves according to EN 60898

The following tables show the average tripping curves of the Terasaki Din-T MCBs based on

the thermal and magnetic characteristics.

Curve C

04

110'

102

10

1

104

104

104 1 1 5 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40 50

x In



aInnovators in Protection Technoloxy TERASAKI


Influence of ambient air temperature on the rated current

The maximum value of the current which can flow through an

MCB depends on the nominal current of the MCB, the conductor cross-section and the ambient air temperature.

The values shown in the table below are for devices in free air. For devices installed with other modular devices in the same

switchboard, a correction factor (K) shall be applied relative to the mounting situation of the MCB, the ambient temperature and the number of main circuits in the installation.

No of devices K ')

2 or 3 0.9

4 or 5 0.8

6 or 9 0.7

> 10 0.6

Calculation example

Within a distribution board consisting of eight 2 Pole, 16 A, 'C'

curve type MCBs, with an operating ambient temperature of 45 °C,

which is the highest temperature the MCB can operate at without unwanted tripping?

Calculation

The correction factor K - 0.7, for use in an eight circuit installation: 16 A x 0.7 - 11.2 A

As the MCB is working at 45 °C it shall be given another factor (90 0/0= 0.9): In at 45 °C = In at 30 °C x 0.9 = 11.2 A x 0.9 - 10.1 A.

Note: ') Applicable for MCBs working at maximum rated currents.

The thermal calibration of the MCBs was carried out at an

ambient temperature of 30 °C. Ambient temperatures different from 30 °C influence the bimetal and this results in earlier or later thermal tripping.

0.5 - 6 A

icin 140

120

- ICO

- - - - _

80

60

0 ID 20 30 40 50 60 ..0

10 A

% In

1443

i2D

ICO

60

60

0 la 20 30 40 50 eo %

16 - 40 A

1.ta I

140

120

1CO

CO

60

0 10 20 90 40 SO e0 7.-C

50 - 63 A

%In 140

120

103

03

eo

0 10 20 30 W. 50 So °C

:1P (single pole)

: mP (multi -pole)



aInnorworx in Protecrion Technology TERASAKI


Effects of frequency on the tripping characteristic All the MCBs are designed to work at frequencies of 50-60 Hz,

therefore to work at different values, consideration must be

given to the variation of the tripping characteristics. The

thermal tripping does not change with variation of the frequency but the magnetic tripping values can be up to 50 0/0 higher than the ones at 50-60 Hz.

Tripping current variation

60 Hz 100 Hz 200 Hz 300 Hz 400 Hz

1 1.4 1.5

Power losses The power losses are calculated by measuring the voltage drop between the incoming and the outgoing terminals of the device at rated current.

Power loss per pole

In (A)

Voltage drop (V)

2.230

Energy loss

(W) 1.115

Resistance (m0hm)

4458.00 0.5

1 1.270 1.272 1272.00

2 0.620 1.240 310.00

3 0.520 1.557 173.00

4 0.370 1.488 93.00

6 0.260 1.570 43.60

8 0.160 1.242 19.40

10 0.160 1.560 15.60

13 0.155 2.011 11.90

16 0.162 2.586 10.10

20 0.138 2.760 6.90

25 0.128 3.188 5.10

32 0.096 3.072 3.00

40 0.100 4.000 2.50

50 0.090 4.500 1.80

63 0.082 5.160 1.30

80 0.075 6.000 0.90

100 0.075 7.500 0.75

125 0.076 9.500 0.60

Limitation curves

Let-through energy Pt The limitation capacity of an MCB in short-circuit conditions, is its capacity to reduce the value of the let-through energy that the short-circuit would be generating.

Peak current Ip Is the value of the maximum peak of the short-circuit current limited by the MCB.

O I= peak assumed

0 Icc assumed

® !Cc peak limited

Icc limited

See following pages



0 Innorotorw in Protection Technology TERASAKI

Din-T MCBs Technical data Din-T 6

6 kA i2t

C curve 105

C

U

cu

.70

E

Let4tireugtr energy at 240/415 V

A 1 ee c50033 C50 C40 C32 C25 C20. C16:, C10 c6

1 2 '3' 4 ,5 ,7 8. :9 10

Prospective current Icc (kA) --§--

Id icirtiiterii,eakcurrent at280%400,y'

4 5

Prospectivecarreet let (kA),

6



aInnovators in Protection Talmo lop' TERASAK1


Use of standard MCB for DC use

For MCBs designed to be used in alternating current but used in installations in direct current, the following should be taken into consideration:

For protection against overloads it is necessary to connect the two poles to the MCB. In these conditions the tripping characteristic of the MCB in direct current is similar to alternating current.

Use in DC selection table

Series Rated current (A)

Din-T 6 0.5....63 A

48 V 1 pole Icu (kA)

20

MI For protection against short-circuits it is necessary to connect the two poles to the MCB. In these conditions the tripping characteristic of the MCB in direct current is

40% higher than the one in alternating current.

110 V 2 poles in series Icu (kA)

250 V I pole Icu (kA)

440 V 2 poles in series Icu (kA)

25



ODInnovators In Protection Technology TERASAKI


Text for specifiers

MCB Series Din-T 6

According to EN 60898 standard

For DIN rail mounting according to DIN EN 50022; EN 50022; future EN 60715; IEC 60715 (top hat rail 35 mm)

II Grid distance 35 mm

Working ambient temperature from -25 °C up to +50 °C

Approved by CEBEC, VDE, KEMA, IMQ.

1 pole is a module of 18 mm wide

Nominal rated currents are:

0.5/1/2/3/4/6/10/13/16/20/25/32/40/50/63 A

Ail Tripping characteristics: B,C,D (B curve Din-T 10 only).

Number of poles: 1 P, 1 P+N, 2 P, 3 P, 3 P+N, 4P

The short-circuit breaking capacity is: 6/10k A, energy

limiting class 3

Terminal capacity from 1 up to 35 mm2 rigid wire or 1.5 up

to 25 mm' flexible wire.

Screw head suitable for flat or Pozidrive screwdriver

Can be connected by means of both pin or fork busbars

The toggle can be sealed in the ON or OFF position

Rapid closing

EI Both incoming and outgoing terminals have a protection degree of IP 20 and they are sealable

NI Isolator function thanks to Red/Green printing on the toggle.

1111 Maximum voltage between two phases; 440 V-

Maximum voltage for utilisation in DC current: 48 V 1 P and

110 V 2 P

Two position rail clip

Mechanical shock resistance 40 g (direction x, y, z)

minimum 18 shocks 5 ms half-sinusoidal acc. to IEC 60068-2-27

Vibration resistance: 3 g (direction x, y, z) minimum

30 min. according to IEC 60068-2-6

Extensions can be added on both left or right hand side

Auxiliary contact

4r. Shunt trip

Undervoltage release

- Motor operator

Panelboard switch

Add-on RCD can be coupled.



aInnovators in Prow-don Technology TERASAK1

Din-T MCBs Technical data Din-T6

Series AS/NZS 4898

Standards (Aust / NZ / International) IEC 60898 .

iTripping characteristics ',.', C, D

(Nominal current . A C/D(0.5-63) ;Calibration temperature , °C 30

,Number of poles (8 mod). 1/2/3/4 Neutral pole protected yes

Nominal

Frequency

voltage Un AC 1 P V 240/415 3 P/4 P V 415

DC 1 P') V DC 48 2 P (in series) ') V DC 110

Hz 50/60 Hz DC: magn.trip +40%

Hz 400: magn.trip +50%

Maximum service voltage Ubmax between two wires V 250/440; 53/120 Minimum service voltage Ubmin V 12; 12

Selectivity class (IEC 60898) 3

Isolator application IEC 60947-2 yes

Rated insulation voltage Pollution degree 2 V 500

Pollution degree 3 V 440

Impulse withstand test voltage kV 6

Insulation resistance m0hm 10 000

Dielectric rigidity kV 2.5

Vibration resistance (in x,,y,'z direction) (IEC-77/16.3) 3 g

tEndurance

k

.ElectriOal at Un, In ,' 10,000 . . .: : . , mechanical.: , 20,000

;Utilisation category (IEC 60947-2)

iProtectioli degree.(obttide/ inside, inenClosure.with door) IP 20/IP 40 ,

Self-extinguish degree :(according to UL94) V2 -

1Tropicalisation'(according to IEC 60068-2 / DIN 40046) °C/PH +55 °C/95 % RH '

;Operating temperatUre ' ' v : : °C. -25/+55

Storage temperature - , C. -55/+55, Terminal capacity Rigid cable min/max (top) mm' 1/35

flexible cable min /max (top) mm' 0.75/25 Rigid cable min/max (bottom) mm' 1/35 flexible cable min /max (bottom) mm'

( Flexible cable 0.75/1/1.5 me with cable lug)

0.75/25

Torque Nm 4.5

(Add -on

(side i -

l '

devices Auxiliary'contacts eyes

add-on) - UVT yes

Shunt trip.' yes

' Motor operator ' yes

- Panelboard switch yes

Busbar systems Pin (top/bottom) yes/yes Fork (top/bottom) -/yes

!Accessories , yes

Dimensions, weights, packaging

(HxDxW) 86x68xW mm/mod 18

Weight/mod. g 120

Package mod. 12

Short-circuit capacity AC (kA) AS/NZS 4898

Icn 1 P'.. 230/400 V -6, ..

: ' 2 P : . , 230/400 V.-

. 3 P/4.P: 230/400 V ' 6

Ics (service) - ,:,. .;100 % Icn .. .

ps

Icu (ultimate) 1 P 127 V 20

240V 10

415V 3

2P 127V -

240 V 15

415 V 10

3 P, 4 P 240 V 15

415V 10

440 V 6

Ics (service) 75 % Icu

NEMA AB1 (120/240V) , 20

Short-circuit capacity DC (kA)

lV

2;

i.,

Icu (ultimate) 1 P <60 V 20

<220 V -

2P <125V 25

<440 V

Ics (service) 100 % Icu

Notes Refer pages 3 - 23, 24 for information on SAFE-T MCBs. ' 0.5-4 A/6-25 A/32-40 A/50-63 A

') Preferred values of rated control supply voltage (IEC 60947 - 2): 24 V, 48 V, 110 V, 125 V, 250 V ') 30 (125 V DC)

`) 10 (250 V DC)

') On request.



TERASAKI Innowours in Prom -don Technoloxy


Miniature circuit breakers - Din-T 6

Dimensions in mm.

118 TafT"--1 0 0

0 0 111C11,--1111=1"

72

11111.111111111 Id no NI MI SY ad Isi

0 0 ICIFF---111C10



AC 1/ 40V

CA4 1,10A -." ' ,.'2 5A ' r 1 Sileaccess .., CAl 0 I -., 20A , 7 514 : Side access , CA1OB .-:-.." 20A : 7 514 , 20A

-10A' 2 5A --.: Rear access s CA20 !- - 25A .. ' I IkW", Side access 6A20/3 ; ,, 25A', I IkW '25A i

CM-I , Dry circuit switching-. , Side access - CADInFor toy Voliage/Cutrent swactuni Side access C26 i '-', 32A' 15kW ' i 32A _______.,-___ - ,

CG4-1 Dry circuit switching'. Rear access - CA.012" see cat ion for specificatins Side access C32 ':j` ' 40A : - ^22kW 1- 50A

008 ". . - 20A ''''' i 7 514 . ' Rear: access C42 '63A ., 30kW- .63A'

...' " . " * 1 ' . ^ ' ' '

1 1 1 . - 11 S . 0 1 17' 1 11 : .1.1 .t

' " . 1

. 1 . 1. 1 1:. 11 I 1 ' : 1 1: 1 Y . . . . . -. e .

1 1 1 11 11 1.- . ..' . I, -,...S.," *:,°

1 1. t 1111 1' . .11 / 1 1 , 1 1 1 1 t 1

1 1' 1 't 11 1

Ac-21A AC2 415V '

C43 i '63A - 30kW - 1 63A `C315 1 . 315A , .- i .13214 , 315.1

C80' ' 100A1 s 45kWr 1 ;;115A'

CI25 150A 7,5kW - 1 150A ., .

i

' L400 : - 450A 132kW - 500A

L600 ,; 500A 13214 ;800A'

L80014 630A 7132kW', -1100A



f*, t"' _

` APPLICATIONS iSWITCHIIEVELOPMENVIVIRING:ENAGRAMr 143"2 . J R . & A N t v 5 , 4--

Three phase

Three wire

VOLTMETER

SWITCH

Three. phase

TeNeiitral

VOLTMETER

SWITCH,

PliSse'to.,Pha se

And Phase

To Neutral

':;VOLTMETER

'ÀMMETER

'SWITCH

Thielphase Four Wire

AMMETER '

SWITCH

11.4(e' ,.Current

AMMETik.

SWITCH

Three C.F. :

0 it

OFF R W

MINIM n EMI a II

1 7 S

.110{ 71.

A.;

u-

ivw

OFF P.N.

3-3N

1-

. 17 t9

III 1 7

warlamumminismini 111E291/11131111111MEN1111111111 11111=11111111111111111111NP111111

1111111111111141111111111

INEENVIIIIIE111111110001111 111111111111111111111111111111

Illf8E6111131111111111111111111 OP 111111111111111111111111111111kiii

ifirn 1311 17 II .

'. . 11/1,1 EICOMENIIII II 81111111111111411

INIMIIIIIIIIIMIP IIIPIIIIIIEIIIIIII I MIIIIMMINIIIIIIIIIP111111111111111 11=1111111111111111N11111111PI PIP! 111111101111111111111111111111111111441114

1111111111111111111111110111111111111N111111

1111111011111M11410111104111111111 M111111111111111111i11.1MINIMIll I

S 9.1,

4, 0!,

' W

6 1 I 10.17

°F l' 11111111.1111.1 I PINIIIIIIIIIIM

R 11111111141111111 I MIN 'NMI 111111111111411 IIP IMMO i 1111111111114111111

1111111111111111

I 1

-1 1 1 1' T'

e'6 e

'17 S

1111111111111117.06 111111111 1111111111111111741=111

^

ROERING;DETAILS;,_n

.: Standard Switch .(..,114

A004 -625 CG4

CAlpp

CG8,

C-A20

,CA20B ,1

Standard, Switch

A005-G24

Standa,rd,SWitch

A007-625.

Standard Switch

A033-600

:Standatd Switch '

AOS8:622

Standard Switch

A048-624

MANY WO STANDARD OR SPECIAL CIRCLNTARY.WITCRES:READILY AVAILABLE

CA4

CG4

CA10 .

CA108

CG8

'CA20

. CA208

CA4

CG4

CA10

CA100

CG8

CA20'

CA2013

CA4'

C04.

CAIO

CAIOB

. CG8

CA20

.".2013

CA10'

6A108

C08

CAM'

CA208

26,

C32

'C43

C80

CA4

CG4

CA10

, 'CA1013

CG8

CA20

CA208



;;YP,.--;"

....'ORDERING,DETAILS"- SWITCH'DEVELOPMENT411RINGIIIAGRAM,,%

CIRCUIT

BREAKER

CONTROL

SWITCH

tear =two,

cuau

TRIP

' ,C %it

Special Switch

AUH254

CA10

CA10B

CA20

CA20B

C26

CAD11

CAD12

CONTROL

AND

INDICATOR

SWITCH

IS fl

0 mamsliii ansimmus.

111111111=11111M111111111111M

1111E1111112111110111113111M0

Standard Switch

A190

CA10

CA10B

CA20

CA2013

C26

CONTROL

SWITCH

Stop-Start OP S Olt

(9)

L

C

II 3

t"

2 4

STOP

START.

Standard Switch

- A176-600

CM

CG4

CA10

CA10B

CG8

CA20'

CA20B

C26

CAD11

CAD12

CONTROL:

SWITCH

with isolate.

positibn

st1

Standard-Switch

A178--600

CA4

CG4

CA10

CA10B

CG8

CA20

CA20B

C26

CAD11

CADIZ

CONTROL

SWITCH

Trip-Close

Circuit

- Standard Switch

" A214-600

"

CA4

CG4

CA10

CA10B

CG8

CA20

CA20B

C26

CAD11

CAD12

COITR01.

SWITCH:

Morrientaijf

Position

4 : '

2

:Standard Switch

-A2957600-

CA4

CG4

CA10

CA10B

CG8

CA20

CA20B

C26

CAD11

CAD12

MANY OTHER-STANDARD OR SPECIAL CHANGE-OVER AND BYPASS SWITCHES AVAILABLE 3



APPLICATIONS

GANG

SWITCH

Two

Element

GANG

SWITCH

Three

Element

ITCH:DEVELOPMENT:i1WIRINGIIIAGRAM?; ORDERING DETAILS';;

STANDARD SWITCH

A310-600

101

2

CA4

CG4

.CA10

CA10B

CG8

CA20

CA20B

C26

C32

C42

CAD11

CAD12

1 3 STANDARD SWITCH

A311600

2 4 6 6

o,

2

x

CA4

'CG4

CA10

CA10B

CG8

CA20

CA208

C26

C32

C42.

CAD11

CAD12

GANG

SWITCH

Element

STANDARD SWITCH

A330-600

CA4

CG4

CA10 CA10B"

CG8

CA20

CA20B

C26

C32

CAD11

CAD12

CHANGE. OVER

SWITCHES.

With oft

A210 A711

--A212 . . -A2I3 1 17 9 II '3 15

10i ' 9

x

2 x x x

I: series diagrams o r al pireatio

CA4 C125

CG4 C3'15

"CA10 1.400

CA10B L600

'CG8 CAD11

CA20 CAD12

CA20B

C26'

C32

C42

C80

CHANGE OVER

SWITCHES

WithOut Ott

A? 20 'A22,1 A222

- A223

"1' series diigrams on anplicat

CA4 C125

CG4 C315

CA10 L400

CA10B L600

CG8 CAD11

CA20 CAD12

CA20B

,C26

C32

C42

C80

MANY OTHER STANDARD OR SPECIAL SWITCHES AVAILABLE



PPLICATIO WITCHDEVELOPMENTWIRING,DIAGRAM RDERINGOETAILS

-ISOLATING'

SWITCHES

Two Pole

60° Angle

'STANDARD SWITCH', ("Al

,A201620 CG4

CA10

CA108

CG8

CA20

' CA2013:,

C26

C32

C42

CADft: CADi2

ISOLATING

SWITCHES

Three Pole,

60° Angle

OFF ON ;

Orr ON

:.4

X X

1 1 3 5 -1 7

d '4

OFF

N

6

X ><

STANDARD SWITCH

'A202 -620' CA4

CG4'

;CA10

CA108

CG8

CA20

CA2QB

C26

C32

C42

ISOLATING

SWITCH

Four Pole

.60` Angle

'ISOLATING

SWITCH

',Three Pole

90° Angle"

ISOLATING

SWITCH '

Three,Main PrileS

Plus

Early Break

Auxiliary Contact.

ISOLATING

SWITCH

Three Main Poles

ORJS

Late Break

Auxiliary contact

, OFF

ON

OFF ON

1 1 3' 5 I 1,

4,A IV 2 4 6 e'

X X X

Utr

Qp014 zmr

J 1

'OFF

ON

tviwt /Aux.

6

STANDARD SWITCH

-A203-620,

STANDARD SWITCH

A292=621' '

STANDARD, SWITCH

A327-621

SIANDARD"SWITCH

,A293 -621

CA4

CG4

CA1013

CG8

CA20

CA20B

C26

C32

642

CAD11:

CAD12

C26

C32

C42

C80

C125

C315

C26

C32

C12

C80

C125

C315

1.400

C26

,C32 -

C42

C80

, C125

C315

"L400

ISOLATINO'SWITCHES UP T0 24POLES AVAILABLE AND.VARIOUS ENCL0SURES



''SINGLE POLEWITHOUT,OFF

A 230 3 step, 2 st.

-A231 A-232 4 step, 2 sr.. 5 step, 3 it.

A 233. 6 step; 3 st.

. A 236 step,:5

A 237 . 0 step, 5 st.

A 238 . A 239

11 step, 6 %I. 12.step, 6 st.

SINGLE POLE WITH OFF

A.241 3:step, 2 st..

A 242- ' 4 Step, 2 st.

5 9 3

0 0

o'

-12 A 243

5 step, 3 st.

5 9

3

0 0 0

0-7

0 It

A 244

6-step 3 st. A.245

7 step, 4 st. 'A 246

8 step 4 st .

. '0 0 5 9 13 5 13 o

9

0

1 ° 0 o" 0 O'

0 0 " 617

2 0

--9 o o

7 ts;12 ° 3

0 r o 0

0 - 7 550 07

11 7

A 247 9,step, 5 st

A 248 '10 step 5st.

A 249

fl.step, 6st.

Numerous Multi -Pole Multi-Step switches readily available.

Selector; switches can be assembled to suit:your standard or speCial circuit requirements.



?Irg ,7140" -- ' , '1APPLICATION,

:r.;--,;Likree,-., A.--,... -,..,,,,%,,,,:,;.','"

THREE PHASE -, , .

REVERSING

SWIT:CH. '

Spririg Return

1b-Off- ,

"' - 10- 'y'rkt4p4.135:IssioLei,41,iWASICrANNIAVW0Spegrat , ' - .,,,,

. - - - 0 ASWITCHMEVELOPMENT&WIRING',01AGRAM - -- r ' '''' ...% `1..;;...-4.5,,," '',..,?..1k- 4- 4,*4f r''''', ,c. ._*&L'N`rriQ"'..i,:skA.I.,X,url.-7 ',. - , -

"

- Xr-treetvig4irgMCAr" ,, ORDERINGIIETAILSt 44,44t,V2W1;,Zr.fr".9M, .?;'$''ì

F ' - ,

.,,,,t` t . !-.1.' 1.-.;-gi,no

STANDARD SWITCH ,

- -A228-600

,

' '

, '

CA10

CA10B.

CG8 .,

CA20

CA2013', ..

- C26 , ,

S 7 's I 11 '

,

4:,'' * .),

' ). - , .

- ' ?

Filf 4, 40

T ,

,J,

2

,..

, ,,.

,

9 , '

?

111/111113111 `" x .

o . II .

, 111110102 x .

"THREE' PHASE-

REVERSING ' '

SWITCH . ,

.

,

,

STANDARD SWTCH

A401-620

-

.

,, ' '

. ,

C-A4

CG4

6 A10

C100(3, ,

CA20

CA2013', ' *

C26 -

C32.

C4-3

C80 ,.

igli ,iir,

' II

r et: ft

.. 1 ,

4: , .'1. r -. -"(tp " 6.1511kN ter: 4.,

t i

''' 3

,

7

9

-

-.... FOR X., X ' .

1 1 1 1 1 1 ' CI) ,

.

REV ' X , X -

.

. ,

.

,

'

HREE PHASE ' -

STAR-DELTA.

Reduced VoltagO,

Starting . i

, .. '

.

,

. . , .

STANDARD SWITCH

A410-600,.

' ,' ,

' , . '

,

' CA10-,

CA10B

c08 CA20

CA013 ' .C32,

C'43 ' '

C80,-

'7, 9,, '

' ":\''' ''' C..",:a efiS ' 20I: eta .

.

Tc '

.

5 , lc ',, ,

6 13 , T2 T3

,, ,

TS 16 ' 10 ' 7'

,

2 4 '6 .6 10 ,1 'I I:

CI ' .'1'' ',. : i'''' -' "- ! ' -

A X X

A X * X' .

.

. , . .

.

THREE PHASE

' STAR DELTA

' SWITCH

For use with ' ,,

ContPctor

,

STANDARD SWITCH ,-

A419=600

.. .

, . . ,

-

'

,

, . ,

CA10"

CA10B

. CG8.

CA20.;

CA2,0B - '

I 3 5 1 :,

`,. f

1

AIN

..3 IS.

101 d

'2

=4:4 OPd ] ----1--. 13

: -

.

a IC .b

0 ,,

'

X,

- )(MU El

.

'

=MIA .

A ' X 111111111111111 - -II ' - 11111111111111 .'

A . .

THREE PHASE .

S,ING,LEVINOING

"LIELTA-,OFF',

DOUBLE STAR

' TWO SPEED . :

, -

.

-

' STANDARD SWITCH - ' :. A441-6,00 '

: , '

.

.

.

, ,

CA10

CA10B

CG8

CA20 - CA2OB

C43

C80

, . ,

- I) 1\1!)...

, 9 11

L 1

- ''' 9 , ,

' i' 1). - .:.

"

1. 2

L31 , A f-4 <11"i)-

93 fit, [:...e.1

.

,11,.. t--. 4/ 1.

, .

. .

4 . . " ,

1 3 T 2 3

IMMEMEI ,. k x .

x x .

,

,, - .

,

, , ' , .,, ,- .

.

.

SINGLE PHASE

REVERSING

SWITCH

. ,

'

,

. . . . . .,..

... .

STANDARD SWITCH

A622-600 '

. . ' .

, ,

,

' CA10 ''

CA10B

CG8

CA20 - CA208

'C32:

.

111111111111M111111111111111111191 9919991199.99zuw,

-

, ,

.

.

. ,

'

.

.v-c- ;e: , (0)1'..

ask 1:3:::41

74., ig.`1 114,

r , tO yip , ',

. '

,

cr , Lea ' -

' s iner114.0.1354 FOR ' ' '

si ' x x x 11:1

MOE 11111111

II _ '

S2 ,11 11 , ' -

.

, . .

. .

.

'SWITCHES;FOR OTHER MOTOR CIRCUITS AND ENCLOSURES READILY AVAILABLE , ,, 1



lvy Duty Motion:

f'

1

,,,=

'--"i*.k n! ' VI,

. 4r- ' fY

N

.1 " ; , 44. ..'x'. .

1

-- r'''re 4., . ' InsillatediEnclosures' ..,

u.

The enclosed.is,only,a,selectionof an extensive range of our switches.and optional eirTr:::i a.,,, ,- Due-to design development requireinentsspecifications'maizalter without-notice 5.% , - , ,

SYDNEY..., : ,- -.... , , ,- MELBOURNE ,.,,- ,`, - . , ,, - BRISBANE ADELAIDE

37§ l_lierficial Rtiiil, , ",,,,':';', '14`Brpnscliiii'Stre'ef , ,:.- , -, , ' , , 22 81170kkitreet:;;!;-. , ;`-, : !:-` i',9/1780f802 SOuittio4d

:- .' ;;Ifishfield, N S lk2131% - ',' ";-p Bayswater VIC 3153 ; , .,;/. Bowen Hills, (lid 4006,, .. -, :, ; zi. Clindere:S k 5037

.5 TEL (02)..9107,7333/4;',,); -., ', ' ,JEL: (03) 9720,8777, -,. ' i, ' '.,; TEL (07)3252-8844,,;,,- ; , ,' , .-,,7EL (08) 83711443 .. f -

FAX. (02) 0092,- , ': ,;- :--, , FAX. ,(03)97200760 - e, - * '. FAX- (D7)3252 1407 '" FAX '108i Ole's/eau-M:1**0 corn au ':'1,' : *, :.,salesv,icgausteait31:ccirti:ail ' ' '' ' '. " ' ; '2 ' ' - ' '-' 8111 09Cil



document, created: 291May 2007

Representative Image Only

Catalogue Number: KTS 01141

Description: THERMOSTAT ALARM N/O

List Price: 8 Refer to our eCatalogue

Unit Of Measure: EA

Price Schedule: B2

All prices are exclusive of GST

Thermostats / Electronic

Brand: Stego Type: 1 N/O

Features

Alarm thermostat, N/O contact. Large setting range (10-60 Deg C). Small size. Simple to mount. High switching performance.

Benefits

Compact mechanical thermostat with graduated setting dial on front of unit.

0.2005 NHO. Nei



EDIEDEC RH Series Relays & Sockets

RH Series Compact Power Relays

SPDT through 4PDT, 10A contacts Compact power type relays

The RH series are miniature power relays with a large capacity. The RH relays feature

10A contact capacity as large as the RR series but in a miniature package. The compact

size saves space.

Contact

RC,

Model

Part Number Selection Pan Nuniber -

SPDT

DPDT

-Blade Terminal

I Basic RH1B-U RH1V2-U __

( With Indicator RH1B-UL - AC6V AC12V AC24V AC110y, AC120V,

With Check Button RH1B-UC AC220V AC240V DC6V, DC12V, DC24V,

RH1B-ULC DC48V DC110V

il With Indicator and Check Button -_... _ ..

%.* Top`Bracket Mounting RH1B-UT

With Diode (DC coil only) _ RH1B-UD .RH1V2U6. DC6V, DC12V, DC24V, DC48V, DC110y , . _

With Indicator and Diode (DC coil only)" - - DC12V, DC24V, DC48V, DC110V RH1 ...

Basic ,' . RH2B-U ' RH2V2--U <

F With Indicator . . RH2B-UL RH2V2,UL AC6V, AC12V, AC24V, AC110-120V,

-With Check Button ' , . RH2B-UC - . AC220-240V

DC48VDC100-110V - ..i. With Indicator and Check Button -,' - RH2B-UL . ,-2-11

DC6V, DC12V, DC24V,

Top Bracket Mounting - - --- RH2B-UT

Coil Vottege Code

(Standard StoCk:fri bold)

3PDT

With Diode (DC coil only) F_,` RH2B-UD

With Indicator and Diode IDC coilOnly) j RH2B-ULD

Basic RH3B-U

With Indicator RH3B-UL

[With Check Button- RH3B-UC

With Indicator and Check Button - RH3B-ULC

Top Bracket Mounting

With Diode IDC coil Only) .

With Indicator and Diode (DC coil only)

4PDT

` 4,4

RH3B-UT

RH3B-D"

RH3B-LD"

1-13V2-Ut

DC6V, DC12V, DC24V, DC48V, DC100-110V

AC6V, AC12V, AC24V, AC110y, AC120V,

AC220V, AC240V DC6V, DC12V, DC24V,

DC48V, DC110V

RH3V2-D*, DC6V, DC12V, DC24V, DC48V, DC110V

Basic , RH4B-U RH4V2-U -

With Indicator RH4B-UL RH4V2-UL

With Check Button- ' RH4B-UC

With Indicator and Check Button

Top Bracket Mounting -

With Diode (DC coil only) - '

With Indicator and Diode (DC coil-only) ' RH4B-LD`

carries no UL recognition mark.

2. PCB terminal relays are designed to mount directly to a circuit board without any socket.

RH4B-ULC

RH4B-UT

RH4B-UD RH4V2-UD

AC6V, AC12V, AC24V, AC110V, AC120V,

AC220V, AC240V DC6V, DC12V, DC24V, DC48V,

DC110V

DC6V, DC12V, DC24V, DC48V, DC110V

Ordering Information When ordering, specify the Part No. and coil voltage code:

(example) RH3B-U I AC120V

Part No. 1-Coil Voltage Code

726 www.idec.com



Relays & Sockets RH Series EDI DEC

Sockets (for Blade Terminal Models)

Belayi Steriderd,DIN Rail, Mount;':.. finger4afe 13114 Rail Milunt4 LThroirgli;Ren4Meiint PCB Minim;

SH18-62 RH1B SH18-05 SH18-05C I SH1B -51

4

[ R. 51-128-a5 SH28 05C " SH2B-51 SHZB -62 I: I I

RH3B SH3B-05 SH3B-05C 1 SH3B-51 SH3B-62

RH4B . SH4B-05 .SH48-05C ,

I SH4B- I , 51 4B- SH62 ...

- I

cf

iitici a.

.

Hold Down Springs & Clips

Appearance Deucriptran' Fin' DIN Mount Socket

For Through Panel t PCB Mount Slicker

. g Order

n*, "d" "'"er ""

Pullover Wire

Spring -,-,

,

RH1B __ _ _-_ RH2B

SY2S-02F1 2

___- -------- - SY4S-02F1 2.,

SY4S-51F1 10 RI-13B ISH3B-05F1 2

RH4B SH4B-02F1 2

Leaf Spring

(side latch) R H 18, RH26, RH38, RH4B SFA-202 ' SFA-302 3

20 0. . .

Leaf Sprtng '

.(top latch(' RH18, RH2B, RH3B, RH48 SFA-101 3 SFA-301 3

AC Coil Ratings

Coil Resistance (0)

:Voltage ,` AC 50Hil'P" 11% >1-1.7, AC 60Hz ±10% at 213°Q

(V)

6

12

24

110

110-120

120 86

220 4.7

220-240 - 240 4.9

-SPOT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT; SPDT DPDT 3PDT' 4PDT -SPDT DPOT 3PDT, 4PDT-

170 240 f 330

86 121 165 196

42 605 Br 98

96 181 216 84

1 387 150 200 280 330 330 9 4 64 1 5 4

75 1 100 140 165 165 39 3 _ -

70

155

83 83 153

182 182- - 8 0-9 2

16.4 19.5 7 5

8 10.7 4 1

4.7-5.4

165

253 21 2

103 845

2,200 1 800

16 5 10,800 7,360

1 - 1- 10,800 7,360 9.1

4.0-4.6 -- 71 8.3

DC Coil Ratings

Coil Resistance (0)

Voltage L Rated Current (nA)±15°A at 20°C II

t10% at ZO°C

(1.9 SPOT DPDT- 3PDT 4PDT- SPi3T, DPDT 3PDT 4PDT

18,820

al. DIN Rail mount

socket comes with two horseshoe

clips. Do not use

unless you plan to

insert pullover wire spring. Replacement

horseshoe clip part

number is Y778-011.

2. Most use horseshoe clip when mounting in DIN

mount socket. Replacement

horseshoe clip part number is

Y778-011.

3. Two required per relay.

'Operation Criaracieristics lagitiust rated values at 20°C)

-max -colimiubus ,Appliedyoltiige

,Pickup Voltage

" Dropout Voltage:

80% 30%

maximum minimum

6 128

12 64

24 32

48 18

100-110

110

150 240

75 120

369 60

18.5 -.30

12,100 9,120

Operafon Characteristics (against rated values at 20°C)

no 47

125 1

62 -750

2,660

40

160

650

2,600

388

1,550

7,340

8.2 -9.0 12,250

Max Continnous Pickup Applied Voltage Voltage

110% 80%

maximum

Droliont '

Voltage

10% minimum

Standard coil voltages

are in BOLD.

USA: 800-262-IDEC Canada: 888-317-IDEC 727



,General Use 1

DEC RH Series Relays & Sockets

rn

a.

ca

a>

c.)

Cr

TUV Ratings

Contact Ratings

Model

SPDT

Continuous Current

10A

.:Maximum Contact Capacity -

411Owidile!ceiitaiiPoiver °

ResistiVe

Load

1540VA

300W

InduCtive

Load-

990VA

210W

DPDT 1650VA ' 1100VA -

3POT 10A 300W '- 225W

4PDT

Note

Fated,Lead.-

,Voltage Res - Ind

(V) - Load Load

110 AC I 10A I 7A

30 DC I 10A

110 AC I, 10A

220 AC 75A

7A

Inductive load for the rated load - cos o = 0.3, L/0 = 7 ms

Voltage

240V AC

391/. DC

10A

10A

10A 7 5A

10k

RH4

AC cos o = 1 0 DC UR = 0 ms

Socket Specifications

SO Cieeti?-

E 67.

DIN Rail Monnt- SOciets -

'finier;Safe 'DIN Bill"

Through t: Panel Mount Socket

PCB Mount .Secket,

SH1B-05 -

SH2B-05

SH3B-05

SH4B-05

- ^

SH1a=05C

SH2B-05C

SH3B-05C

SH4B 05C

SH1B:51

SH2B:51

SH3B-51

SH4B-51

SH1B-62

1-

UL Ratings

Horie PM,ver Rating

'''''5'9u 11111 RH3 ' RH4 "1 : RH3 [ RH4 RH2 1 RH2 -- tlhl - ,.;

RH2

RH3 RH4.1

1/3 HP [1/3 HP - .:1/6 HP 1/6 HP

240V AC 10A 7.5A I 7 5A 1 7A I 6.5A 1 5A

:i 0.yAc : I, 10A. .I :10A 7.5A: I 7,54.k.:

30V DC 10A 10A 7A - - 28V,DC 10A

CSA Ratings

Voltage; .

240V AC

120V AC

30V DC

Resistive General Use

RH1' TiTri7R-17135--FRH4 RH1 RH2 RH3 ;RH4 RH1 2, 3 .1

10A I 10A - 7.5A 7A 7A 7A I 5A 1/3 HP

10A: I '1 OA I 10A 7:5A

Florae.,

Power -flitting;

" 1 /6-1P

10A 10A I 10A 10A 2A I 7.5A -

Terminal INire Size,

(CoillM3 screws ' _ s. - -

150V, 10A (contact) M3 5 screws with captive wire clamp * 1 L

M3 5 screws with captive wire clamp

(cod) M3 'screws

(COntaet) M35`screWs with captive wire clamp, fingerSsa'f

M3 5 screws with captive wire clamp, fingersafe

Solder

i

PCB mount

SH2B;62 1

-SH3B-62'' PCB Mount

SH4B-62 -

300V 10A

250V, 10A

300V, 10A

250V, 10A

300V;10A

- inlbs Maximum up to 241 '2AWO

5 5

i 9 - 11 5 inelbs

Maximum up to 2-412AWG

MaxibitIm up to

9 - 11 5 mlbs

5-- 9 in'ilbss 9'111 5 inlbs--

Maximum up to 2-412AWG 19 -11 5 in lbs

Accessories

[Description

Aluminum

DIN Rail

11 meter length)

DIN Rail End

Stop

Appearince Use with

All DIN rail sockets -

DIN rail

[Part No

BNDN1000

BNL5

Remarks'

IDEC offers a low-prbfile DIN rail (BNDN1000){ The BNDN1000 is de- -.,

signed to accommodate DIN mount sockets Made of durable extruded

aluminum, the BNDN1000 measures ti 413116 5rrirri) in height and 1 37 -

(35mm) in width WIN standard) Standard length is 39" (1,000mm)

91 mm wide- -

Replacement Hold -Down-

Spring Anchor,

DIN mount sockets and hold

down springs - Y778-011

For use on DIN rail mount socket when using pullover wire hold &min

. spring 2 pieces included with each socket

728 www.idec.com



Relays & Sockets RH Series DIDEC

Specifications

Contact Material Silver cadmium oxide

Contact Resistance' 50m0 maximum

I MiniiiiMmAppliCable Load' 24VDC, 30 MA. 5V DC, 100 rnA (reference value)

Operate Time I

SPDT

DPDT 20ms maximum

3PDT.".

4PDT 25ms maximum

Release Time 2

SPDT

DPDT 20ms maximum

... . .

3PDT .

4PDT

.

25ms maximum '

Power Consumption (approx.)

SPDT AC: 1.1VA (50Hz), 1VA (60Hz) DC: 0.8W

DPDT AC: .114VA (50Hz); 1.2VA (60Hz) DC: 09W

3PDT AC: 2VA (50Hz), 1.7VA (60Hz) DC: 1.5W

1'4P.DT.... : AC:,2.5VA160Hzi, 2VA (60HZ):. DC 1 5W . .,, _........___ Insulation Resistance

........ 100M0 minimum (500V DC meggei)

Dielectric Strength I

.. ...

:SPDT:.. - ... '

Between live and dead parts: :.2,000V.AC, 1 minute :.

Between contact and coil: : 1 2,000V AC;1.MinOte '

Betweeiicoeitacts of the same pole: 1,000v AC:1 minute

DPDT

3PDT

4PDT

Between live and dead parts: 2,000V AC, 1 minute

Between contact and coil: 2,000V AC, 1 minute

Between contacts of different poles: 2,000V AC, 1 minute

Between contacts of the same pole: 1,000V AC, 1 minute

Operating Frequency Electrical.: 1;800 operations /hour maximum

Mechanical 18,600 operations /hour maximum

Vibration Resistance Damage limits: 10 to 55Hz, amplitude 0.5 mm

Operating extremes: 10 to 55Hz. amplitude 0.5 mm

Shock Resistance ..Damage.limifs: .. .1;o00m/s2.. (100G) 7...."-

: - i. . .... . .

-SPOT, .

,Opeipting extremes: 200m/s2. (206 - SPOT, DPOT) .. ., ... . :..: ,

100ni/s7.110G -.3POT.APDT)

Mechanical Life

Electrical Life

DPDT

50,000,000 operations minimum

500,000 operations minimum (120V AC, 10A)

f:.SPDT

:3PDT ..: 4PDT .

,200,000 operations minimum )120V AC, 10A)

. . ' Operating Temperature'

SPDT -25 to +50°C (no freezing)

DPDT

3PDT

4PDT

-

-25 to +40 °C (no freezing)

Operating Humidity 45 to 85% RH (no condensation) - yypigntpppr9.)

,- . .. ... . .. ... .

SPOT: 24g OPDT.:37g.3f0T:51.1g,4POT' 74

Note: Above values are initial values.

1. Measured using 5V DC, 1A voltage drop method

2. Measured at the rated voltage (at 20°C), excluding contact bouncing

Release time of relays with diode: 40 ms maximum

3. Relays with indicator or diode: 1000V AC, 1 minute 4. For use under different temperature conditions, refer to Continuous Load Current vs. Operating Temperature Curve. The operating

temperature range of relays with indicator or diode is -25 to +40°C.

a




Di EC RH Series Relays & Sockets

Electrical Life Curves

AC Load

loon

ea

OJ

at E F-

(RH1) 500

0

a

§ 100

50 LI

20

10

(RH2) woo

500

.4

a

100

50

20

10

(RH3/RH4)1

20

120V AC resistive

240V AC inductive, 120V AC inductive

Characteristics (Reference Data)

\240V AC resistive

A A 4 A A + 8 A

Load Current (A)

120V AC resistive

240V AC inductive 240V AC resistive 120VAC inductive

i A 4 A A 7 8 61 Load Current (A)

120V AC resistive

240V AC inductive \240V AC resistive

120V AC inductive

2 3 4 5 6 4 . i i 10

Load Current (A)

Maximum Switching Capacity

(RH1) 10.0_

5

AC resistiii

AC inductive

DC resistive

DC inductive

5 i0 SO 100 I i 1,1,1 1 .011.11.1

Load Voltage (V)

DC Load

30V DC resistive

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1

Load Current (A)

(RH2),000

500

Ra

30V DC resistive

10

(RH3/RH4) 1000

100y DC resistive 30V DC IrMUctive

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1

Load Current (A)

30V DC resistive

30V DC inductive

20 100V DC resistive.

\100V DC Inductive

10 2 A 4 A A 7 8 9 10

Load Current (A)

DC inductive

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

to so 100 20o x Load Voltage (V)

730 www.idec.com



Relays &Sockets RH Series .DEC

Continuous Load Current vs. Operating Temperature Curve (Basic Type, With Check Button, and Top Bracket Mounting Type)

(RH1) 100

90

Eig

5 70

a 60 ; 2 40

0 30

O zo

In

Note: The rated voltage is applied to the coil.

DC Coil

AC Col

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

(RH2) 100

90

:(3. 60

e 70

0 60

50

2' 4°

3° O 20

10

0

Note: The rated voltage is applied to the coil.

DC Coil

AC Cdl

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Load Current (A) Load Current (A)

Internal Connection (View from Bottom) Basic Type

SPDT DPDT 3PDT

(RH3/RH4) Note: The rated voltage is applied to the coil. 100

90

80

5 70

9 60

5° EP 40

. 3° 0 20

10

0

AC/DC Coil

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Load Current (A)

4PDT With Check Button

1004 (-)

______ t -n . i'''. 9 1 9 12 .

I L_134_1 _

6 941 113(-) (,)14 J

9 10 11 12

Front Pushbutton

/fir' ' Contacts can be operated by pressing the

13(-) (*)14 j check button.

With Indicator ( -L type)

SPDT 3PDT 4PDT DPDT

...-1> ...-> -1> 5

12 Below

10 11 1

.1 24V

Below

100V

AC/DC i

13 14 (-I 01

.

1

5

' I

13(-) (t):14

I When the relay is energized,

1 the indicator goes on.

1 Relay coils less thane 00V

I DC do not contain a otec-

tion diode (except DPDTL

, Relay coils below 100V

.. AC/DC ago

L_ -aikP- lm

. .

- - - -- - _

[ z

' 5 6 7

I

I 24V 9 10 11 12

I AC/DC I

100V

AC/DC I

and over I

11111111511

D , D = 8 9 10 12

1

5

**4.

I use LED indicator, coils

above 100V use neon lamp 12

indicator.

71114 and over

i

'

111(-) (a)l 4 i

M I @ i

With Diode (-D type)

SPDT 3PDT 4PDT

4 EEF EE?

1 Contains a diode to absorb the back emf

I generated when the coil is de-energized. The

13(-) (+)14

8 5 6

13(-) Diode Characteristics

coil only.

release time is slightly longer. Available for DC

10 12 9 10 11 12

Reverse withstand voltage: 1.000V

Forward current: 1A

O

0

=.1 3

3




DEC RH Series Relays & Sockets

a) to to ty

.43

With Indicator LED & Diode (-LD type)

Below 100V DC

100V DC

and over

SPDT

5

3PDT 4PDT

1)7 9 10

DPDT

Below

24V

AC/DC

24V

AC/DC

and over

Contains an LED indicator and

a surge absorber, and has the

same height as the basic type.

Dimensions (mm)

RH1B-U/RH1B-UL/RH1B-UD/RH1B-ULD RH2B-U/RH2B-UL/RH2B-UD/RH2B-ULD RH3B-U/RH3B-UL/RH3B-D/RH3B-LD

Told length from panel surlace including relay socket SH18.05: 61.5 (63.5) max., SH1151: 39.6 (41.6) max.

Dimensions in the ( )

include a hold-down spring.

14 _.,.

Total length from panel surface including relay socket Sli2B-05: 61.5 (63.5) max., SH2B-51: 39.6 (41.6) max.



35.6 max. 6.4

RH4B-U/RH4B-UL/RH4B-UD/RH4B-LD RH1B-UT

Told length from panel sun ace including relay socket SH48-05: 61.5 (63.5) max.. SH48-51. 39.6 (41.6) max.

RH3B-UT



-r -r -r

41

21

RH4B-UT

Total length from panel surface including relay socket

SH3B-05: 61.5 (63.5) max SH3B-51: 39.6 (41.6) max.



RH2B-UT

31

732 www.idec.com



Relays & Sockets RH Series ED DEC

RH1V2-U/RH1V2-UD

55

111

RH3V2-U/RH3V2-UL/RH3V2-D

Dimensions con't (mm)

3-02.4 holes

Standard DIN Rail Mount Sockets

SH1B-05

1.43 5 TOIIIIi1101

31.5

RH2V2-U/RH2V2-UL/RH2V2-UD

21

RH4V2-U/RH4V2-UL/RH4V2-UD

13-o2. Wes

SH2B-05

31.5

SH3B-05

32

M3.5 Tenrinal

(For terminals 1. 5. and 9)

31.5

DIN RI (BNDN)

2.04.2 Mounting Holes (or M4 Tapped Holes)

-0

(For terminals 13 and 14)

1 36 1

4.4 mar. 4 5.5 min.

7.911101. 03.9 *10.

Terminal Arrangement

:41 -11)

T

jeliter (Top Mew)

31.5

Terminal AnangemeM

131,

r,-9 ì

a).

(Top View)

DIN Flab

(BNDN) Terminal Arrangement

2-04.2 Mounting H o h m I - .---.0 .. 7 (or M4 Tapped Holes) 1 T T Ti\ i------. . --.

4.4.0.0. i 1 L. 5.5 min. l4ii IA' F.7

7 ......

114.51 7.9 max.

t I 1 (Top Yew)

CO

,S7* ,-, jJ

ID

IC

10

a ID




E0 DEC RH Series Relays & Sockets

Yt

..=

E

Finger-safe DIN Rail Mount Sockets

SH1B-05C

30

SH3B-05C

32 1.43.5 Terminal 36

-a-ii-ra7,Screw

05 Imo

27.r1

1M111

18.7

.14

cannot be used. Ring terminals

- - -0

2.4.2 Mounting Holes (or M4 Tapped Holes)

2-04.21140001109 Helen

ior P00 100004 1101001

'8 I -r

Ring terminals cannol be used.

Through Panel Mount Socket

SH1 B-51

SH3B-51


11

3 I

I I

gig LJ (Bottom View)


i- 6 021 F9. i j (Bottom View)



I. 131

I -8 C

IZDtlr

(Top View)


ci

(Top View)

(N-1). 12.4)

5.

N: No. 01 sockets mounted

10.4 min. when using hold-down springs

1.138 (14-1) 30.41;

N: No. 01 $ecksts mounted

10.4 min. when using hold-clown springs

SH2B-05C

22 -11 M3.5 Terminal

SH4B-05C

36

25

30

DIN Rail (BNDN)

SH2B-51

Panel Thickness:

2.4.2 Mounling Holes lor M4 Tapped Hal)

Ring terminals cannot be used.

DIN Rae ,(BNON)

2-04.2 Mounting Holes (or M4 Tapped Holes)

- - - 48 ..1

Ring terminals cannol be used.



TO

(Top View)


Bt- I

iS 1 1 1r' : 1) _ 1

(Top View)

21.2

SH4B-51

3.5

39.2

(Bottom View)

Terminal Arrenge

0 Mrt

I

iaIJWri M

(Bottom View)

10.4 min. when using hold-down springs

1,[45 (N-1). 39.4) ti

10.4 min. when ming hold-down springs

734 www.idec.com



Relays & Sockets RH Series 13)} DEC

PCB Mount Sockets

SH1B-62

SH3B-62

Terminal Arrangement 3,32.4 Mies 6.8

FL-1 i Li r; (Bottom View) *Nt e*

i 43- \ 2.02110188


I 18 nen.

. 0.4

c7;

36 nem when using hold-down seems


" ..9i

(Bott.T.r.Tiew)

0 (Toieranee 110.1)

SH2B-62

SH4B-62

Terminal ArrangerneM

Fa- Ei I

,

I

n F... ,

.1Q_ El: (Bottom View)

2.85 21.5 min.

34 min. when using hold-down springs

Terminal Arrangement 885 05 min E El a 1

FENT 7; iiTht;Ii

(8on., view) 3

36 mln. when using hold-down smings

(704eranne 00.1) 36 min. when using hold-down springs

+ 411

: 8-02.4110185

4P1 (Tolerance ±0.1)

t t + +

1+02+ mem

+ + + (Tam.. 00.1)

9 01




al DEC Operating Instructions Relays & Sockets

ci

10

Operating Instructions

Protection for Relay Contacts

1. The contact ratings show maximum values. Make sure that these values are

not exceeded. When an inrush current flows through the load, the contact

may become welded. If this is the case, connect a contact protection circuit,

such as a current limiting resistor.

2. Contact protection circuit: When switching an inductive load, arcing causes carbides to form on the

contacts, resulting in increased contact resistance. In consideration of contact

reliability, contact life, and noise suppression, use of a surge absorbing circuit is recommended. Note that the release time of the load becomes slightly longer. Check the operation using the actual load. Incorrect use of a contact

protection circuit will adversely affect switching characteristics. Four typical

examples of contact protection circuits are shown in the following table:

Driving Circuit for Relays

1. To ensure correct relay operation, apply rated voltage to the relay coil.

2. Input voltage for the DC coil:

A complete DC voltage is best for the coil power to make sure of stable relay

operation. When using a power supply containing a ripple voltage, suppress

the ripple factor within 5%, When power is supplied through a rectification

circuit, the relay operating characteristics, such as pickup voltage and dropout

voltage, depend on the ripple factor. Connect a smoothing capacitor for better

operating characteristics as shown below.

a Relay

Pulsation

Ripple Factor (%) Erntrno-.Enrnin x 100%

Emax = Maximum of pulsating current Ernie = Minimum of pulsating current Emean= DC mean value

3. Leakage current while relay is off:

When driving an element at the same time as the relay operation, special

consideration is needed for the circuit design. As shown in the incorrect

circuit below, leakage current (lo) flows through the relay coil while the relay

is off. Leakage current causes coil release failure or adversely affects the

vibration resistance and shock resistance. Design a circuit as shown in the

correct example.

Incorrect Correct

4. Surge suppression for transistor driving circuits:

When the relay coil is turned off, a high-voltage pulse is generated, causing a

transistor to deteriorate and sometimes to break. Be sure to connect a diode

to suppress the back electromotive force. Then, the coil release time becomes

slightly longer. To shorten the coil release time, connect a Zener diode

between the collector and emitter of the transistor. Select a Zener diode with

a Zener voltage slightly higher than the power voltage.

Back emf suppressing diode

Relay

I This protection circuit can be used when the load

impedance is smaller than the RC impedance in an

AC load power circuit.

R: Resistor of approximately the same resistance

value as the load

I C:0.1 to 1 pF

I This protection circuit can be used for both AC and

DC load power circuits.

R: Resistor of approximately the same resistance

value as the load

C: 0.1 to 1 pF

This protection circuit can be used for DC load power

circuits. Use a diode with the following ratings.

Reverse withstand voltage: Power voltage of the

load circuit x 10

Forward current: More than the load current

This protection circuit can be used for both AC and

DC load power circuits.

For a best result, when using a power voltage of 24

to 48V AC/DC. connect a varistor across the load.

When using a power voltage of 100 to 240V AC/DC.

connect a varistor across the contacts.

3. Do not use a contact protection circuit as shown below:

This protection circuit is very effective in arc suppression when

opening the contacts. But, the capacitor is charged while the

contacts are opened. When the contacts are closed, the capacitor

is discharged through the contacts, increasing the possibility of

contact welding.

This protection circuit is very effective in arc suppression when

opening the contacts. But, when the contacts are closed, a current Power

flows to charge the capacitor, causing contact welding.

Generally, switching a DC inductive load is more difficult than switching a DC

resistive load. Using an appropriate arc suppressor, however, will improve the

switching characteristics of a DC inductive load.

Soldering

1. When soldering the relay terminals, use a soldering iron of 30 to 60W, and

quickly complete soldering (within approximately 3 seconds).

2. Use a non-corrosive rosin flux.

774 www.idec.com



Relays & Sockets Operating Instructions Di DEC

Operating Instructions con't

Other Precautions

1. General notice:

To maintain the initial characteristics, do not drop or shock the relay.

The relay cover cannot be removed from the base during normal operation. To

maintain the initial characteristics, do not remove the relay cover.

Use the relay in environments free from condensation, dust, sulfur dioxide

(SO2), and hydrogen sulfide (FI,S.

Make sure that the coil voltage does not exceed applicable coil voltage range.

2. UL and CSA ratings may differ from product rated values determined by !DEC.

3. Do not use relays in the vicinity of strong magnetic field, as this may affect relay operation.

Safety Precautions

Turn off the power to the relay before starting installation, removal, wiring,

maintenance, and inspection of the relays. Failure to turn power off may

cause electrical shock or fire hazard.

Observe specifications and rated values, otherwise electrical shock or fire

hazard may be caused.

Use wires of the proper size to meet voltage and current requirements. Tight-

en the terminal screws on the relay socket to the proper tightening torque.

Surge absorbing elements on AC relays with RC or DC relays with diode are

provided to absorb the back electromotive force generated by the coil. When

the relay is subject to an excessive external surge voltage, the surge absorb-

ing element may be damaged. Add another surge absorbing provision to the

relay to prevent damage.

Precautions for the RU Relays

Before operating the latching lever of the RU relay, turn off the power to

the RU relay. After checking the circuit, return the latching lever to the

original position.

Do not use the latching lever as a switch. The durability of the latching lever

is a minimum of 100 operations.

When using DC loads on 4PDT relays, apply a positive voltage to terminals of

neighboring poles and a negative voltage to the other terminals of neighbor-

ing poles to prevent the possibility of short circuits.

DC relays with a diode have a polarity in the coil terminals. Apply the DC volt-

age to the correct terminals.

a

3




225mm

Wefer Catalogue-SD5

Dimensions (mm)

Planning example for panel (hole distances) preferred Drill alternate

1 3 2

- 032

J 22 5

No notch alternate

X

>-

Panel thickness range 1...6 mm Maximum panel thickness reduced when optional legend plate holders are used

Front element Legend plate carrier used X

Pushbutton Any 30 50

Mushroom operators 40 mm Any 40 50

Mushroom operators 60 mm Any 60 60

Selector jog Any 48 50

Any 60 mm diameter 60 60

Any 90 mm diameter 90 90

Standard momentary pushbutton Illuminated momentary pushbutton flush (eg. D5P-F1)

Standard momentary pushbutton guarded (eg. D5P-G1)

Standard maintained pushbutton flush (eg. D5P-FA1)

flush (eg. D5P-LF3)

Standard and illuminated momentary pushbutton extended

(eg. D5P-E1 & D5P-LE3)

Illuminated momentary pushbutton Standard reset operator guarded (eg. D5S-LG3) (eg. D5P-R607W with D5-ATR...)

14.5 min. 34

Illuminated maintained pushbutton Pilot light flush (eg. D5P-LFA3)

max. 159

standard (eg. D5P-P3)



Refer Catalogue SD5

Control and indicating units D5

General technical information

Front elements Degree of protection according to IEC 529, DIN 40 050 Pushbuttons, Mushroom operators, Selector switch operators Potentiometer operator Multi-function operators without sealing cap

Multi-function operators with sealing cap

Joy sticks and wobble sticks

Mechanical design life Pushbuttons Momentary mushroom operators, Selector jog, Selector switches Special mushroom operators Multi-function operators Joysticks

Vibration (assembled to panel) Frequencies 10...2000 Hz

Displacement 1.52 mm (peak-peak)

Shock 1/2 sine wave (no damage)

Temperature range Storage Operating

Humidity

Plastic operators (D5P/S)

IP 66 (NEMA Type 4/4X/13) IP 65 IP 40 IP 66 IP 66

10 000 000 Cycles

500 000 Cycles 100 000 Cycles 3 000 000 Cycles

max. 10 G

100G, 11rns

-25 °C...+55 °C max. 70 °C/24h -25 °C...+55 °C

50 %...95 °A) RH from 25 °C...60 °C

Metal operators (D5M/B)

all IP 66 (NEMA Type 4/13)

10 000 000 Cycles

500 000 Cycles 100 000 Cycles 3 000 000 Cycles 100 000 Cycles (in each direction)

max. 10 G

100G, 11 ms

-25 °C...+55 °C max. 70 °C/24h -25 °C...+55 °C

50 %...95 % RH from 25 °C...60 °C

Back of panel components 3-Across style 3-Across style Standard contact block ratings NEMA A600,Q600 Shock

600 V AC 1/2 sine wave (no damage) 100G, 11 ms

AC 15, DC 13 to IEC 947-5 Contact block

Low Voltage contact mechanical design 5 000 000 Cycles

block ratings 17...24 VUC, 5 mA Temperature range

Thermal current 10 A max. continuous current Storage -25 °C...+55 °C max. 70 °C/24h

without enclosure (40 °C) Operating -5 °C...+55 °C

6 A with enclosure (60 °C) Humidity 40 °C / 95 % RH /56 days

Insulation category Group C , 500 V to VDE 0110 23 °C, 83 % / 40 °C, 93 % 20 cycles

600 V UL, CSA Approvals UL Listed / CSA Certified

Terminal marking

Terminals

Conforming to CENELEC EN 50013

0.75...2.5 mm' Min. 1 x #18...12 AWG Max. 2 x #14 AWG or 1 x #12AWG

SEV, CEBEC, DEMKO, NEMKO, SEMKO, Seti, Germanischer Lloyd, Bureau Veritas, Maritime Register of shipping, Lloyds register of shipping

Short circuit protection 10 A slow (DT,gl)

Standard conformity IEC 204-1, 337;SEV 1005, 1093;

Electrical shock protection IP 2X (touch protection) VDE 0113, 0660 part 201; BS 4794; CEE 24; UL 486E

Vibration (assembled to panel) Frequencies 10...2000 Hz Displacement 1.52 mm (peak-peak) max. 10 G max. 6 h



0 0 0 .; ..,-,,,

,,,' ,,= , . e -3 -

0

1061

1131

16

110

Individual part Cat. No.

116

1151

Individual part

0 Individual parts

Cat. No.

1141

colour

caps ) Red

Green

Yellow ,05-ALF5

12. Lamp elements

with diode and

resistor 230/240 V AC

D5-3P0

Blue

Clear

b5-ALF5

7-,D5-ALF7

Diffuser blank D5.AD2,- -

Legend diffuser

13 Lamp elements with central

lamp test

with diode and

resistor 230/240 V AC

D5-3DDO ', ,

'D5:3R667,..;`:

Clear plastic front ring

(for flush illuminated

operators)

65-ALB1'-

Guarded plastic front ring

(for guarded illuminated

operators)

' D5-ALG1

14] Transformer block

50/60 Hz for mounting

on lamp elements

Primary Secondary

110...240V 6V 1.2 VA 65-3TS5

220...240 V 6 V 1.2 VA

Flush illuminated plastic

operator - Standard

380...415 V 6V 1.2 VA - I

440...480 V 6V 1.2 VA

Latched ..D5F-LFA9' 220...240 V 24 V 1.2 VA ;D513THS7

Flush illuminated plastic

operator with metal front

ring - Standard _ D5S-LF9

Latched D5S-LFA9

115 Transformer 50/60 Hz

with BA9s lamp holder

Primary Secondary

110...120V 6V 1.2 VA D5J3T5.

101 Coupling plate :D5-A3L - 220...240 V 6 V 1.2 VA D5-3T7 :

Contact blocks - 1 N/O (Green) .D5=3X10

220...240 V 24 V 1.2 VA 'D5-3TH7

400V 24V 1.2 VA

1 N/C (Red) D5-3X01 ---- 1 N/O E.M. D5-3k1OE

16 Incandescent lamps

1.2W 6, 12, 24, 36, 48, 60 V

1 N/C L.B. D5-3X01L 2W 12, 24, 36, 48, 60 V

Notes: The D5 pushbutton series is also available with metal body D5M-... ') Additional legend colour caps.

2.4 W (long life)

2.6 W

1161 Neon lamps

110 V...127 V clear

220 V...240 V clear

`;65-3TH10'

BA9S-13..-.V=1 2W

BA9S-13.:.V:-2W

SA9S-13130V:24W1

BA9S-131301-2:0W5

1 BA9S-CN3-11-0V '

EiA9S-CN3-2400



22.5mm

Refer Catalogue'SD5

Contact blocks (colour coded)

D5-3X D5-3BX for front mounting for base mounting

O Front or base mounting O Small overall depth O Simple snap-on contacts O Easy to wire O Self-cleaning contacts O N/O - Green O N/C - Red

O Low voltage - Blue

Versions Technical information, continued

Front mounting Rated operating current /e

-01 -10 -L01 -E10

. 1 . 2 . 3 . 4 . 5 . 6 . 7 . 8

Snap-on on latch

2 contact levels

up to 3 contact blocks per contact level

Base mounting

-01 -10 -L01 -E10

. 1 .2 .3 4 .5 6 .7 .8

Snap onto the inside of the enclosure base or onto a hat rail,

or secure with two screwed fixing straps

3 contact blocks in one contact level possible

Possibilities to combine (Front mounting)

There are maximum 6 contact blocks to be combined

Technical information

Rated thermal current /th without enclosure (ambient 40 °C) with enclosure (ambient 60 °C)

10 A 6A

Rated operating voltage Ue 690 V AC

24 V 48 V 110 V 220 V 230/240 V

AC-1 AC-15 8A 8A 6 A

10 A 3A

10 A 3A

380 V 400 V 415 V 500 V 690 V

AC-1 AC-15 2.5A 2A 2.2A 1.5A 0.75A

Rated operating current /e continued

DC-13 24 V 48V 110V 125V 220 V

-01, -10 -01, -E10

3 A 1.3 A

1.5 A

0.4 A 0.2 A

0.13 A 0.6 A

0.13 A 0.1 A

65 mA

DC-13 250 V 400 V 440 V 500 V 600 V

-01, -10 -01, -E10

0.3 A 65 mA

0.2 A 26 mA

0.04 A 26 mA

0.15 A 0.13 A

Short-circuit withstand without welding

Switching rate

Fuse rating permissible rated current

Electrical life

fast (D, gF) slow (DT, gG)

10 A slow (DT, gG)

6000 operations/hour

16A 10A

AC-11 0.1A 1A 2A 3A

millions of operations 10 3 1 0.5

Contact duty

Contact travel D5-...

800 E-...

-3X10 -3BX10 -36X01

-3X01

electronic circuit (H-type- bridges)

positive opening for: D5-3X01 D5-3BX01

-3X01L

3.3 5.7 1.05 5.7 3.1 5.7 111 IP 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4

1...1=1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

mm MIT -I. 10/11

3BX01L -3X10E -3BX10E

3.1 5.7 1.1 5.7 1.1 5.7

11111 FRIPPIR FIRER! 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

TM mm -Ow in preparation

Terminal marking

Terminals

TT

O open

closed

according to DIN EN 50 013

0.75 ..2.5 mm2 18...12 AWG



Refer Catalogue SD5

Lamp elements

D5 -3D0, D5-3R

D5-3DBO, D5-3RB

D5-3DDO D5-3RDD

Versions

D5-3D0, D5-3R... D5-3DBO, D5-3RB...

X1 X2 X1 --141I-11 X2

Standard element Operating voltage max. 250 V

D5-3DDO

X1

X5

X2

With central lamp test Operating voltage max. 250 V

With series diode and resistor 220 V AC or 240 V AC supply. Use incandescent lamp 130 V / 2.4 W

D5-3RDD...

X1

X5 X2

With central lamp test With series diode and resistor 220 V AC or 240 V AC supply. Use incandescent lamp 130 V / 2.4 W


Lamp socket BA 9s

Lamp ratings max. 2 W (2.6 W for Pilot lights)

Terminal marking according to DIN EN 50 013

Terminals 0.75...2.5 mmz

O Front or base mounting

O Small overall depth

O Easy to wire

O Self-cleaning contacts

Possibilities to combine

D5-3D0, D5-3R are to be combined with maximum 4 contact blocks or 2 contact blocks and one transformer.

D5-3DD0, D5-3RDD... are to be combined with maximum 2 contact blocks

Central lamp test

Li

S1 K1 K2 K3

Hi Qi

L X5

X1

Transformers

D5-3TS...

X1 111m.9 X2

D5-3T... (without clear lamp)

X1 "Imi X2


Performance

Terminal marking

Terminals

Lamp socket

max. 1.2 VA, 50 / 60 Hz

according to DIN EN 50 013

0.75...2.5 mm2

BA 9s

Variants

Primary voltage [V] Secondary voltage [V] 110...120 6

220...240 6

380...415 6

440...480 6

220...240 24

Possibilities to combine

Transformers D5-3TS... may be combined with one lamp holder D5-3D0 or D5-3R.. and maximum 2 contact blocks. Transformers D5-3T... can't be combined.



A MEM

E E

88 mm

63 mm

45 mm

0001110110,00000000

144 mm

Detailed specifications for ERICO's TRANSIENT DISCRIMINATING FILTER, TDF-10A SERIES

Applications 'itning transients and surges are a major cause of expensive electronic ipment failure and business disruption. Damage may result in loss of

;omputers, data commmunications, loss of revenue, and loss of profits. the new Transient Discriminating FilterTM family of TVSS devices offer ;conomical and reliable protection from power transients with the conven- ence of easy installation on 35mm DIN rail mountings.

the TDF series has been specifically designed for process control applica- ions to protect the switched mode power supply units on devices such as 'LC controllers, SCADA systems and motor controllers. Units are avail- ible for 3A, 10A and 20A loads and in a range of clamping voltages ncluding 30V, 150V, 275V. The range is intended for use in conjunction with ERICO's Universal Transient Barrier UTB's to provide a coordinated approach to protection of both the power and data control circuits.

the TDF is a series connected single phase surge filter providing an aggregate surge capacity of 50kA (8/201.1s) - 201cA L-N & L-G and 101cA

1-G. The space efficient low pass filter, provides some 65dB of attenua- ion to voltage transients. Not only does this reduce the residual let hrough voltage, but it helps further reduce the steep rates of rise of voltage and current providing superior protection for sensitive electronic ;quipment.

Features Compact design fits into most distribution boards and motor control centres

High efficiency filtering - ideal for the protection of switched mode power supplies from large dv/dt and di/dt transients

Three modes of protection L-N, L-G, N-G

35mm DIN rail mount - DIN 43 880 profile matches common MCB's

LED indication and opto-isolated output for remote status monitoring

Transient Discriminating Technology ensures safe operation during abnormal over-voltage events

UL1449 Edition 2 recognized

Large 501cA surge capacity provides a

high level of protection and long operational life

5 year limited warranty

CO®



PROCESS CONTROL TVSS PROTECTION

SPECIFICATIONS Operation: Models available

Nominal line voltage Max Continuous Operating Voltage MCOV

Max Load Current Input frequency

Earth leakage current Protection:

Max aggregate surge rating Protection modes

Max surge current/mode L-N L-G N-G

SPD circuit description

+,=1141INNIcill

r.? ,4 e 1 to 3 ?it 93 4i:::: 4.:62s,?:

-LALE:1111_,._

TDF- 1OA -240V

rx ER11:17 six. at ON62

t Filter:

Inductor Capacitor type

Attenuation @100kHz L-N Performance:

UL1449 SVR L-N ANSUIEEE C62.41 Cat B3 - 500A ringwave

Cat Cl - 3kA, 8/20us Alarms and Indicators:

Protection status indication Physical Data:

Dimensions(W x D x H) Weight

Enclosure material Connection means

Wire size Mounting method

Enclosure style Environmental rating

Opearting temperature Humidity

Surface finish Warranty

Test standards: Approvals Frequency performance of TDF-10A fitter

Surge rated to meet

TDF-10A-I 20V 120VAC/125VDC 170Vrms 10A 50/60Hz <0.2mA

TDF-10A-240V 240VAC 340Vrrns

50kA 8/20us L-N, L-G and N-G 20kA 8/20us 20kA 8/2011s

10kA 8/20p Series low pass LC filter Transient Discriminating Technology Thermal fusing

Ferrite cored X & Y grade interference suppression polypropylene film 65dB

500V 22V 262V

700V 28V 481V

Red LED, On = OK. Opto-isolated output

144mm x 88mm x x7Omm 750g (approx) Flame Retardant UL94V -O Screw terminals 1.0mm2 - 6.0mm2 DIN T35 Rail DIN 43880 IP20 -30°C to +55°C 0-90% Spark eroded finish 5 years

UL1449 Ed 2, UL1283 recognised, CSA22.2 C-Tick AS3260 ANSUIEEE C62.41 Cat A, Cat B, Cat C AS/NZS 1768-1991 Cat A, B, C

Due to a policy of continual product development, specifications are subject to change without notice. © Copyright 1999

Part Number Description TDF-10A-120V 120V 1 phase, 50kA 8/20p.s, 10A series TVSS protector TDF-10A-240V 240V 1 phase, 50kA 8/20ps, 10A series TVSS protector

Hobart

Sydney Melbourne

Canberra

ph:+61 3 6237-3200 ph:+61 2 9479-8500

ph:+61 3 9894-2677 ph:+61 2 6257-3055

tatc+61 3 6273-0399

fatc+61 2 9980-5092

fax+61 3 9894-3216 fax+61 2 6257-3127

Adelaide p:+61 8 8366-6555 Perth ph:+61 8 9358-1233

Singapore ph:* 65-763-2477

Thailand pir+ 662 627-9037-8

fax:+61 8 8366-6556 fax:.61 8 9358-1404 fax:* 65 763-2397 fax:+662 627-9168

ERICEI° ERICO's coordinated approach to facility protection - CADWELD, CRITEC, ERITECH www.erico.com



v.

00000000

72 mm

E E 0 r-

88 mm

63 mm

45 mm

I I

-

Detailed Specifications for ERICO's TDS-DINLINE SURGE DIVERTER TDS180-4S

Applications Lightning transients and surges are a major cause of expensive electronic equipment failure and business disruption. Damage may result in loss of computers, data and communications, loss of revenue, and loss of profits. The new TDS- DINLINE family of surge diverters and filters offer economical and reliable protection from power transients in even the most strenuous applications.

Transient Discriminating Technology (TDS) introduces the first quantum leap in transient suppression technology for mains powered equipment. It offers a new

level of safety and reliability, yet retains optimum protection levels critical for electronic equipment. TDS is an active frequency based device that discriminates between the slower mains voltages and the higher speed transients. When transient frequencies are detected the patented TDS "Quick-Switch" technology "switches in" robust protection devices to limit the transient to safe levels. The frequency discrimination circuit controlling the TDS "Quick-Switch" ensures that

the device is virtually immune to the effects of the 50/60Hz sustained over- voltages, allowing fault voltages of up to 480Vrms without degradation, and

providing over-voltage robustness in excess of the demanding new and emerging standards.

TDS technology is essential for any site where abnormal over-voltages can occur or where the possible catastrophic failure of traditional technologies due to over- voltage events can not be tolerated.

The TDS180-4S unit provides this technology in a single mode shunt-only, 72mm width module. Its unique design allows it to be configured for Ph-N or Ph-E or N-E applications.

Rated to a surge capacity of 80kA (8/20p), internally 1601cA of surge material is

provided for additional robustness and to provide long service life. The unit is

designed for sites with a medium risk of transients or for secondary protection applications. For the protection of high exposure sites or critical equipment higher surge rated TDS DINLINE units, or TDS MOVTECTM should be installed.

Features Robust against abnormal over-voltage

UL1449 Edition 2 compliant

Single phase primary protection for medium exposure sites or secondary protection applications

Single mode protection, configurable to Ph-N, Ph-E or N-E protection

35mm DIN rail mount, DIN 43 880

profile matches common MCBs

72mm width compact design fits into most switch and distribution boards

Electronic status indicator ideal for poorly illuminated locations

Long Service life

Optional retrofittable TDS Alarm Relay for remote alarms

CO®



TDS-DINLINE SURGE DIVERTER TDS180-4S SPECIFICATIONS Operation:

Nominal input voltage 220 -277 Vrms

Input frequency 50/60 Hz

Max. permissible abnormal over-voltage 480 Vrms

Power systems TN-C, TN-S, TN-C-S (MEN), IT Status Earth leakage current <2mA

Elect onics Protection: Modes Ph-N, Ph-E or N-E

Let through voltage @ 3kA 8/20gs <720V

Let through voltage @ 20kA 8/20gs <910V

Surge rating 8/20ps 80kA

Surge rating 10 /350µs 16kA

Energy rating 38401

MultipulseTM capability Yes

Aggregate surge material 160kA 8/20ps

Alarms and Indicators: Protection status indication Two, electronic. On = OK

Alarm contacts User configurable, with optional TDS-AR

Physicals:

Environmental rating IP20

Operating conditions -35 to +55°C, 0-90% humidity

Enclosure style DIN 43880

Dimensions (W x D x H) 72 x 88 x 70mm

Weight 350g (approx.)

Encapsulation Shockguard

Enclosure material Flame Retardent UL94V-0

Surface finish Spark eroded finish

Wiring terminals Accepts up to 6mm2

Warranty 5 years

Test standards: Approvals UL1449 Edition 2

AS 3260, IEC 950

Certificate of suitability,

Electricity Regulator

Surge rated to meet ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 Cat A, Cat B, Cat C.

ANSI/IEEE C62.45 -1987 Life cycle testing.

AS/NZS 1768-1991 Cat A, Cat.B, Cat C.

BS 6651:1992 Cat A, Cat B.

IEC801-5 Installation Class 5.

IEC 61643-1

Cr

Ss

T1 T2

2 4,8 810121416i

L_L_ Tin ALARM

ERICCT

TRANSIENT -

DISCRIMINATING SUPPRESSOR TDS180-4S-277

10

1 20 1000

Number of Impulses

10000

Note: Other operating voltages and frequencies are available on application. For specifications on other DINLINE products, refer to relevant Specifications Sheet.

Exceeding nominal operating voltage while transient events occur may affect product life. TDS, MULTIPULSE, PROLINE, CRITEC, MOVTEC, DINLINE and SURGE REDUCTION FILTER are trademarks of ERICO.

Due to a policy of continual product development, specifications are subject to change without notice. © Copyright 1998

Model Number Description

TDS180-4S-277 TDS 277V 80KA SURGE SUPPRESSOR

Hobart ph:+61 3 6237-3200 fac+61 3

Sydney ph:+61 2 9479-8500 fac+61 2

Melbourne ph:+61 3 9894-2677 faic+61 3

Canberra ph:+61 2 6257-3055 fa+61 2

6273-0399 Adelaide ph: +61 8 8366-6555 fax:+61 8 8366-6556 9980-5092 Perth ph:+61 8 9358-1233 fax:+61 8 9358-1404 9894-3216 Singapore ph:+ 65-763-2477 fax:. 65 763-2397 6257-3127 Thailand ph:+ 662 627-9037-8 fax:+662 627-9168

ERICO° ERICO's coordinated approach to facility protection - CADWELD, CRITEC, ERITECH www.erico.com



Miniature circuit breakers Din-Safe MCBs (RCBO)

El Standard AS/NZS 61009

O Approval N17482

O Short circuit, overcurrent and earth leakage protection O Handle sealable and padlockable

DIN Rail mounting

Din-Safe MCB with pigtail Amp

No of rating Poles (Al

Short Voltage circuit

V kA

Trip Sens.

Phase ' mA Cat. No

2 6 110/240 10 1+N 30 -DSRCB0630R .

2 10 110/240 10 1+N 30 DSitCB1030P

2 16 110/240 10 1+N 30 OSRCB1630P

2 20 110/240 10 1+N 30 DSRCB2030P

2 25 110/240 10 1+N 30 -DSRC82530P I

2 32 110/240 10 1+N 30 ' DSRCB3230P.

2 40 110/240 10 1+N 30 DSRCB403OR '

Din-Safe MCB standard terminal configuration Amp

No of rating Poles (A)

Voltage (V)

Short Trip circuit Sens. (kA) Phase 2) (mA) Cat. No')

2 6 110/240 10 1+N 10 a DSRCB0610A

2 6 110/240 10 14-N 30 DSReB0630

2 10 110/240 10 1+N 10 - DSRC81010A

2 10 110/240 10 1+N 30 DSRCB1030

2 10 110/240 10 1+N 100 DSRCB10100 .

2 16 110/240 10 1+N 10 DSRCB1610A

2 16 110/240 10 1+N 30 DSRCB1630

2 16 110/240 10 1+N 100 DSRCB16100'

2 20 110/240 10 1+N 10 DSRCB2010A

2 20 110/240 10 1+N 30 -

, .

DSRCB2030

2 20 110/240 10 1+N 100 DSRCB20100

2 25 110/240 10 1+N 30 DSRCB2530

2 32 110/240 10 1+N 30 DSRCB3230 c

2 40 110/240 10 1+N 30 - DSRCB4030

Application Din-Safe MCB is a combined MCB/RCD providing thermal overload, short circuit

and earth leakage protection in the one integral unit. Din-Safe MCBs are suitable for use in residential, commercial and light industrial applications.

Terminal configuration

NEUTRAL (LOAD)

N

PIGTAIL SUPPLY NEUTRAL

ACTIVE (LOAD)

CI"

DUMMY ACTIVE TERMINAL (LINE)

NEUTRAL ACTIVE (LOAD) (LOAD)

0

Jia N

0 0 NEUTRAL ACTIVE

(LINE) (LINE)

DIN-Safe MCB with neutral pigtail

suits standard 3 phase chassis

DIN-Safe MCB

standard terminal configuration

Characteristics O Width: 2 modules.

For type AC residual currents.

O Rated voltage: 110/240 V/50-60 Hz.

O Tripping characteristics of MCB part:

IEC 60848 - C curve.

O Short circuit capacity: 10 kA.

O Terminal capacity: 25 mm2.

O High immunity to transient current.

O Profile as per Din-T MCB.

Test button for periodic testing.

Notes: ') Unprotected neutral, not switched. 2) Unprotected neutral, switched. ') Fits Din-T chassis (special configuration)

refer page TBA.

`) Some type "A" RCDs are stocked. Refer NHP.

Nuisance tripping may be experienced in VFD

and motor starting applications refer NHP.

Available on indent only.



aInnovators in Protection Technology TERASAKI

Din-T MCBs + RCDs Technical data

Tripping curves according to EN 60898

The following tables show the average tripping curves of the Terasaki Din-T MCBs based on

the thermal and magnetic characteristics.

Curve C

041

los

102

10

10'

104

10' 1 1 5 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40.50

x In



TE ASAK innovators in Protection Technology


What is an RCD?

The RCD (Residual Current Device) is a device intended to protect people against indirect contact, the exposed conductive parts of the installation being connected to an appropriate earth electrode. It may be used to provide protection against fire hazards due to a persistent earth fault current, without operation of the overcurrent protective device.

RCDs having a rated residual operating current not exceeding 30 mA are also used as a means for additional protection in case

of failure of the protective means against electric shock (direct contact).

Working Principle

The main components of an RCD are the following:

NI The core transformer: which detects the earth fault current.

ES The relay: when an earth fault current is detected, the relay

reacts by tripping and opening the contacts.

IS The mechanism: element to open and close the contacts either manually or automatically.

ES The contacts: to open or close the main circuit.

The RCD constantly monitors the vectorial sum of the current passing through all the conductors. In normal conditions the vectorial sum is zero (11+12=0) but in case of an earth fault, the vectorial sum differs from zero (I142-Id), this causes

the actuation of the relay and therefore the release of the main contacts.

Tett resistor -

Secondary - winding-

Test- button -

Contacts

4- Tr i ppi ng i mechanism

Core transformer and priMary winding

Definitions related to RCDs

RCCB = Residual Current Circuit Breaker without overcurrent protection.

RCBO = Residual Current Circuit Breaker with overcurrent protection.

Breaking capacity

A value of AC component of a prospective current that an RCCB

is capable of breaking at a stated voltage under prescribed

conditions of use and behaviour.

Residual making and breaking capacity (IAm)

A value of the AC component of a residual prospective current which an RCCB can make, carry for its opening time and break

under specified conditions of use and behaviour.

Conditional residual short-circuit current (IAc) A value of the AC component of a prospective current which an RCCB protected by a suitable SCPO (short-circuit protective device) in series, can withstand, under specific conditions of use and behaviour.

Conditional short-circuit current (Inc) A value of the AC component of a residual prospective current which an RCCB protected by a suitable SCPD in series, can withstand, under specific conditions of use and

behaviour.

Residual short-circuit withstand current

Maximum value of the residual current for which the operation of the RCCB is ensured under specified conditions, and above which the device can undergo irreversible alterations.

Prospective current

The current that would flow in the circuit, if each main current path of the RCCB and the overcurrent protective device (if any) were replaced by a conductor of negligible impedance.

Making capacity

A value of AC component of a prospective current that an

RCCB is capable to make at a stated voltage under prescribed conditions of use and behaviour.

Open position The position in which the predetermined clearance between open contacts in the main circuit of the RCCB is secured.

Closed position

The position in which the predetermined continuity of the main circuit of the RCCB is secured.

Tripping time The time which elapses between the instant when the residual operating current is suddenly attained and the instant of arc extinction in all poles.

Residual current (ILA)

Vector sum of the instantaneous values of the current flowing in the main circuit of the RCCB.

Residual operating current

Value of residual current which causes the RCCB to operate under specified conditions.

Rated short-circuit capacity (Icn)

Is the value of the ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity assigned to the circuit breaker. (Only applicable to RCBO)

Conventional non-tripping current (Int) A specified value of current which the circuit breaker is

capable of carrying for a specified time without tripping. (Only applicable to RCBO)

Conventional tripping current (It) A specified value of current which causes the circuit breaker to trip within a specified time. (Only applicable to RCBO)



TERASAKII Innovators In Protertion Technology


RCDs classification according to EN 61008/61009 RCDs may be classified according to:

The behaviour in the presence of DC current

(types for general use).

E Type AC

Type A

The time-delay (in the presence of residual current)

RCDs without time delay: type for general use

RCDs with time delay: type S for selectivity

Type AC (\, 1) 2)

The type AC RCDs are designed to release with sinusoidal residual currents which occur suddenly or slowly rise in magnitude.

Residual current

0.5 x IAn

1 x IAn

2 x 'An

5 x IAn

Tripping time

t =

t = <300 ms

t = <150 ms

t = <40 ms

Tripping curve type AC

') Standard in Australia ') Type A acceptable in Australia

Tripping curve type A

') Standard in New Zealand

`) DSRCBH is type A.

Type A 3) 4)

Certain devices during faults can be the source of non-

sinusoidal earth leakage currents (DC components) due to the electronic components e.g. diodes, thyristors etc.

Type A RCDs are designed to ensure that under these conditions the residual current devices operate on sinusoidal residual current and also with pulsating direct current(*) which occur suddenly or slowly rise in magnitude.

() Pulsating direct current: current of pulsating wave form which assumes, in each period of the rated power frequency, the value 0 or a

value not exceeding 0.006 A DC during one single interval of time, expressed in angular measure of at least 150°.

Residual current Tripping time

1. For sinusoidal residual current

0.5 x IAn

1 x IAn

2 x IAn

5 x IAn

t =oo

t = <300 ms

t = <150 ms

t <40 ms

2. For residual pulsating direct current

At point of wave 0°

0.35 x IAn

1.4 x IAn

2.8 x IAn

7 x IAn


0.25 x IAn

1.4 x IAn

2.8 x IAn

7 x IAn


0.11 x IAn

1.4 x IAn

2.8 x IAn

7 x IAn

t =oo

t = <300 ms

t = <150 ms

t = <40 ms

t = co

t = <300 ms

t = <150 ms

t = <40 ms

t = ao

t = <300 ms

t = <150 ms

t = <40 ms

330

200

150

100

-1-r-

40 4

.51 1.4 2'

0.35 1025

-041

- Type A

Type AC

i rot+.

7



aInnovators in Protection Technolo TERASAK1


Nuisance tripping

All Din Safe RCDs have a high level of immunity to transient currents, against current impulses of 8/20 ps according to EN 61008/61009 and VDE 0664.T1.

Type A, AC 250 A 8/20 ps

Type S 3000 A 8/20 ps

RCDs have a high level of immunity against alternating currents of high frequency according to EN 61008/61009.

Curve 0.5 ps - 100 kHz - 200 A - 61008/61009



aInnovators in Protection Technology TERASAKI


Use of an RCBO Din-Safe (DSRCB)

Test-button

Contact position Indicator Abcess to the mechanism for extensions

TEST-BUTTON To ensure the correct functiOning of the RCBO, the test button T shall be pressed frequently. The device must trip When the test button is presSed.

CONTACT POSITION INDICATOR Printing on the toggle to provide information of the real contact position.

Contacts' in open position. EnsUre a

distance between contacts > 4 MM.

I-061 ContaCts in closed poSition. Ensure continuity in the main circuit

TOGGLE To manually switch the RCBO ON or OFF

ACCESS TOTHEMECHANISM FOR EXTENSIONS itfis possible add an auxiliary contact, shunt trip, undervoltage release or.. motor Operator; following the Stack-On configuration of the extensions in 'Section 4:

ALLCABLES MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE RCBO All conductors, phase; nd neutral, that constitute the power supply of the installatiOn to be protected, must be.connected to the RCBO to either upper or lower terminals according to the following diagram.

110/230Y

1 1

0 0



aInnovutom in Protection Technology TE ASAK


Product related information Influence of air ambient temperature on the rated current

Influence of temperature on RCBOs (Din Safe DSRCB)

The thermal calibration of the RCBO was carried out at an ambient temperature of 30 °C. Ambient temperatures different from 30 °C

influence the bimetal and this results in earlier or later thermal tripping.

0.5 - 6 A

%In 140

120

loo

so

iol 20 30 40 50 -60 °C



aInnovaton in Prufection Technoloxy TERASAKII

Din-T MCBs + RCDs Technical data Tripping current as a function of the frequency

All RCDs are designed to work at frequencies of 50-60 Hz, therefore to work at different values, we must consider the variation of the tripping sensitivity according to the tables below. It should be taken into consideration that there is a no tripping risk when pushing the test-button, due to the fact that such action is made by means of an internal resistor with a fixed value.

RCBO DSRCB 3)

iTirpe At .'10:itz' 30:41i! ;.`.li:: 50 Iii: ...: ;!'100Hi 200 Hi::E : :300'H 400:11i

30 mA 0.62 0.65 0.80 0.91 1.24 1.55 1.88

100 mA 0.74 0.71 0.80 0.95 1.16 1.38 1.59

300 mA 0.80 0.74 0.80 0.97 1.19 1.44 1.64

500 mA 1.10 0.81 0.80 0.89 1.18 1.38 1.68

1.00AET:

30 mA 8.17 3.13 0.75 1.70 3.10 3.52 3.67

100 mA 6.81 2.71 0.75 1.43 2.35 2.58 2.71

300 mA 6.20 2.16 0.75 0.49 0.87 0.74 0.95

500 mA 4.34 1.53 0.75 0.39 0.59 0.62 0.64

Notes: ') The standard NHP/Terasaki type is the "type AC" in Australia, Type "A" in New Zealand.

') The standard NHP/Terasaki DSRCBH single pole RCBO is "type A" in Australia and New Zealand.

') The numbers in the table above are multipliers, e.g. A "DSRCD" at 50 hz has an 0.8 multiplier. Therefore a 30 mA, "type AC" RCD will trip at (0.8 x 30 mA) 24 mA.

Power losses The power losses are calculated by means of measuring the voltage drop between the incoming and the outgoing terminal of the device at rated current. Power loss per pole:

RCBO-DinSafe MCB DSRCB

In (A) 4 0 13 20 32 O

Z (iiiohm) 1 125 53 16.5 11.9 9.8 7.1 5.6 4.7 3.6

I^ PW (W) I 20 1.9 1.6 2.0 2.5 2.8 3.5 4.8 5.8



aInnovators in Protection Technology TESL SAKI

t ^

c

0


RCBO (DSRCB) let-through energy Pt

The benefit of an RCBO in short-circuit conditions, is its ability to reduce the value of the let-through energy that the short-circuit would be generating.

Din-Safe DSRCB

Curve C

Let-through energy at 230 V

lors

104

C40 C25 C16 C10

wrArAfAIAL.-- Avessrommommr-

.z..corcimutsaww. .4*A21111111/411P2

./4111111/21IMIE

Per

3 4 5 5 7 .8.:9 10

Pro'epectiVe current Icc (kA)

RCBO - Din-Safe (DSRCB)

RCBO - Din-Safe (DSRCB)

ON

%If

45

70

59

89

Dimensions in mm

C32 C20

C13



aInnovators in Protection Technology TERASAKII


Text for specifiers

RCBO Din Safe (DSRCB)

The residual making and associated MCB:

Din-T6 6000 A

4r Din-T10 7500 A

According to EN 61009 standard.

Intended to detect residual sinusoidal currents (type AC) or residual

pulsating direct currents (type A).

Resistance against nuisance tripping according to VDE 0664 T1 and

EN 61009.

Working ambient temperature from -25 °C up to +40 °C for type A

and from -5 °C up to +40 °C for type AC.

Approved by CEBEC, VDE KEMA, IMQ, etc.

The RCBO 1 P+N is 2 modules wide or 1 module wide.

The neutral pole is on the left hand side. The N pole closes first of all poles and opens last of all poles.

Nominal rated currents are: 4 up to 40 A.

Characteristic B & C.

Nominal residual currents are: 10, 30, 100, 300, 500, 1000 mA.

The test circuit is protected against overloads.

III The short-circuit capacity is 10 kA, with selectivity class 3.

The making and breaking capacity is 500 A.

The residual making and breaking capacity is 7500 A.

Terminal capacity from 1 up to 25 mm' rigid in the top terminals and from 1 up to 35 mm' in the bottom terminals.

The devices 10, 30, 100 mA type A or AC always have vertical selectivity with devices 300 mA type S.

Both incoming and outgoing terminals have a protection degree

of IP 20.

Isolator function due to Red/Green printing on the toggle.

Auxiliary contacts can be added on the right hand side.

RCBOs can be released by means of a shunt trip or undervoltage release.

RCBOs can be remotely controlled by means of a motor operator.



TERASA 1 Innainnora in Pinection Thalmann:),

Din-T MCBs + RCDs Technical data Overview Din-Safe RCDs

Device type definition

Rating/description Cat. No.

KUSU

I.

DSRCB

Standards IEC 61009-1

Magnetic tripping characteristics C

Residual tripping characteristic ') AC, A

Tripping time at k1n Instantaneous ms <300

Selective ms -

Rated current A 4, 6, 10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40

Rated residual current [An mA 10, 30

Calibration temperature °C 30

Number of poles versus modules 1

Rated voltage Un 2 P AC V 110. 240 (1 P.N)

3 P AC V

4 P AC V

Frequency Hz 50/60

Maximum service voltage Ubmax V 255

Minimum service voltage Ubmin V 100

Power supply Top/Bottom

Selectivity class 3

Rated making and breaking capacity (Im) A

Residual making and breaking capacity (Lem) A 7500

Conditional short-circuit capacity (Inc) A

Conditional residual short-circuit capacity (tAr) A .

Short-circuit capacity (Ico) A 10000

Grid distance (safety distance between two devices) mm 35

Isolator application yes

Insulation degree Insulation voltage V (DC) 500

Shock voltage (1.2/50 ms) kV 6

Insulation resistance (mOhm) 1000

Dielectric strength V 2500

Shock resistance (in x, y, z direction)(IEC 60077/16.3) 40 g, 18 shocks 5 ms

Vibration resistance (in x, y, z direction; IEC 60068-2-6) 1.5 g, 30 min, 0...80 Hz

Endurance electrical at Un. In 10000

mechanical at Un, In 20000

Protection degree (outside/inside electrical enclosure) IP 20 / IP 40

Self extinguish degree (according to UL 94) V2

Tropicalisation (according to IEC 60068-2, DIN 40046) °C/RH .55/95 9.,

Pollution degree (ace IEC 60947-1) 3

Operating temperature °C -25...60

Storage temperature °C -5..40 Terminals capacity Rigid cable min/max (Top) mm' 1/25

Flexible cable min' /max (Top) rpm, 1/16

Rigid cable min/max (bottom) mm' 1/35

Flexible cable min'/max (bottom) mm'

('Flexible cable 0.75/1/1.5 mm' with cable lug)

1/25

Torque Top/Bottom Nm 3/4

Add-on devices (side add-on) Auxiliary contacts yes

UVT yes

Shunt trip yes

Motor operator yes

Panelboard switch Bottom

Busbars systems Pin Bottom

Folk yes

Accessories

Dimensions, weights, 6 Poles 1+N

packaging (HxDxW) 86x68xW mm 36

Weight/unit g 250

Package/unit 1/6

Note: .) Refer catalogue section for types.

') Making sure that and both flying leads am disconnected.



VLT® 8000 AQUA

Contents

Introduction 2

Ordering 2

Unpacking and ordering a VLT frequency converter 2

Type code ordering number string 2

TYPE CODE Table/Ordering form 6

Control principle 7

AEO - Automatic Energy Optimization 7

Serial communication 8

Cascade Controller Option 8

Control unit LCP 10

Installation 18

General technical data 18

Technical data, mains supply 3 x 200 - 240 V 23 Technical data, mains supply 3 x 380 - 480 V 25

Technical data, mains supply 3 x 525 - 600 V 30 Fuses 34

Mechanical dimensions 37

Index 40

MD.80.A4.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark 1



VLT® 8000 AQUA

III Unpacking and ordering a VLT frequency converter If you are in doubt as to which frequency converter

you have received and which options it contains,

use the following to find out.

Type code ordering number string On the basis of your order, the frequency converter is

given an ordering number that can be seen from the

nameplate on the unit. The number may look as follows:

VLT-8008-A-T4-C20-R3-DL-F10-A00-CO This means that the frequency converter ordered is a

VLT 8008 for three-phase mains voltage of 380-480 V

(T4) in Compact enclosure IP 20 (C20). The hardware

variant is with integral RFI filter, classes A & B (R3). The

frequency converter features a control unit (DL) with a

PROFIBUS option card (F10). No option card (A00)

and no conformal coating (CO) Character no. 8 (A)

indicates the application range of the unit: A = AQUA.

IP 00: This enclosure is only available for the larger

power sizes of the VLT 8000 AQUA series. It is

recommended for installation in standard cabinets. IP 20/NEMA 1: This enclosure is used as standard enclosure for VLT 8000 AQUA. It is ideal for

cabinet installation in areas where a high degree

of protection is required. This enclose also

permits side-by-side installation.

IP 54: This enclosure can be fitted direct to the wall. Cabinets are not required. IP 54 units can

also be installed side-by-side.

Hardware variant The units in the programme are available in the

following hardware variants: ST: Standard unit with or without control

unit. Without DC terminals, except for VLT 8042-8062, 200-240 V

VLT 8016-8300, 525-600 V SL: Standard unit with DC terminals. EX: Extended unit with control unit, DC

terminals, connection of external 24 V DC supply for back-up of control PCB.

DX: Extended unit with control unit, DC

terminals, built-in mains fuses and disconnector, connection of external 24 V DC supply for back-up of control PCB.

PF: Standard unit with 24 V DC supply for back-up of control PCB and built-in

main fuses. No DC terminals. PS: Standard unit with 24 V DC supply

for back-up of control PCB. No DC

terminals. PD: Standard unit with 24 V DC supply for

back-up of control PCB, built-in main fuses and disconnect. No DC terminals.

RFI filter Units for a mains voltage of 380-480 V and a motor power of up to 7.5 kW (VLT 8011) are always supplied with an integral class Al & B filter. Units for higher motor power than these can be ordered either with or without an RFI filter. RFI filters are not available for 525-600 V units.

Control unit (keypad and display) All types of units in the programme, except for IP

54 units (and IP 21 VLT 8452-8652, 380-480 V),

can be ordered either with or without the control unit. IP 54 units always come with a control unit. All types of units in the programme are available

with built-in application options including a relay

card with four relays or a cascade controller card.

Conformal Coating All types of units in the programme are available with or without conformal coating of the PCB. Please note VLT 8452-8652, 380-480 V and VLT 8052-8402 are only available as conformal coated.

2 MD.80.A4.02 - VLT is a registered Danfoss trademark



VLT® 8000 AQUA

200-240 V

Typecode

Position in string

T2

9-10

COO

11-13

C20

11-13

CN1

11-13

C54

11-13

ST

14-15

SL

14-15

RO

16-17

R1

16-17

R3

16-17 4.0 kW/5.0 HP 8006 X X X X X X

5.5 kW/7.5 HP 8008 X X X X X X

7.5 kW/10 HP 8011 X X X X X X

11 kW/15 HP 8016 X X X X X X

15 kW/20 HP 8022 X X X X X X

18.5 kW/25 HP 8027 X X X X X X

22 kW/30 HP 8032 X X X X X X

30 kW/40 HP 8042 X X X X X X

37 kW/50 HP 8052 X X X X X X

45 kW/60 HP 8062 X X X X X X

380-480 V

Typecode

Position in string

T4

9-10

COO

11-13

C20

11-13

CN1

11-13

C54

11-13

ST

14-15

SL

14-15

EX

14-15

DX

14-15

PS

14-15

PD

14-15

PF

14-15

RO

16-17

R1

16-17

R3

16-17 4.0 kW/5.0 HP 8006 X X X X X

5.5 kW/7.5 HP 8008 X X X X X

7.5 kW/10 HP 8011 X X X X X

11 kW/15 HP 8016 X X X X X X X

15 kW/20 HP 8022 X X X X X X X

18.5 kW/25 HP 8027 X X X X X X X

22 kW/30 HP 8032 X X X X X X X

30 kW/40 HP 8042 X X X X X X X

37 kW/50 HP 8052 X X X X X X X

45 kW/60 HP 8062 X X X X X X X

55 kW/75 HP 8072 X X X X X X X

75 kW/100 HP 8102 X X X X X X X

90 kW/125 HP 8122 X X X X X X X

110 kW/150 HP 8152 X X X X X X X X X X X









Voltage

T2: 200-240 VAC

T4: 380-480 VAC

Enclosure

COO: Compact IP 00

C20: Compact IP 20

CN1: Compact NEMA 1

C54: Compact IP 54

I NB!: NEMA 1 exceeds IP 20

Hardware variant

ST: Standard

SL: Standard with DC terminals

EX: Extended with 24 V supply and DC terminals

DX: Extended with 24 V supply, DC terminals, disconnect and fuse

PS: Standard with 24 V supply

PD: Standard with 24 V supply, fuse and disconnect

PF: Standard with 24 V supply and fuse

RFI filter

RO: Without filter

R1: Class Al filter

R3: Class Al and B filter


t.



VLT® 8000 AQUA

525-600 V

Typecode

Position in string

T6

9-10

COO

11-13

C20

11-13

CN1

11-13

ST

14-15

RO

16-17 1.1 kW/1.5 HP 8002 X X X X

1.5 kW/2.0 HP 8003 X X X X

2.2 kW/3.0 HP 8004 X X X X

3.0 kW/4.0 HP 8005 X X X X

4.0 kW/5.0 HP 8006 X X X X

5.5 kW/7.5 HP 8008 X X X X

7.5 kW/10 HP 8011 X X X X

11 kW/15 HP 8016 X X X

15 kW/20 HP 8022 X X X

18.5 kW/25 HP 8027 X X X

22 kW/30 HP 8032 X X X

30 kW/40 HP 8042 X X X

37 kW/50 HP 8052 X X X

45 kW/60 HP 8062 X X X

55 kW/75 HP 8072 X X X

525-690 V

Typecode

Position in string

T7

9-10

COO

11-13

CN1

11- 11811

13 C54

-13

ST

11-13

EX

11-13

DX

14-15

PS

14-15

PD

14-15

PF

14-15

RO

16- 111716

17 R11)

-17 45 kW/50 HP 8052 X X X X X X X X X X X











1) R1 is not available with DX, PF and PD variants.

17: 525-690 VAC

COO: Compact IP 00

C20: Compact IP 20

CN1: Compact NEMA 1

ST: Standard

RO: Without filter

R1: Class Al filter

N B ! :

NEMA 1 exceeds IP 20




VLT® 8000 AQUA

Optional selections, 200-600 V

Display Position: 18-19 DO1) Without LCP DL With LCP

Fieldbus option Position: 20-22 FOO No options F10 Profibus DP V1

F30 DeviceNet F40 LonWorks free topology

Application option Position: 23-25 A00 No options A312) Relay card 4 relays A32 Cascade Controller

Coating Position: 26-27 CO3) No coating C1 With coating

it Not available with enclosure compact IP 54

2) Not available with fieldbus options (Fxx)

3) Not available for power sizes from 8452 to 8652, 380-480 V and VLT

8052-8402, 525-690 V




VLT® 8000 AQUA

TYPE CODE Table/Ordering form

V LT 8

8006 range

8008 8011 8016 8022 8027 8032 8042 8052 8062 8072 8102 8122 8152 CN1

8202 8252 8302 8352 8452 8502 8602 8652

Power sizes r p. BOOR

Mains voltage T2 T4 T6 T7

Enclosure

COO

C20 C54

No. units of this type

Required delivery date

Ordered by:

Dote: Take a copy of the ordering forms. Fill them in and send or fox your order to the nearest office of the Danfoss soles organisation

Hardware vorlant ST SL PS PD PF EX DX

RFI filter RO

R1

R3

-R -D -

Display unit (LCP)

DO

DL

Fleldbus option card FOO

F

F10 F30 F40

Application option card

A00 A31 A32

-14:-IcAl, I

Coating CO

C1




VLT® 8000 AQUA

Control principle A frequency converter rectifies AC voltage from mains into DC voltage, after which this DC

voltage is converted into a AC current with a

variable amplitude and frequency.

The motor is thus supplied with variable voltage and frequency, which enables infinitely variable speed

control of three-phased, standard AC motors.

1. Mains voltage

3 x 200 - 240 V AC, 50 / 60 Hz.

3 x 380 - 480 V AC, 50 / 60 Hz.

3 x 525 - 600 V AC, 50 / 60 Hz.

3 x 525 - 690 V AC, 50 / 60 Hz.

2 3 4

6

5

7

8

2. Rectifier

A three-phase rectifier bridge that rectifies AC

current into DC current.

3. Intermediate circuit DC voltage = 1.35 x mains voltage [\/].

4. Intermediate circuit coils Even out the intermediate circuit voltage and reduce

the harmonic current feedback to the mains supply.

5. Intermediate circuit capacitors

Even out the intermediate circuit voltage.

6. Inverter

Converts DC voltage into variable AC voltage

with a variable frequency.

7. Motor voltage Variable AC voltage, 0-100% of mains supply voltage.

8. Control card

This is where to find the computer that controls the inverter which generates the pulse pattern by which the DC voltage is converted into variable

AC voltage with a variable frequency.

AEO - Automatic Energy Optimization Normally, the U/f characteristics have to be set on the

basis of the expected load at different frequencies.

However, knowing the load at a given frequency in an

installation is often a problem. This problem can be

solved by using a VLT 8000 AQUA with its integral

Automatic Energy Optimization (AEO), which ensures

optimum energy utilization. All VLT 8000 AQUA units

feature this function as a factory setting, i.e. it is

not necessary to adjust the frequency converter U/f

ratio in order to obtain maximum energy savings.

In other frequency converters, the given load and

voltage/frequency ratio (U/f) must be assessed to carry

out correct setting of the frequency converter.

Using Automatic Energy Optimization (AEO), you

no longer need to calculate or assess the system

characteristics of the installation, since Danfoss VLT

8000 AQUA units guarantee optimum, load-dependent energy consumption by the motor at all times.

The figure on the right illustrates the working

range of the AEO function, within which energy

optimization is enabled.

2

0 2

72.

A

1.00

0.75

0.50

0.25

1. 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.7 0.6 0.9 1.0 VC.

Frequency

If the AEO function has been selected in parameter 101,

Torque characteristics, this function will be constantly active. If there is a major deviation from the optimum U/f

ratio, the frequency converter will quickly adjust itself.




VLT® 8000 AQUA

Advantages of the AEO function

Automatic energy optimization Compensation if an oversize motor is used

AEO matches operations to daily or

seasonal fluctuations Energy savings in a constant air volume system Compensation in the oversynchronous working range Reduces acoustic motor noise

Serial communication Serial communication allows monitoring, programming

and controlling one or several units from a

centrally placed computer.

All VLT 8000 AQUA units have an RS 485 port

and FC protocol as standard. Option cards are

available to support these protocols: Profibus

Modbus RTU

DeviceNet

Lon Works

Consult your Danfoss Sales Office for specific

Instruction Manuals/Literature.

III Cascade Controller Option In "Standard Mode", one motor is controlled by

the drive that has the Cascade Controller Option

card installed in it. Up to four additional fixed speed

motors can be sequenced on & off, as required

by the process, in lead-lag mode.

In "Master/Slave Mode", the drive that has the

Cascade Controller option card installed in it, along

with its associated motor, is designated as the

master. Up to four additional motors, each with

its own drive, can be operated in slave mode. The

Cascade Controller functions to stage the slave

drives/motors - on & off (as required), as a function

of "best system operating efficiency".

In "Lead Pump Alternation Mode", it is possible to

average out the usage of the pumps. This is done by

making the frequency converter switch between the pumps (max. 4) by means of a timer. Please note

that this mode requires an external relay setup.

Consult your Danfoss Sales Office for additional information.

Accessories

000000000000110

Terminol cover

LCP control unit

A a IP4x, top cover

175ZA296.10

IP 20 bottom cover

D

c",

Application option

C§) 8 80 08 " (§,8 8c)




VLT® 8000 AQUA

Type Description Order no.

IP 4x top cover IP )/ Option, VLT type 8006-8011 380-480 V compact 175Z0928

IP 4 x top cover 1) Option, VLT type 8002-8011 525-600 V compact 175Z0928

NEMA 12 bonding plate 2) Option, VLT type 8006-8011 380-480 V 175H4195

IP 20 terminal cover Option, VLT type 8006-8022 200-240 V 175Z4622

IP 20 terminal cover Option, VLT type 8027-8032 200-240 V 17524623


IP 20 terminal cover Option, VLT type 8016-8042 525-600 V 175Z4622,




IP 20 bottom cover Option, VLT type 8042-8062 200-240 V 176F1800

Terminal adaptor kit VLT type 8042-8062 200-240 V, IP 54 176F1808

Terminal adaptor kit VLT type 8042-8062 200-240 V, IP 00/NEMA 1 176F1805

Control panel LCP Separate LCP 175Z7804

LCP remote-mounting kit IP 00 & 203/ Remote-mounting kit, incl. 3 m cable 175Z0850

LCP remote-mounting kit IP 54 4/ Remote-mounting kit, incl. 3 m cable 175Z7802

LCP blind cover for all IP00/1P20 drives 175Z7806

Cable for LCP Separate cable (3 m) 175Z0929_

Relay card Application card with four relay outputs 175Z3691

Cascade controller card With conformal coating 175Z3692

Profibus option Without/with conformal coating 175Z3685/175Z3686

Lon Works option, Free topology Without conformal coating 176F0225

Modbus RTU option Without conformal coating 175Z3362

Device Net option Without conformal coating 176F0224

MCT 10 Set-up software CD-Rom 13081000

MCT 31 Harmonic calculation CD-Rom 13081031

Rittal Installation Kit

Type Description Order No.

Rittal TS8 enclosure for IP005) Installation kit for 1800mm high enclosure, VLT8152-8202, 380-480V; VLT8052-8202, 525-690V 176F1824




Rittal TS8 enclosure for IP005) Installation kit for 2000mm high enclosure, VLT8452-8652, 380-480V 176F1850

Floor stand for IP21 and IP54

enclosures/

Option, VLT8152-8352, 380-480V; VLT 8052-8402, 525-690V 176F1827

Mains shield kit Protection kit, VLT 8152-8352, 380-480 V; VLT 8052, 525-600 V 176F0799

Mains shield kit Protection kit, VLT 8452-8652, 380-480 V 176F1851

1) IP 4x/NEMA 1 top cover is for IP 20 units only and only horizontal surfaces comply with IP 4x. The kit also

contains a bonding plate (UL).

2) NEMA 12 bonding plate (UL) is only for IP 54 units.

3) The remote-mounting kit is only for IP 00 and IP 20 units. Enclosure of the remote-mounting kit is IP 65. 4) The remote-mounting kit is only for IP 54 units. Enclosure of the remote-mounting kit is IP 65.

5) For details: See High Power Installation Guide, MI.90.JX.YY.

VLT 8000 AQUA is available with an integral fieldbus option or application option. Ordering numbers for the individual VLT types with integrated options can be seen from the relevant manuals or instructions. In addition, the ordering number system can be used for ordering a frequency converter with an option.




VLT® 8000 AQUA

Control unit LCP The front of the frequency converter features a control panel - LCP (Local Control Panel).

This is a complete interface for operation and programming of the VLT 8000 AQUA.

The control panel is detachable and can - as an

alternative - be installed up to 3m/10 ft away from

the frequency converter, e.g. on the front panel,

by means of a mounting kit option.

The functions of the control panel can be

divided into five groups:

1. Display

2. Keys for changing display mode

3. Keys for changing program parameters

4. Indicator lamps

5. Keys for local operation.

All data are indicated by means of a 4-line

alpha-numeric display, which, in normal operation,

is able to show 4 operating data values and 3

operating condition values continuously. During

programming, all the information required for quick,

effective parameter Setup of the frequency converter

will be displayed. As a supplement to the display,

there are three indicator lamps for voltage (ON),

warning (WARNING) and alarm (ALARM), respectively.

All frequency converter parameter Setups can be

changed immediately via the control panel, unless this

function has been programmed to be Locked [1] via

parameter 016 Lock for data change or via a digital

input, parameters 300-307 Lock for data change.

LC filters for VLT 8000 AQUA When a motor is controlled by a frequency converter,

resonance noise will be heard from the motor. This

noise, which is caused by the design of the motor,

occurs each time one of the inverter switches in

the frequency converter is activated. Consequently,

the resonance noise frequency corresponds to the

switching frequency of the frequency converter.

For the VLT 8000 AQUA, Danfoss offers a LC filter

to dampen the acoustic motor noise.

This filter reduces the voltage rise time, the peak voltage

UPEAk and the ripple current 0I to the motor, thereby

making current and voltage almost sinusoidal. The

acoustic motor noise is therefore reduced to a minimum.

Because of the ripple current in the coils, there will be

some noise from the coils. This problem can be solved

entirely by integrating the filter in a cabinet or similar.

Examples of the use of LC filters Submersible pumps For small motors with up to and including 5.5 kW

rated motor power, use an LC filter, unless the motor is equipped with phase separation paper. This applies

e.g. to all wet running motors. If these motors are

used without LC filter in connection with a frequency converter, the motor windings will short-circuit. If in

doubt, ask the motor manufacturer whether the motor in question is equipped with phase separation paper.

Well pumps If immersion pumps are used, e.g. submerged pumps or well pumps, the supplier should be

contacted for clarification of requirements. It is

recommended to use a LC filter if a frequency converter is used for well pump applications.




VLT® 8000 AQUA

Ordering numbers, LC filter modules

Mains supply 3 x 200 - 240 V LC filter for VLT type

LC filter enclosure

Rated current at 200 V

Max. output frequency

Power loss Order no.

8006-8008 IP 00 25.0 A 60 Hz 110 W 175Z4600 8011 IP 00 32 A 60 Hz 120 W 175Z4601 8016 IP 00 46 A 60 Hz 150 W 175Z4602 8022 IP 00 61 A 60 Hz 210 W 175Z4603 8027 IP 00 73 A 60 Hz 290 W 175Z4604 8032 IP 00 88 A 60 Hz 320 W 175Z4605 8042 IP 00 115 A 60 Hz 600 W 175Z4702 8052 IP 00 143 A 60 Hz 600 W 175Z4702 8062 IP 00 170 A 60 Hz 700 W 175Z4703

Mains supply 3 x 380 - 480 LC filter LC filter for VLT type enclosure

Rated current at 400/480 V

Max. output frequency

Power loss Order no.

8006-8011 IP 20 16A/16A 120 Hz 175Z0832 8016 IP 00 24 A/ 21.7 A 60 Hz 170 W 175Z4606 8022 IP 00 32A/27.9A 60 Hz 180 W 175Z4607 8027 IP 00 37.5A/32A 60 Hz 190 W 175Z4608 8032 IP 00 44A/41.4A 60 Hz 210 W 175Z4609 8042 IP 00 61 A / 54 A 60 Hz 290 W 175Z4610 8052 IP 00 73A/65 A 60 Hz 410 W 175Z4611 8062 IP 00 90A/78 A 60 Hz 480 W 175Z4612 8072 IP 20 106A/ 106 A 60 Hz 500 W 175Z4701 8102 IP 20 147A/ 130 A 60 Hz 600 W 175Z4702 8122 IP 20 177A/160A 60 Hz 750 W 175Z4703 8152 IP 20 212A/ 190 A 60 Hz 750 W 175Z4704 8202 IP 20 260 A / 240 A 60 Hz 900 W 175Z4705 8252 IP 20 315 A / 302 A 60 Hz 1000 W 175Z4706 8302 IP 20 395 A / 361 A 60 Hz 1100 W 175Z4707 8352 IP 20 480 A / 443 A 60 Hz 1700 W 175Z3139 8452 IP 20 600 A / 540 A 60 Hz 2100 W 175Z3140 8502 IP 20 658 A / 590 A 60 Hz 2100 W 175Z3141 8602 IP 20 745 A / 678 A 60 Hz 2500 W 175Z3142

Regarding LC filters for 525 - 600 V and VLT 8652,

380-480 V, please contact Danfoss.

NB!:

14 When using LC filters, the switching frequency

must be 4.5 kHz (see parameter 407).

For VLT 8452-8602 parameter 408 must be set to

LC filter fitted to obtain proper operation.




VLT® 8000 AQUA

Mains supply 3 x 690 V

VLT Rated Current at 690

V

Max. output frequency (Hz)

Power

dissipation (W) Ordering no. POD

Ordering no.

IP20

8052 54 60 290 130B2223 130B2258 8062 73 60 390 130B2225 130B2260

8072 86 60 480 130B2225 130B2260 8102 108 60 600 130B2226 130B2261

8122 131 60 550 130B2228 130B2263 8152 155 60 680 130B2228 130B2263 8202 192 60 920 130B2229 130B2264

8252 242 60 750 130B2231 130B2266

8302 290 60 1000 130B2231 130B2266

8352 344 60 1050 130B2232 130B2267

8402 400 60 1150 130B2234 130B2269

dU/dt filters The dU/dt filters reduce dU/dt to approx. 500 V /1.tsec. These filters do not reduce noise or Upeak.

I NB!:

110 When using dU/dt filters, the switching frequency must be 1.5 kHz (see parameter 411)

Mains supply 3 x 690 V

VLT Rated Current at 690

V

Max. output

frequency (Hz)

Power

dissipation (W) Ordering no. IP 00

Ordering no.

IP20

8052 54 60 90 130B2154 13082188 8062 73 60 100 130B2155 130B2189

8072 86 60 110 130B2156 13082190 8102 108 60 120 130B2157 13082191

8122 131 60 150 130B2158 13082192 8152 155 60 180 130B2159 130B2193 8202 192 60 190 130B2160 13082194 8252 242 60 210 13082161 13082195

8302 290 60 350 130B2162 130B2196

8352 344 60 480 13082163 13082197

8402 400 60 540 13082165 13082199




VLT® 8000 AQUA

LC filters VLT 8006-8011 380 - 480 V 90

6f3A 70 5 5

Cp e41\e'.

175ZA106.11

The drawing on the left gives the measurements of IP

20 LC filters for the above-mentioned power range.

Min. space above and under enclosure: 100 mm.

IP 20 LC filters have been designed for side-by-side installation without any space between enclosures.

Max. motor cable length: - 150 m screened/armoured cable - 300 m unscreened/unarmoured cable If EMC standards are to be complied with:

EN 55011-1B: Max. 50 screened/armoured cable EN 55011-1A: Max. 150 m screened/armoured cable

Weight: 175Z0832 9.5 kg

Installation of LC filter IP 20 I




VLT 8000 AQUA

LC filters VLT 8006-8032, 200 - 240 V / 8016-8062 380 - 480 V The table and the drawing give the measurements of IP 00 LC filters for Compact units. IP 00 LC filters must be integrated and protected

against dust, water and corrosive gases.

Max. motor cable length: - 150 m screened/armoured cable - 300 m unscreened/unarmoured cable If EMC standards are to be complied with: - EN 55011-1B: Max. 50 screened/armoured

cable - EN 55011-1A: Max. 150 m screened/armoured

cable

LC filter IP 00 LC type A [mm] B [mm] C [mm] D [mm] E [mm] F [mm] G [mm] Weight [kg]

175Z4600 220 135 92 190 68 170 8 10 175Z4601 220 145 102 190 78 170 8 13

175Z4602 250 165 117 210 92 180 8 17

175Z4603 295 200 151 240 126 190 11 29 175Z4604 355 205 152 300 121 240 11 38 175Z4605 360 215 165 300 134 240 11 49 175Z4606 280 170 121 240 96 190 11 18 175Z4607 280 175 125 240 100 190 11 20 175Z4608 280 180 131 240 106 190 11 23 175Z4609 295 200 151 240 126 190 11 29 175Z4610 355 205 152 300 121 240 11 38 175Z4611 355 235 177 300 146 240 11 50 175Z4612 405 230 163 360 126 310 11 65

LJ

F

B

175ZA549.10




VLT® 8000 AQUA

LC filter VLT 8042-8062 200-240 V /

8072-8602 380 - 480 V

The table and the drawing give the measurements of IP

20 LC filters. IP 20 LC filters must be integrated and

protected against dust, water and aggressive gases.

LC-filter IP 20 LC type

175Z4701 175Z4702 175Z4703 175Z4704 175Z4705 175Z4706 175Z4707 175Z3139 175Z3140 175Z3141 175Z3142

A [mm] B [mm] C [mm]

Max. motor cable length: - 150 m screened/armoured cable - 300 m unscreened/unarmoured cable If EMC standards are to be complied with: - EN 55011-1B: Max. 50 m screened/armoured

cable - EN 55011-1A: Max. 150 m screened/armoured

cable

D [mm] E [mm] F [mm] G [mm] Weight [kg]

740 550 600 70 740 550 600 70 740 550 600 110

740 550 600 120

830 630 650 220 830 630 650 250 830 630 650 250 1350 800 1000 350 1350 800 1000 400 1350 800 1000 400 1350 800 1000 470

I I

L. A

I

B -I

C

I




VLT® 8000 AQUA

Harmonic filter Harmonic currents do not directly affect the electricity

consumption but has an impact on following conditions:

Higher total current to be handled by the installations

Increases load on transformer (sometimes it will

require a larger transformer, particular at retrofit)

- Increases heat losses in transformer and installation

In some cases demands larger cables,

switches and fuses

Higher voltage distortion due to higher current

- Increase risk for disturbing electronic equipment

connected to same grid

A high percentage of rectifier load from eg frequency

converters, will increase the harmonic current, which

must be reduced to avoid the above consequences.

Therefore the frequency converter has as standard,

built in DC coils reducing the total current with about

40% (compared to devices without any arrangement

for harmonic suppression), down to 40-45% ThiD.

In some cases there is a need for further suppression (eg retrofit with frequency converters). For this purpose

Danfoss can offer two advanced harmonic filters

AHF05 and AHF10, bringing the harmonic current down to around 5% and 10% respectively. For further

details see instruction MG.80.BX.YY.

Ordering numbers, Harmonic filters

Harmonic filters are used to reduce mains harmonics AHF 010: 10% current distortion

AHF 005: 5% current distortion

380-415 V, 50 Hz

IAHF,N Typical Motor Used

fkIN1

Danfoss ordering number VLT 8000

AHF 005 AHF 010

10 A 4, 5.5 17506600 175G6622 8006, 8008 19 A 7.5 17506601 17506623 8011, 8016

26 A 11 17506602 17506624 8022

35 A 15, 18.5 17506603 17506625 8027

43 A 22 175G6604 17506626 8032

72 A 30, 37 17506605 17506627 8042, 8052 101 A 45. 55 17506606 17506628 8062, 8072 144 A 75 17506607 17506629 8102

180 A 90 17506608 17506630 8122

217 A 110 17506609 17506631 8152

289 A 132, 160 175G6610 17506632 8202, 8252

324 A 175G6611 17506633 370 A 200 17506688 17506691 8302

Higher ratings can be achieved by paralleling the filter units

434 A 250 Two 217 A units 8352

578 A 315 Two 289 A units 8452

613 A 355 289 A and 324 A units 8502

648 A 400 Two 324 A units 8602 740 A 450 Two 370 A units 8652

Please note that the matching of the typical Danfoss frequency converter and filter is pre-calculated based on

400 V and assuming typical motor load (4 or 2 pole motor). VLT 8000 is based on a max. 110% torque application. The pre-calculated filter current may be different than the input current ratings of VLT 8000 as stated in the respective operating instructions, as these numbers are based on different operating conditions.

440-480 V, 60 Hz




VLT® 8000 AQUA

IAHF,N Typical Motor Used

fHP1

Danfoss ordering number VLT 8000 AHF 005 AHF 010

19 A 10, 15 175G6612 175G6634 8011, 8016 26 A 20 175G6613 17506635 8022 35 A 25, 30 175G6614 175G6636 8027, 8032 43 A 40 17506615 17506637 8042 72 A 50, 60 175G6616 17506638 8052, 8062

101 A 75 17506617 17506639 8072 144 A 100, 125 175G6618 17506640 8102, 8122

180 A 150 175G6619 17506641 8152 217 A 200 175G6620 17506642 8202

289 A 250 175G6621 17506643 8252

324 A 300 17506689 17506692 8302

370 A 350 175G6690 17506693 8352 Higher ratings can be achieved by paralleling the filter units

506 A 450 217 A and 289 A units 8452 578 A 500 Two 289 A units 8502

578 A 550 Two 289 A units 8602

648 A 600 Two 324 A units 8652

Please note that the matching of the Danfoss frequency converter and filter is pre-calculated based on 480 V

and assuming typical motor load. VLT 8000 is based on 110 % torque application. The pre-calculated filter current may be varying from the input current ratings of VLT 8000 as stated in the

respective operating instructions, as these numbers are based on different operating conditions.

690 V, 50 Hz

I AHF,N Typical motor used Ordering no. AHF 005 Ordering no. AHF 010 VLT 8000 110%

43 37, 45 130B2328 13062293 8052 72 55, 75 13082330 13082295 8062, 8072 101 90 13082331 130B2296 8102 144 110, 132 13082333 130B2298 8122, 8152

180 160 13082334 13082299 8202 217 200 13082335 130B2300 8252 289 250 13082331 & 13082333 13082301 8302 324 315 13082333 &13082334 130B2302 8352 370 400 13082334 &13082335 13082304 8402




VLT® 8000 AQUA

General technical data

Mains supply (L1, L2, L3):

Supply voltage 200-240 V units 3 x 200/208/220/230/240 V ±10%

Supply voltage 380-480 V units 3 x 380/400/415/440/460/480 V ±10%

Supply voltage 525-600 V units 3 x 525/550/575/600 V ±10%

Supply voltage 525-690 V units 3 x 525/550/575/600/690 V ±10% Supply frequency 48-62 Hz +/- 1%

Max imbalance of supply voltage:

VLT 8006-8011/380-480 V and VLT 8002-8011/525-600 V ±2.0% of rated supply voltage VLT 8016-8072/525-600 V, 380-480 V and VLT 8006-8032/200-240 V ±1.5% of rated supply voltage VLT 8102-8652/380-480 V and VLT 8042-8062/200-240 V ±3.0% of rated supply voltage VLT 8052-8402/525-690 V ±3.0% of rated supply voltage Displacement factor / cos. cp near unity (> 0.98)

True Power Factor (X) nominal 0.90 at rated load

Input Mains (L1, L2, L3) Allowable On-OFF Switching Sequences approx. 1 time/2 min.

Max. short-circuit current 100 kA

VLT output data (U, V, \A/):

Output voltage 0-100% of supply voltage

Output frequency 8006-8032, 200-240V 0 - 120 Hz, 0-1000 Hz





Output frequency 8072, 525-600V 0 - 120 Hz, 0-450 Hz


Output frequency 8402, 525-690V 0 - 132 Hz, 0-150 Hz

Rated motor voltage, 200-240 V units 200/208/220/230/240 V

Rated motor voltage, 380-480 V units 380/400/415/440/460/480 V

Rated motor voltage, 525-600 V units 525/550/575 V

Rated motor voltage, 525-690 V units 525/550/575/690 V

Rated motor frequency 50/60 Hz

Switching on output Unlimited

Ramp times 1- 3600 sec.

Torque characteristics:

Starting torque 110% for 1 min.

Starting torque (parameter 110 High break-away torque) Max. torque: 130% for 0.5 sec. Acceleration torque 100% Overload torque 110%

Control card, digital inputs:

Number of programmable digital inputs 8

Terminal nos. 16, 17, 18, 19, 27, 29, 32, 33 Voltage level 0-24 V DC (PNP positive logics) Voltage level, logical "0" < 5 V DC Voltage level, logical "1" > 10 V DC

Maximum voltage on input 28 V DC

Input resistance, R1 approx. 2 I<C2

Scanning time per input 3 msec.




VLT® 8000 AQUA

Reliable galvanic isolation: All digital inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELV). In

addition, the digital inputs can be isolated from the other terminals on the control card by connecting an external 24 V DC supply and opening switch 4. See switches 1-4.

Control card, analog inputs:

No. of programmable analog voltage inputs/thermistor inputs 2

Terminal nos. 53, 54

Voltage level 0 - 10 V DC (scalable)

Input resistance, Ri approx. 10 Q No. of programmable analog current inputs 1

Terminal no. earth 55

Current range 0/4 - 20 mA (scalable)

Input resistance, R1 approx. 200 0,

Resolution 10 bit + sign

Accuracy on input Max. error 1% of full scale

Scanning time per input 3 msec.

Reliable galvanic isolation: All analog inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage

(PELV) and other high-voltage terminals.

Control card, pulse input:

No. of programmable pulse inputs 3

Terminal nos. 17, 29, 33

Max. frequency on terminal 17 5 kHz

Max. frequency on terminals 29, 33 20 kHz (PNP open collector)

Max. frequency on terminals 29, 33 65 kHz (Push-pull)

Voltage level 0-24 V DC (PNP positive logics)

Voltage level, logic "0" < 5 V DC

Voltage level, logic "1" > 10 V DC

Maximum voltage on input 28 V DC

Input resistance, Ri approx. 2162 Scanning time per input 3 msec.

Resolution 10 bit + sign

Accuracy (100-1 kHz), terminals 17, 29, 33 Max. error: 0.5% of full scale

Accuracy (1-5 kHz), terminal 17 Max. error: 0.1% of full scale

Accuracy (1-65 kHz), terminals 29, 33 Max. error: 0.1% of full scale

Reliable galvanic isolation: All pulse inputs are galvanically isolated from the supply voltage (PELF). In

addition, pulse inputs can be isolated from the other terminals on the control card by connecting an

external 24 V DC supply and opening switch 4. See switches 1-4.

Control card, digital/pulse and analog outputs:

No. of programmable digital and analog outputs 2


Voltage level at digital/pulse output 0 - 24 V DC

Minimum load to frame (terminal 39) at digital/pulse output 600 Q Frequency ranges (digital output used as pulse output) 0-32 kHz

Current range at analog output 0/4 - 20 mA

Maximum load to frame (terminal 39) at analog output 500 Q

Accuracy of analog output Max. error: 1.5% of full scale

Resolution on analog output. 8 bit

Reliable galvanic isolation: All digital and analog outputs are galvanically isolated from the

supply voltage (PELT/) and other high-voltage terminals.




VLT® 8000 AQUA

Control card, 24 V DC supply:


Max. load 200 mA

Terminal nos. earth 20, 39

Reliable galvanic isolation: The 24 V DC supply is galvanically isolated from the supply voltage

(PELV), but has the same potential as the analog outputs.

Control card, RS 485 serial communication :

Terminal nos.

Reliable galvanic isolation: Full galvanic isolation (PELV).

Relay outputs:1l

68 (TX+, RX+), 69 (TX-, RX-)

No. of programmable relay outputs 2

Terminal nos., control card (resistive load only) 4-5 (make)

Max. terminal load (AC1) on 4-5, control card 50 V AC, 1 A, 50 VA

Max. terminal load (DC1 (IEC 947)) on 4-5, control card 25 V DC, 2 A / 50 V DC, 1 A, 50 W

Max. terminal load (DC1) on 4-5, control card for UUcUL applications 30 V AC, 1 A / 42.5 V DC, 1A

Terminal nos., power card (resistive and inductive load) 1-3 (break), 1-2 (make)

Max. terminal load (AC1) on 1-3, 1-2, power card 250 V AC, 2 A, 500 VA

Max. terminal load (DC1 (IEC 947)) on 1-3, 1-2, power card 25 V DC, 2 A / 50 V DC, 1A, 50 W

Min. terminal load (AC/DC) on 1-3, 1-2, power card 24 V DC, 10 mA / 24 V AC, 100 mA

1) Rated values for up to 300,000 operations. At inductive loads the number of operations are reduced by 50%, alternatively the current can be reduced by

50%, thus the 300,000 operations are maintained.

External 24 Volt DC supply:


Voltage range 24 V DC +15% (max. 37 V DC for 10 sec.)

Max. voltage ripple 2 V DC

Power consumption 15 W - 50 W (50 W for start-up, 20 msec.)

Min. pre-fuse 6 Amp

Reliable galvanic isolation: Full galvanic isolation if the external 24 V DC supply is also of the PELV type.

Cable lengths and cross-sections:

Max. motor cable length, screened cable 150m/500 ft

Max. motor cable length, unscreened cable 300m/1000 ft

Max. motor cable length, screened cable VLT 8011 380-480 V 100m/330 ft

Max. motor cable length, screened cable VLT 8011 525-600 V 50m/164 ft Max. DC-bus cable length, screened cable 25m/82 ft from frequency converter to DC bar.

Max. cable cross-section to motor, see next section Max. cross-section for 24 V external DC supply

Max. cross-section for control cables

Max. cross-section for serial communication

If UL/cUL is to be complied with, copper cable with temperature class 60/75°C / (VLT 8002 - 8072 (525 - 600 A, VLT 8006 - 8072 (380 - 480 V) and VLT 8002 -

UUcUL is to be complied with, copper cable with temperature class 75°C/167°F

2.5 mm2 /12 AWG

1.5 mm2/16 AWG

1.5 mm2/16 AWG 140/167°F must be used

8032 (200 - 240V). If

must be used (VLT 8102

- 8652 (380 - 480 V), VLT 8042 - 8062 (200 - 240 V), VLT 8052 - 8402 (525-690 V)).

Connectors are for use of both copper and aluminium cables, unless other is specified.




VLT® 8000 AQUA

Control characteristics:

Frequency range 0 - 120 Hz

Resolution on output frequency ±0.003 Hz

System response time 3 msec.

Speed, control range (open loop) 1:100 of synchro. speed

Speed, accuracy (open loop) < 1500 rpm:max. error ± 7.5 rpm

> 1500 rpm: max. error of 0.5% of actual speed

Process, accuracy (closed loop) < 1500 rpm: max.error ± 1.5 rpm

> 1500 rpm: max. error of 0.1% of actual speed

All control characteristics are based on a 4-pole asynchronous motor

Accuracy of display readout (parameters 009-012 Display readout):

Motor current, 0 - 140% load

Power kW, Power HP, 0 - 90% load

Externals:

Max. error: ±2.0% of rated output current Max. error: ±5.0% of rated output power

Enclosure IPOO/Chassis, IP20/1P21/NEMA 1, IP54/NEMA 12

Vibration test 0.7 g RMS 18-1000 Hz random. 3 directions for 2 hours (IEC 68-2-34/35/36) Max. relative humidity 93 % +2 %, -3 % (IEC 68-2-3) for storage/transport Max. relative humidity 95% non condensing (IEC 721-3-3; class 3K3) for operation

Aggressive environment (IEC 721-3-3) Uncoated class 3C2

Aggressive environment (IEC 721-3-3) Coated class 3C3

Ambient temperature, VLT 8006-8011 380-480 V, 8002-8011 525-600 V, IP 20//NEMA 1

Max. 45°C (117°F) (24-hour average max. 40°C (104°F))

Ambient temperature IPOO/Chassis, IP20 /NEMA 1, IP54/NEMA 12 Max.

40°C/104°F (24-hour average max. 35°C/95°F) see Derating for high ambient temperature Min. ambient temperature in full operation 0°C (32°F)

Min. ambient temperature at reduced performance -10°C (14°F)

Temperature during storage/transport -25° - +65°/70°C (-13° - +149°/158°F) Max. altitude above sea level 1000 m (3300 ft)

see Derating for high air pressure

I N B ! :

1114

VLT 8002-8072, 525-600 V units do not comply with EMC, Low Voltage or PELV directives.




VLT® 8000 AQUA

VLT 8000 AQUA protection:

Electronic motor thermal protection against overload.

Temperature monitoring of heat-sink ensures that the frequency converter cuts out if the temperature reaches 90°C (194 °F) for {POO, IP20 and NEMA 1. For IP54, the cut-out temperature is 80°C (176 °F). An

overtemperature can only be reset when the temperature of the heat-sink has fallen below 60°C (140 °F).

For the units mentioned below, the limits are as follows:

- VLT 8152, 380-480 V, cuts out at 75 °C (167 °F) and can be reset if the temperature is below 60 °C (140 °F).

- VLT 8202, 380-480 V, cuts out at 80 °C (176 °F) and can be reset if the temperature has fallen below 60° C (140 °F).



- VLT 8352, 380-480 V, cuts out at 105 °C (221 °F) and can be reset if the temperature has fallen

below 75° C (167 °F).

- VLT 8452-8652, 380-480 V, cuts out at 85 °C (185 °F) and can be reset if the temperature has fallen below 60° C (140 °F).

- VLT 8052-8152, 525-690 V, cuts out at 75 °C (167 °F) and can be reset if the temperature has fallen

below 60° C (140 °F).

VLT 8202-8402, 525-690 V, cuts out at 100°C (212 °F) and can be reset if the temperature has fallen

below 70° C (158 °F).

The frequency converter is protected against short-circuiting on motor terminals U, V, W.

The frequency converter is protected against earth fault on motor terminals U, V, W.

Monitoring of the intermediate circuit voltage ensures that the frequency converter cuts out if the intermediate circuit voltage gets too high or too low.

If a motor phase is missing, the frequency converter cuts out.

If there is a mains fault, the frequency converter is able to carry out a controlled decelleration.

If a mains phase is missing, the frequency converter will cut out or autoderate when a load is placed on the motor.




VLT® 8000 AQUA

Technical data, mains supply 3 x 200 - 240 V

According to international requirements

Output current4)

Output power (240 V)

Typical shaft output


Max. cable cross-section to

motor

and DC-bus

VLT type

[A]

MAX (60 s) [A]

Svcris) [kVA]

PVLT,N [kW]

PVLT,N [HP]

[mm2 HAWG]

Max. input current

Max. cable

cross-section power

Max. pre-fuses

Mains contactor

Efficiency3)

Weight IP 20

Weight IP 54

Power loss at

max. load. [W]

(200 V) (RMS)IL,N [A]

[mm2 ] /IAWG1 2)

(-1/UL1) [A]

[ Danfoss type]

[kg/Ibs]

[kg/lbs]

Total

8006 8008 8011

16.7 24.2 30.8

18.4 26.6 33.9

6.9 10.1 12.8

4.0 5.5 7.5

5 7.5 10

10/8 16/6 16/6

16.0 23.0 30.0

4/10 16/6 16/6

35/30 50 60

CI 6 CI 9 CI 16

0.95 0.95 0.95

23/51 23/51 23/51

35/77 35/77 38/84

194 426 545

Enclosure VLT type IP 20/ NEMA 1, IP 54/NEMA 12

1. For type of fuse, see section Fuses.

2. American Wire Gauge.

3. Measured using 30 m/100 ft screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.

4. Current ratings fulfill UL requirements for 208-240 V.






Output current4)

Output power

Typical shaft

WI output

Typical shaft

output

VLT type

IvaN [A]

(200-230 V)

IVLT, MAX (60 s)

[A] (200-230 A Ivu,N[A] (240 V)

lvt3, mAx (60 s)

[A] (240 V)

SVLT,N [kVA)

(240 V)

PVLT,N [kW]

PVLT,N [HP]

Max. cable

cross-section Copper

to motor and Aluminium6)

DC-bus [mm2

HAWG12) 5)

Min. cable cross-section to motor

and DC-bus [mm2 ]/[AWG]2)

Max. input current (200 V) (RMS)

IL,N[A]

Max. cable

cross-section Copper

power [mm 2 Aluminium6)

M AWG]2)

Max. pre-fuses [-]/UL1) [A]

[Danfoss type] Mains contactor

[AC value]

Efficiency3l

Weight IP

00/Chassis [kg/lbs]

Weight IP [kg/lbs]

20/NEMA 1

Weight IP 54 [kg/lbs]

Power loss at [W]

max. load.

VLT® 8000 AQUA

8016 8022 8027 8032 8042 8052 8062

46.2 59.4 74.8 88.0 115 143 170

50.6 65.3 82.3 96.8 127 158 187

46.0 59.4 74.8 88.0 104 130 154

50.6 65.3 82.3 96.8 115 143 170

19.1 24.7 31.1 36.6 41.0 52.0 61.0

11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45

15 20 25 30 40 50 60

16/6

16/6

35/2

35/2

35/2

35/2

50/0

50/0

70/1/0

95/3/051

95/3/0

90/250

mcm5)

120/4/0

120/300

mcm 5)

10/8 10/8 10/8 16/6 10/8 10/8 10/8

46.0 59.2 74.8 88.0 101.3 126.6 149.9

16/6

16/6

35/2

35/2

35/2

35/2

50/0

50/0

70/1/0

95/3/051

95/3/0

90/250

mcm

120/4/0

120/300

mcm 5)

60 80 125 125 150 200 250

CI 32

AC-1

CI 32

AC-1

CI 37

AC-1

CI 61

AC-1

CI 85 CI 85 CI 141

0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95

90/198 90/198 90/198

23/51 30/66 30/66 48/106 101/223 101/223 101/223

38/84 49/108 50/110 55/121 104/229 104/229 104/229

545 783 1042 1243 1089 1361 1613

Enclosure IP 00/IP 20/NEMA 1/IP 54/NEMA 12




4. Current ratings fulfill UL requirements for 208-240 V

5. Connection stud 1 x M8 / 2 x M8.

6. Aluminium cables with cross section above 35 mm2 must be connected by use of an Al-Cu connector.




VLT® 8000 AQUA



Output current

Output power



Max. cable cross-section

to motor

Max. input current

(RMS)

Max. cable

cross-section power

Max. pre-fuses

Mains contactor

Efficiency3)

Weight IP 20/NEMA 1

Weight IP 54/NEMA 12

Power loss at

max. load. [W]

Enclosure

VLT type 8006 8008 8011

IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 10.0 13.0 16.0

Ivcr, NtA.x (60 s) [A]

(380-440.V) 11.0 14.3 17.6

N [A] (441-480 V) 8.2 11.0 14.0

mAx (60 s) [A]

(441-480 V) 9.0 12.1 15.4

SVLT,N [kVA] (400 V) 7.2 9.3 11.5

SvLT,N [kVA] (460 V) 6.5 8.8 11.2

PVLT,N (kW] 4.0 5.5 7.5

PVLT,N [HP] 5 7.5 10

[mm2 ]/[AWG]2) 4) 4/10 4/10 4/10

IL,N [A] (380 V) 9.1 12.2 15.0

11_,N [A] (480 V) 8.3 10.6 14.0

[mm2 ]/[AWG] 2) 4) 4/10 4/10 4/10

[-]/ULft[A] 25/20 25/25 35/30

[Danfoss type] CI 6 CI 6 CI 6

0.96 0.96 0.96

[kg/lbs] 10.5/23 10.5/23 10.5/23

[kg/lbs] 14/31 14/31 14/31

Total 198 250 295

VLT type IP 20/NEMA 1/IP 54/NEMA 12




4. Max. cable cross section is the maximum possible cable cross section that can be fitted on the terminals.

Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.






Output current

w OS13

ED 0030

Output power

Typical shaft output I= Typical shaft output


motor and DC-bus, IP 20


motor and DC-bus, IP 54

Min. cable cross-section to

motor and DC-bus

Max. input current

(RMS)


power, IP 20


power, IP 54

Max. pre-fuses

Mains contactor

Efficiency at rated frequency

Weight IP 20/NEMA 1


Power loss at max. load.

Enclosure

VLT type

IvaN [A] (380-440 V)

Ivur, NtAx (60 s) [A]

(380-440 V)

IvaN[A] (441-480 V)

Ivor, mAx (60 s) [A]

(441-480 V)

SVLTN [kVA] (400 V)

SVLTN [kVA] (460 V)

PVLT,N [kW]

PVLT,N [HP]

[MM2] /[AWG12) 4)

Ernm211[AWG]2)

IL,N[A] (380 V)

ILN[A] (480 V)

[MM2] /[AWGF) 4)

[-]/UL1) [A]

[Danfoss type]

[kg/lbs]

[kg/lbs]

VLT® 8000 AQUA

8016 8022 8027 8032 8042

24.0 32.0 37.5 44.0 61.0

26.4 35.2 41.3 48.4 67.1

21.0 27.0 34.0 40.0 52.0

23.1 29.7 37.4 44.0 57.2

17.3 23.0 27.0 31.6 43.8

16.7 21.5 27.1 31.9 41.4

11 15 18.5 22 30

15 20 25 30 40

16/6 16/6 16/6 35/2 35/2

16/6 16/6 16/6 16/6 35/2

10/8 10/8 10/8 10/8 10/8

24.0 32.0 37.5 44.0 60.0

21.0 27.6 34.0 41.0 53.0

16/6 16/6 16/6 35/2 35/2

16/6 16/6 16/6 16/6 35/2

63/40 63/40 63/50 63/60 80/80

Cl 9 CI 16 CI 16 CI 32 CI 32

0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96 0.96

21/46 21/46 22/49 27/60 28/62

41/90 41/90 42/93 42/93 54/119

419 559 655 768 1065

IP 20/NEMA 1/ IP 54/NEMA 12




4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals. Max. cable cross section is the

maximum possible cable cross section that can be fitted on the terminals.







Output current

Output power



IltMW Max. cable

cross-section to motor

and DC-bus, IP 20

Max. cable

cross-section to motor

and DC-bus, IP 54

Min. cable cross-section

to motor and DC-bus

Max. input current

(RMS)

Max. cable

cross-section power,

IP 20

Max. cable

cross-section power,

IP 54

Max. pre-fuses

Mains contactor


Weight IP 20/NEMA 1


Power loss at max. load.

Enclosure

VLT® 8000 AQUA

VLT type 8052 8062 8072 8102 8122

IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V) 73.0 90.0 106 147 177

tytAx (60 s) [A]

(380-440 V) 80.3 99.0 117 162 195

Ivi_T,N[A] (441-480 V) 65.0 77.0 106 130 160

Ivur, mAx (60 s) [A]

(441-480 V) 71.5 84.7 117 143 176

SyLT,N [kVA] (400 V) 52.5 64.7 73.4 102 123

Svur,rsi [kVA' (460 V) 51.8 61.3 84.5 104 127

PVLTN [kW] 37 45 55 75 90

PVLT.N [HP] 50 60 75 100 125

EMM2YEAWGi2) 4) 61

35/2 50/0 50/0

120 /

250

mcm5)

120 /

250

mcm5)

35/2 50/0 50/0

150/ 300

mcm5)

150/ 300

mcm5)

[mm2] /[AWG12) 4) 10/8 16/6 16/6 25/4 25/4

IL N[A] (380 V) 72.0 89.0 104 145 174

IL,N[A] (480 V) 64.0 77.0 104 128 158

VTIM2HAWG12) 4) 6)

35/2 50/0 50/0

120 / 250

mcm

120 / 250

mcm

35/2 50/0 50/0

150 / 300

mcm

150 /

300

mcm

[- ] /UL') [A] 100/100 125/125 150/150 225/225 250/250

[ Danfoss type] CI 37 CI 61 C I 85 CI 85 CI 141

0.96 0.96 0.96 0.98 0.98

[kg/lbs] 41/90 42/93 43/96 54/119 54/119

[kg/lbs] 56/123 56/123 60/132 77/170 77/170

[W] 1275 1571 1322 1467 1766

IP 20/NEMA 1/IP 54/NEMA 12




4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals.

Max. cable cross section is the maximum possible cable cross section that can be fitted on the terminals.


5. DC connection 95 mm2/AWG 3/0.

6. Aluminium cables with cross-section above 35 mm2 must be connected by use of an Al-Cu connector.




COM

VLT® 8000 AQUA



Output

current

st.W.

VLT type

IVLT,N [A] (380-440 A

Ku, tom (60 s) [A] (380-440 V)

IvaN [A] (441-480 V)

Ivor, NtAx (60 s) (A] (441-480 V)

Output SVIZN [kVA] (400 V)

power

SVCrp [kVA] (460 V)

Typical shaft output (380-440 V) Pwr,N [kW]

Typical shaft output (441-480 V) PVLI,N [HP]

Max. cable cross-section to motor and

DC-bus [MM2]2) 4) 5)

Max. cable cross-section to motor and

DC-bus [AWG] 2) 4) 5)

Min. cable cross-section to motor and

DC-bus [MM2/AWG] 2) 4) 5)

Max. input IL,N[A] (380 V)

current

(RMS) ILN[Al (480 V)

Max. cable cross-section to power [mm2]2)

4) 5)

Max. cable cross-section to power (AWG12)

4) 5)

Max. pre-

fuses [-]/UL1) [A]

Mains [Danfoss type]

contactor

Weight

IP 00/

Chassis

Weight

IP 20/

NEMA 1

Weight

IP 54/

NEMA 12


Power loss

at max.

load.

8152 8202 8252 8302 8352

212 260 315 395 480

233 286 347 435 528

190 240 302 361 443

209 264 332 397 487

147 180 218 274 333

151 191 241 288 353

110 132 160 200 250

150 200 250 300 350

2x70 2x70 2x185 2x185 2x185

2x2/0 2x2/0 2x350 2x350 2x350

mcm mcm mcm mcm mcm

35/2 35/2 35/2 35/2 35/2

208 256 317 385 467

185 236 304 356 431

2x70 2x70 2x185 2x185 2x185

2x2/0 2x2/0 2x350 2x350 2x350

mcm mcm mcm mcm mcm

300/300 350/350 450/400 500/500 630/600

CI 141 CI 250EL CI

250EL

CI

300EL

CI

300EL

[kg/lbs] 82/181 91/201 112/247 123/271 138/304

[kg/lbs] 96/212 104/229 125/276 136/300 151/333

[kg/lbs] 96/212 104/229 125/276 136/300 151/333

0.98

2619 3309 4163 4977 6107

Enclosure IP 00/Chassis/IP 21/NEMA 1/IP 54/NEMA 12




4. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals. Max cable cross section is the



5. Connection bolt 1 x M10 / 2 x M10 (mains and motor), connection bolt 1 x M8 / 2 x M8 (DC-bus).






0033

VLT type

Output current IVLT,N [A] (380-440 V)

Ivur, MAX (60 s) [A] (380-440 \/)

IvaN [A] (441-480 V)

mAx (60 s) [A] (441-480 V)

Output power Svcr.N [kVA) (400 V)

SVULN [kVA) (480 V)

Typical shaft output (380-440 V) Pvcrki [kW]

41J Typical shaft output (441-480 A PvaN [HP]

Max. cable cross-section to motor and DC-bus

[mm2] 4) 5)

Max. cable cross-section to motor and DC-bus

[AWG] 4) 51

Max. input

current (RMS)

Max. cable cross

Max. cable cross

-section to power [MM2]4)

-section to power (AWG]2) 415)

luytAx [A] (380 V)

IL,K4Ax [A] (480 V)

8452

600

660

540

594

416

430

315

450

4 x 240

584

526

4 x 240

4 x 500 mcm

VLT® 8000 AQUA

8502

658

724

590

649

456

470

355

500

4 x 240

648

581

4 x 240

4 x 500 mcm

8602 8652

745 800

820 800

678 730

746 803

516 554

540 582

400 450

550/600 600

4 x 240 4 x 240

4 x 500 mcm 4 x 500 mcm 4 x 500 mcm 4 x 500 mcm

734

668

4 x 240

4 x 500 mcm

787

718

4 x 240

4 x 500 mcm

Max. pre-fuses

(mains)

Efficiency3)

Mains

contactor

[-]/UL [A]1 1 700/700 900/900 900/900 900/900

0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98

[Danfoss type] CI 300EL

Weight IP 00/

Chassis

Weight IP 20/

NEMA 1

Weight IP 54/

NEMA 12

Power loss at

max. load

Enclosure

[kg/lbs] 221/488

[kg/lbs] 263/580

[kg/lbs] 263/580

234/516

270/596

270/596

236/521

272/600

272/600

277/611

313/690

313/690

[W] 7630 7701 8879 9428

IP 00/Chassis/IP 21/NEMA 1/IP 54/NEMA 12




4. Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section. Max. cable cross section is the


5. Connection bolt, power supply, motor and load sharing: M10 (compression lug), 2 x M8 (box lug)






COCO

EA DODO

Output current IvaN [A] (550 V) 2.6 2.9 4.1 5.2 6.4 9.5 11.5

Iva Max (60 s) [A] (550 V) 2.9 3.2 4.5 5.7 7.0 10.5 12.7

IVCEN [A] (575 V) 2.4 2.7 3.9 4.9 6.1 9.0 11.0

IN/LT, MM (60 s) [A] (575 V) 2.6 3.0 4.3 5.4 6.7 9.9 12.1

*I= Output S V1J,N [kVA] (550 V) 2.5 2.8 3.9 5.0 6.1 9.0 11.0

SvurN [kVA] (575 \/) 2.4 2.7 3.9 4.9 6.1 9.0 11.0

Typical shaft output PATN [kW] 1.1 1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5

Typical shaft output PVLTN [HP] 1.5 2 3 4 5 7.5 10

Max. copper cable cross-section to motor and

loadsharing

[AWG]2) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

Rated Input IVLT,N [A] (550 V) 2.5 2.8 4.0 5.1 6.2 9.2 11.2

Current I VI.T.11 [A] (600 V) 2.2 2.5 3.6 4.6 5.7 8.4 10.3

Max.copper cable cross-section, power

[mm2] 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

[AWG]Z) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

Max. prefuses (mains) 14 -1/UL [A] 3 4 5 6 8 10 15

Efficiency 0.96

Weight IP 20

/ NEMA 1

VLT® 8000 AQUA

VLT type 8002 8003 8004 8005 8006 8008 8011

[mm2] 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

10.5/ 10.5/ 10.5/ 10.5/ 10.5/ 10.5/ 10.5/ [kg/lbs]

23 23 23 23 23 23 23

Estimated power loss at max. load (550 V) [W] 65 73 103 131 161 238 288

Estimated power loss at max. load (600V) [W] 63 71 102 129 160 236 288

Enclosure IP 20/NEMA 1


2. American Wire Gauge (AWG).

3. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted into the terminals to comply with IP20. Always

comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.




VLT® 8000 AQUA

III Technical data, mains supply 3 x 525 - 600 V


Output current 1\43,N [A) (550 V)

Iva, MAX (60 s) [A] (550V)

IVIZN [A] (575 V)

IvUl", MAX (60 s) [A] (575 V)

Output

Typical shaft output PVLT,N [kW)

Typical shaft output PVI.TN [HP]

SVU,N [kVA] (550 V)

SVLT,N [kVA) (575 V)

Max. copper cable

cross-section to motor [mm2]

and loadsharing4l

[AWG]21

Min. cable

cross-section to motor [mm2]

and loadsharing3)

[AWG]21

Rated Input Current

I vurNEA] (550 V)

Ivur.N[A] (600 V)

Max copper cable [mm2]

cross section, power4l [AWG]

Max. prefuses (mains)141/UL (A)

Efficiency

Weight IP 20/NEMA 1 [kg/lbs]

Estimated power loss at max. load (550 V) [W]

Estimated power loss at max. load (600 V) [W]

8016 8022 8027 8032 8042

18 23 28 34 43

20 25 31 37 47

17 22 27 32 41

19 24 30 35 45

17 22 27 32 41

17 22 27 32 41

11 15 18.5 22 30

15 20 25 30 40

16 16 16 35 35

6 6 6 2 2

0.5 0.5 0.5 10 10

20 20 20 8 8

18 22 27 33 42

16 21 25 30 38

16 16 16 35 35

6 6 6 2 2

20 30 35 45 60

0.96

23/

51

23/

51

23/

51

30/ 30/

66 66

451

446

576

576

702

707

852 1077

838 1074

8052 8062 8072

54 65 81

59 72 89

52 62 77

57 68 85

51 62 .77

52 62 77

37 45 55

50 60 75

50 50 50

1/0 1/0 1/0

16 16 16

6 6 6

53 63 79

49 38 72

50 50 50

1/0 1/0 1/0

75 90 100

48/ 48/ 48/

106 106 106

1353 1628 2029

1362 1624 2016

Enclosure IP 20/NEMA 1


2. American Wire Gauge (AWG).

3. Min. cable cross-section is the smallest cable cross-section allowed to be fitted into the terminals to comply with IP 20.


4. Aluminium cables with cross-section above 35 mm2 must be connected by use of an Al-Cu connector.






Output current

Output



motor


loadsharinq and brake

Rated input current


power supply


motor and power supply


brake and loadsharinq

Max. pre-fuses (mains) ( -(/UL

EfficiencY3

Power loss

Weight

Weight

Weight

VLT® 8000 AQUA

VLT type 8052 8062 8072 8102 8122

kil TN IA1 (525-550 V) 56 76 90 113 137

Iv, T MAX (60 s) IA1(525-550 V) 62 84 99 124 151

KM TN (Al (551-690 V) 54 73 86 108 131

MT kw (60 s) (Al (551-690 V) 59 80 95 119 144

SV1 TN (kVA) (550 V) 53 72 86 108 131

SyrrN (kVA) (575 V) 54 73 86 108 130

S \A TN (kVA) (690 V) 65 87 103 129 157

(kW) (550 V) 37 45 55 75 90

(HP) (575 V) 50 60 75 100 125

(kWl (690 V) 45 55 75 90 110

(mm2]4.5

(AWG12.4.5

2 x 70

2 x 2/0

(mm2]4.5

(AWG12.4.5

2 x 70

2 x 2/0

k N (Al (550 V) 60 77 89 110 130

ILN (A) (575 V) 58 74 85 106 124

ILN (Al (690 V) 58 77 87 109 128

(mm2]4.5

lAWG12.4.5

2 x 70

2 x 2/0

(mm2]4.5

IAWG12.4.5

35

2

(mm2]4.5

lAWG12A5

10

8

(Al1 125 160 200 200 250

0.97 0.97 0.98 0.98 0.98

1W) 1458 1717 1913 2262 2662

IP 00 (kg) 82

IP 21/Nema1 [kill 96

IP 54/Nemal 2 (kg) 96

Enclosure IP 00 IP 21/Nema 1 and IP 54/Nemal2

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses


3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.

4. Max. cable cross-section is the maximum possible cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals. Min. cable cross-section is the minimum

allowed cross-section. Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.

5. Connection bolt 1 x M10 / 2 x M10 (mains and motor), connection bolt 1 x M8 / 2 x M8 (DC -bus).




VLT® 8000 AQUA



Output current

Output



to motor


to loadsharinq and brake

Rated input current


Power supply


motor and power supply


brake and loadsharinq

Max. pre-fuses (mains)

I-1/UL

Efficiency3

Power loss PM

Weight IP 00 [kg]

Weight IP 21/Nema1 [kg)

Weight IP 54/Nema12 [kql

Enclosure IP 00, IP 21/Nema 1 and IP 54/Nema12

VLT type

T N [Al (525-550 V)

is&T, MAX (60 s) [A)

(525-550 v)

lyrrN [Al (551-690 V)

Ivo-. MAX (60 s) (A)

(551-690 V)

Svi TN fkVA1 (550 V)

Syi T N IkVA1 (575 V)

SVI TN IkVAI (690 V)

[kW' (550 V)

[HP[ (575 V)

IkW1 (690 V) [mm214.6

lAWG12.4.5

[mm2rie

(AWG12.4.5

l N [Al (550 A l N (575 V)

ILN (690 A Lrnm214.6

[AwG12.4.5

imm2y1,6

lAWG12.4.5

imm94,6

(AWG12.4.5

8152 8202 8252 8302 8352 8402

162 201 253 303 360 418

178 221 278 333 396 460

155 192 242 290 344 400

171 211 266 319 378 440

154 191 241 289 343 398

154 191 241 289 343 398

185 229 289 347 411 478

110 132 160 200 250 315

150 200 250 300 350 400

132 160 200 250 315 400

2 x 70

2 x 2/0

2 x 185

2 x 350 mcm

2 x 70

2 x 2/0

2 x 185

2 x 350 mcm

158 198 245 299 355 408

151 189 234 286 339 390

155 197 240 296 352 400

2 x 70

2 x 2/0

2 x 185

2 x 350 mcm

35

2

10

8

315 350 350 400 500 550

0,98

3114 3612 4293 5156 5821 6149

82 91 112 123 138 151

96 104 125 136 151 165

96 104 125 136 151 165

1. For type of fuse see section Fuses


3. Measured using 30 m screened motor cables at rated load and rated frequency.

4. Max. cable cross-section is the maximum possible cable cross-section allowed to be fitted on the terminals. Min. cable cross-section is the minimum

allowed cross-section. Always comply with national and local regulations on min. cable cross-section.

5. Connection bolt 1 x M10 / 2 x M10 (mains and motor), connection bolt 1 x M8 / 2 x M8 (DC-bus).




VLT® 8000 AQUA

Fuses UL compliance

To comply with ULicUL approvals, pre-fuses according to the table below must be used.

200-240 V

VLT Bussmann SIBA Littel fuse Ferraz-Shawmut

8006 KTN-R30 5017906-032 KLN-R30 _

ATM-R30 or A2K-30R 8008 KTN-R50 5012406-050 KLN-R50 A2K-50R 8011, 8016 KTN-R60 5014006-063 KLN-R60 A2K-60R 8022 KTN-R80 5014006-080 KLN-R80 A2K-80R

8027, 8032 KTN-R125 2028220-125 KLN-R125 A2K-125R

8042 FWX-150 2028220-150 1_25S-150 A25X-150

8052 FWX-200 2028220-200 L25S-200 A25X-200

8062 FWX-250 2028220-250 L25S-250 A25X-250

380-480 V

VLT Bussmann SIBA Littel fuse Ferraz-Shawmut

8006 KTS-R20 5017906-020 KLS-R20 ATM-R20 or A6K-20R



8016, 8022 KTS-R40 5014006-040 KLS-R40 A6K-40R

8027 KTS-R50 5014006-050 KLS-R50 A6K-50R

8032 KTS-R60 5014006-063 KLS-R60 A6K-60R

8042 KTS-R80 2028220-100 KLS-R80 A6K-80R

8052 KTS-R100 2028220-125 KLS-R100 A6K-100R

8062 KTS-R125 2028220-125 KLS-R125 A6K-125R

8072 KTS-R150 2028220-160 KLS-R150 A6K-150R

8102 FWH-220 2028220-200 L50S-225 A50-P225

8122 FWH-250 2028220-250 L50S-250 A50-P250

8152* FWH-300/170M3017 2028220-315 L50S-300 A50-P300

8202* FWH-350/170M3018 2028220-315 L50S-350 A50-P350

8252' FWH-400/170M4012 206xx32-400 L50S-400 A50-P400

8302' FWH-500/170M4014 206xx32-500 L50S-500 A50-P500

8352* FWH-600/170M4016 206xx32-600 L50S-600 A50-P600

* Circuit Breakers manufactured by General Electric, Cat. No. SKHA36AT0800 with the rating plug listed

below can be used to meet UL requirement.

8152 rating plug No. SRPK800 A 300 8202 rating plug No. SRPK800 A 400 8252 rating plug No. SRPK800 A 400 8302 rating plug No. SRPK800 A 500 8352 rating plug No. SRPK800 A 600




VLT® 8000 AQUA

525-600 V

Bussmann SIBA Littel fuse Ferraz-Shawmut

8002 KTS-R3 5017906-004 KLS-R003 A6K-3R

8003 KTS-R4 5017906-004 KLS-R004 A6K-4R

8004 KTS-R5 5017906-005 KLS-R005 A6K-5R

8005 KTS-R6 5017906-006 KLS-R006 A6K-6R

8006 KTS-R8 5017906-008 KLS-R008 A6K-8R

8008 KTS-R10 5017906-010 KLS-R010 A6K-10R

8011 KTS-R15 5017906-016 KLS-R015 A6K-15R

8016 KTS-R20 5017906-020 KLS-R020 A6K-201R

8022 KTS-R30 5017906-030 KLS-R030 A6K-30R

8027 KTS-R35 5014006-040 KLS-R035 A6K-351R

8032 KTS-R45 5014006-050 KLS-R045 A6K-451R

8042 KTS-R60 5014006-063 KLS-R060 A6K-60R

8052 KTS-R75 5014006-080 KLS-R075 A6K-80R

8062 KTS-R90 5014006-100 KLS-R090 A6K-90R

8072 KTS-R100 5014006-100 KLS-R100 A6K-100R

525-600 V (UL) and 525-690 V (CE) drives

Bussmann SIBA FERRAZ-SHAWMUT

8052 170M3013 2061032,125 6.6URD3ODO8A0125

8062 170M3014 2061032,16 6.6URD3ODO8A0160

8072 170M3015 2061032,2 6.6URD3ODO8A0200

8102 170M3015 2061032,2 6.6URD3ODO8A0200

8122 170M3016 2061032,25 6.6URD30D08A0250

8152 170M3017 2061032,315 6.6URD3ODO8A0315

8202 170M3018 2061032,35 6.6URD30D08A0350

8252 170M4011 2061032,35 6.6URD30008A0350

8302 170M4012 2061032,4 6.6URD30008A0400

8352 170M4014 2061032,5 6.6URD30008A0500

8402 170M5011 2062032,55 6.6URD32D08A550

KTS-fuses from Bussmann may substitute KTN for 240 V drives.

FWH-fuses from Bussmann may substitute FWX for 240 V drives.

KLSR fuses from LITTEL FUSE may substitute KLNR fuses for 240 V drives.

L5OS fuses from LITTEL FUSE may substitute L255 fuses for 240 V drives.

A6KR fuses from FERRAZ SHAWMUT may substitute A2KR for 240 V drives.

A5OX fuses from FERRAZ SHAWMUT may substitute A25X for 240 V drives.




VLT® 8000 AQUA

Non UL compliance

If UUcUL is not to be complied with, we recommend the above mentioned fuses or:

VLT 8006-8032 200-240 V type gG

VLT 8042-8062 200-240 V type gR

VLT 8006-8072 380-480 V type gG

VLT 8102-8122 380-480 V type gR

VLT 8152-8352 380-480 V type gG

VLT 8452-8652 380-480 V type gR

VLT 8002-8072 525-600 V type gG

Not following the recommendation may result

in damage of the drive in case of malfunction.

Fuses must be designed for protection in a circuit

capable of supplying a maximum of 100000 Arms

(symmetrical), 500 V /600 V maximum.




VLT® 8000 AQUA

Mechanical dimensions

All the below listed measurements are in mm/in

VLT type A B C a b aa/bb Type

IP 00/Chassis 200 - 240 V

8042 - 8062 800/31.5 370/14.6 335/13.2 780/30.7 270/10.6 225/8.9 B

IP 00 380 - 480 V

8152 - 8202 1046/41.2 408/16.1 373/14.71) 1001/39.4 304/12.0 225/8.9 J

8252 - 8352 1327/52.2 408/16.1 373/14.71) 1282/50.5 304/12.0 225/8.9 J

8452 - 8652 1547/60.9 585/23.0 494/19.41) 1502/59.1 304/12.0 225/8.9 (aa) I

IP 00 525 - 690 V

8052 - 8202 1046/41.1 408/16 37311/14.7 1001/39.4 304/12 225/8.7 J

8252 - 8402 1327/52.2 408/16 3731114.7 1282/50.4 304/12 225/8.7 J

IP 20/NEMA 1 200

8006 - 8011

- 240 V

560/22.0 242/9.5 260/10.2 540/21.3 200/7.9 200/7.9

8016 - 8022 700/27.6 242/9.5 260/10.2 680/26.8 200/7.9 200/7.9 nnn n

01_141 - Olh0C OUL1/ 0 1 .0 0l.10/ IL. I LUC), 11.7 1 OV10V. 1 Z 1 LW I V .C1 Ll..11.11 1 L;

8042 - 8062 954/37.6 370/14.6 335/13.2 780/30.7 270/10.6 225/8.9 E

.

c -

IP 20/NEMA 1 380

8006 - 8011

- 480 V

395/15.6 220/8.7 200/7.9 384/15.1 200/7.9 100/3.9 C

8016 - 8027 560/22.0 242/9.5 260/10.2 540/21.3 200/7.9 200/7.9

8032 - 8042 70027.6 242/9.5 260/10.2 680/26.8 200/7.9 200/7.9 D "t";

8052 - 8072 800/31.5 308/12.1 296/11.7 780/30.7 270/10.6 200/7.9 Dot 8102 - 8122 800/31.5 370/14.6 335/13.2 780/30.7 330/13.0 225/8.9 D

IP 21/NEMA 1 380-480 V

8152 - 8202 1208/47.5 420/16.5 373/14.71) 1154/45.4 304/12.0 225/8.9 J

8452 - 8652 2000/78.7 600/23.6 494/19.41) 225/8.9 (aa) H

IP 20/NEMA 1 525 - 690 V

8002 - 8011 395/15.55 220/8.66 200/7.87 384/15.12 200/7.87 100/3.94 C

8016 - 8027 560/22.05 242/9.53 260/10.23 540/21.26 200/7.87 200/7.87 D

8032 - 8042 700/27.56 242/9.53 260/10.23 680/26.77 200/7.87 200/7.87 D

8052 - 8072 800/31.50 308/12.13 296/11.65 780/30.71 270/10.63 200/7.87

IP 21/NEMA 1 525 - 690 V

8052 - 8202 1208/47.5 420/16.5 3731)/14.7 1154/45.4 304/12 225/8.7 J

8252 - 8402 1588/62.5 420/16.5 3731)/14.7 1535/60.4 304712 225/8.7 J

IP 54/NEMA 12 200 - 240 V A B C D a b aa/bb Type

8006 - 8011 810/31.9 350/13.8 280/11.0 70/2.8 560/22.0 326/12.8 200/7.9 F

8016 - 8032 940/37.0 400/15.7 280/11.0 70/2.8 690/27.2 375/14.8 200/7.9 F

8042 - 8062 937/36.9 495/9.5 421/16.6 - 830/32.7 374/14.8 225/8.9 G

IP 54/NEMA 12 380 - 480 V

8006 - 8011 530/20.9 282/11.1 195/7.7 85/3.3 330/13.0 258/10.2 100/3.9 F

8016 - 8032 810/31.9 350/13.8 280/11.0 70/2.8 560/22.0 326/12.8 200/7.9 F

8042 - 8072 940/37.0 400/15.7 280/11.0 70/2.8 690/27.2 375/14.8 200/7.9 F

8102 - 8122 940/37.0 400/15.7 360/14.2 70/2.8 690/27.2 375/14.8 225/8.9 F

8152 - 8202 1208/47.5 420/16.3 373/14.71) - 1154/45.4 304/12.0 225/8.9 J

8252 - 8352 1588/62.5 420/16.3 373/14.71) - 1535/60.4 304/12.0 225/8.9 J

8452 - 8652 2000/78.7 600/23.6 494/19.41) - 225/8.9 (aa) H

IP 54/NEMA 12 525 - 690 V

8052 - 8202 1208/47.5 420/16.5 3731)14.7 1154/45.4 304/12 225/8.7 J

8252 - 8402 1588/62.5 420/16.5 3731)/14.7 1535/60.4 304/12 225/8.7 J

1. With disconnect add 44 mm/1.7 in aa: Minimum space above enclosure

bb: Minimum space below enclosure




VLT® 8000 AQUA

Mechanical dimensions B

Al

81

VLT 8100-8125

VLT 8150-8300

Type B, IPOO

With option and enclosure IP20

Type C, IP20

5

Type D, IP20 '8 5

Type E, IP20

Type F, IP54

Type G, IP54

VLT 8100-8125

VLT 8150-8300

016

176FA224.10




VLT® 8000 AQUA

Mechanical dimensions (cont.)

IIIF26.10

Type H, IP 20, IP 54

Type I, IP 00

I 76FA2134.10

1752A894.12

Type J, IP 00, IP 21, IP 54




VLT® 8000 AQUA

Index Technical data, mains supply 3 x 200 - 240 V 23, 24

Technical data, mains supply 3 x 380 - 480 V 25, 27, 28

A Technical data, mains supply 3 x 525 - 600 V 30, 31

analog inputs 20 Type code ordering number string 2

analog outputs 20

AEO - Automatic Energy Optimization 7

C Cable lengths and cross-sections 22

Control characteristics 21

Control principle 7

D Digital inputs 19

E External 24 Volt DC supply 21

Externals 21

F

Fuses 34

G General technical data 18

H

Harmonic fitter 16

Harmonic fitters 18

M

Mains supply 18

Max imbalance of supply voltage 18

0 Output data 19

P Protection 22

Pulse input 19

R Relay outputs. 20

RS 485 serial communication 20




aInnevatoe, 1. Prwersion Trchnolav TERASAK

TemBreak Plus MCCBs

XS400SE and XH400SE selectivity series electronic

MI

SE Upstream Selectivity breakers.

SE series provides enhanced

selectivity.

Electronic trip unit with Long,

Short and Instantaneous

adjustments. 0 3:1 ratio between upstream &

downstream MCCBs.

0 Adjustment range 50 - 100 % of nominal current rating.

Ics rating is 50 % of Icu. 0 Standards IEC 60947-2/ 12t switch to assist in obtaining total selectivity.

AS/NZS 3947-2.

0 True RMS monitoring.

XS400SE (50 kA) 3 pole Ampere

I rating Min Max Cat. No.

250 125 250 - _

XS400SE-2503

1 400 250 400 XS400SE 4003,

XH400SE (65 kA) 3 pole

250 125 250 XH400SE 250 3

400 250 400 XH400SE '400 3

XS400SE (50 kA) 4 pole Ampere rating Min Max Cat. No.

250 125 250 XS4005E 250 4

400 250 400 XS400SE 400 4

XH400SE (65 kA) 4 pole

250 125 250 XH400SE 250 4

400 250 400 XH400SE 400 4

Dimensions (mm) Description Height Width Depth kg

XS/XH400SE 3 pole 260 140 103 5

XS/XH400SE 4 pole 260 185 103 6.2

d

° P ° P

Short circuit capacity AC use Model Icu Ics Voltage

XS400SE 50 kA 25 kA 400/415 V

XH400SE 65 kA 33 kA 400/415 V

OCR options (factory fitted) Description Code

Pre-trip alarm LSIP

Fault indicators Fl

Special LTD curves

Cross reference table Section

Accessories 6

Selectivity & cascade

Application data

13

13

Characteristic curves 7

Motor Starting 13

Connection & mounting details 7 and 8

Detailed dimensions

- MCCB only 7

- motor operators 7

Product extensions

Chassis (MHC, UHC)

OCR checker

Section

6

7

OCR adjustments

TemCurve

Residual current relays

Base standards

IEC 60947-2

BS EN 60947 Part 2

VDE 0660 Part 1

7

13

11

Approvals

ASTA/UK, Aust. standards

Marine

Lloyds R/UK

AS/NZS 3947-2 Aust./NZ ABS/USA

GL/GERMANY

Notes: MiAvailableonindentonly. BV/FRANCE

5 -32



0 Innorolon In Protection Tecknolopy TERASAKI

TemBreak Ratings

(4) TERASAla

Type Ampere frame Number of poles

Outside view

Notes:

') Adjustable ground fault available on indent,

fitted externally.

') LED indicators only or LED contacts, please specify.

Supplied as standard. 0 Optional standard.

Yes or available. - Not available

CI Available on indent only

Rated current (A):In Nominaliated current

ASR - t_qustaol., sed-vj ralge -. Rated or ert at 43 C

AC RATED. INSULATION VOLTAGE DM. .

AC RATED BREAKING (kA)

tiC 609472 (icu) IE,C 60947-2(lcs1 DOV

AS/N2S 3847-2 Hal AS/N /S 3947-211es] 1000V

Note: Rated lmpu:se wow:to voltam! tNJV Uimp (kV) is 8kV all XS, X! aid Xi( MCCITs

4605

240:: without Ina 240-69011

DC RATED BREAKING 250V

CAPACT I Y (kA) 125V

1

RATED SHORT TIME CURRENT RMS (kAl flew)

.0IMENSIONS (mm)

X11125PJ XH160PJ XH400PJ XH250PJ XH630PJ

3P 4P 3P

250A

I 3P 41,

63p 30A

4P r72

125A : 160A 50A I 400A

:NRC

20 12.5 20 160

2 20 32

50 32 SO

63 40 62

100 63 100

125 80 125.. 690 - 690

Weight (kg) marked standard type

'CONNECTION AND MOUNTINGS

front terminal screw

connect (I CI attached flat bar

soldedess terminal (PWC)

rear. , bolt stud

connect (RC) fiat bar stud

plug-in (PM) for switchboard

,for distribution hoard

craw-out ;DOI - STANDARD l LAIURES

contact in(liCaif. .

914

25,13

250 125 250 1 630

400 250 4IX)

;5/7 5

23/i

I ICU /ICS I .ICU /ICS

18:9 819 45:23

. 42:15 33/15 65/33 4/171 95:43

. ............ 65/5 :I 85/5C

65'50 100/50

85/50 8%150 125/153

42a I

.50:59 50-50

IWO

40

43

42;21

50:50

sof so

85:50

40

40

,47P1

65;:i15 . .

65/50

a 90

l!

120 '05 143 +x0 185 143

"65 760 250

103 133 103

124 145 ;5 2 25 41 G 47

. 40

40

(0.3 sec)

40

40

6:

7:0 213

:03

145

9

280

:15

hlar)

trip button `PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS'

Electronic type" Adjustable LTD. STD & INS I

Adjustable GET-or Adjustable PTA (opus-) j Trip indicators (option) (contacts)

Thermal-magnetic type

thermal and fixed magnetic trips

[ thermal and adjustable magnetic trios

adjustable thermal and fixed magnaic nips

I adjustable thermal and magnetic trips

ACCESSORILS (option)

Internally .loll: diary 5m;:.11

mounted alrI r I switch

snuill LAP)

undervottage trip Externally motor operator

CODE'

AUX

ALT

SHI..

UVT

MOT

mounted operating breaker mounted :ype TFJ

handle variable depth type XEIT

IP 65 handle variable depth roc ILK

extension handle

mechanical interlock front typc

mechanical interlock mar type

mechanical interlock cable type

key interlock

handle holder

handle lock

captive padlock adectimelt terminal cover l'ont ctxtiwcl type

terrnhal cover reepug-in type

interpole barriers

accessories lead terminals

- OCR s:Ialing.kit ,

5 -12

:

e

:



aInsurraren Le Preeerriam Technology TERASAK

XH800PJ 800A

4P

XH400PE XH630PE IXH800PE 400A 630A 1 800A

3P 4P nJ 3P 4P El 1 3P

XS400SE XH400SE 400A 4005

4P i

3P 4P 3P 4P ID

XS630SE XH630SE 6005 630A

3P 4P 3P 4P ED

NRC ASR NRC ASR NRC ASR NRC ' ASR NRC NRC NRC AS

nax Mg I 11 n r_rnax min max

800 500 800 630 315 630 800 4(9/ 800 160 80 160 160 80 1 30 315 530

250 125 '250

NRC ASV, :11FI Max

30 3:5 630

!CIVICS

-- 690 690 '1 7- --r- -v. .i90. .

. .- , .

680 - 690 ' 1C.11/16S ;albs - 1C1;11CS ICU /ICS _ iduics icuRsT: - --

. -

43/23 20/10 1.'20/10 2610 . -

65/33 I 42/21 I- 42/21

2- 11/10

42/21 r 30/15

! 18/9 - 231:0

35/18

' grg6 - f .6.SiSii rt ; i .65/50 .; ... i '65/50; ! '65/50 l'. 42/21

s 65/33' ' 6F:33

- 42/21

BSA 3 65/50 : 65/50 .

17166- -/b 7 7 -- 7 Tsisci . i 65/50 . :1 65/50

...: 50/25

.! 50/25. .. , , 15/33 ,TIST.6.7777--- tiii,) 1.lowso ... :.lowso

s : 10 le

40 - 40 40

5 ,,0 3 ,..e:j ': 0 (0.314:cj : '.:0 (03 'Al :

.,0/75

50/25._

50/25

85/43

10 5

65/33 -65/33

100 /50

5 /3 3 sec)

210 las 1 210 200 ! 210 780 1 140

7;3 730 1 273

133 103 103

.273

105

; 260

-C3 ; 14 145 14n

12 97 122 48 9 115 48 62, 96

o (Bar) (Bar)

O

0

10 I33 secl

210 7!01 210

700 273

103 103 ;03

13' 143 145,

67 48 62 96 12 96 17

--

- 1 1-- î 46

I

-

i _

I

:

'xi

:

5 -



TERASAK1 Section 7 Innevaion Pram-don Tech,. logy

MCCB operational characteristics & dimensions Page

Thermal - magnetic MCCB characteristics Time / current characteristics thermal - magnetic MCCBs

Electronic MCCB characteristics - settings PTA - Pre-trip alarm option GF - Ground fault / 4th CT option LED trip indication options Time / current characteristics electronic MCCBs

OCR checker for electronic MCCBs

Tem Curve selectivity software MCCB dimensions with and without motors fitted AC Watts loss - 3 pole MCCBs

7 - 2 to 7 - 4

7 - 5 to 7 - 10 7 - 11 to 7 - 14 7 - 15 to 7 - 19 7 - 16 to 7 - 19 7 - 18 to 7 - 19 7 - 20 to 7 - 22

7 - 23 7 - 24

7 - 25 to 7 - 50 7 - 51

7 - 1



TERASAK1 Innovalem G Prolerrina Terchnoluzy

MCCB type

XS125CS, XS125NS

LXS125CJ, XS125N1

1XH125NJ, XH125PJ, TL100N1

1X1-1160P1

MCCB Technical data Thermal Magnetic MCCBs

Thermal-Magnetic MCCBs are available from 125 AF to 800 AF. Depending on the type of MCCB thermal

and/or magnetic trip setting may be adjustable.

Fixed thermal

0

Adjustable thermal

Fixed magnetic

0..

0

Adjustable magnetic

XE225NC

0

XS25ONJ; XH25ONJ

XH250PJ

XS400CJ, XS400NJ, XH40013J, TL250N1

XS630CJ, XS63ONJ, XH630PJ

XS8OONJ

XH800P1

Note: Yes

- No

0

Access to setting dials

From 125 AF to 250 AF the thermal adjustment is visible from the front of the MCCB. At 400 AF and above a protective cover must be

removed to gain access to the settings. To achieve access to the settings, the cover screw under the 'sealed' label must be removed.

To adjust the individual trip settings, turn the setting dial with a flat bladed screwdriver.

Once set, secure the cover and apply a new sealing label.

.1;

XH25ONJ

7 - 2

XS400NJ XS400NJ (cover removed)



MCCB Technical data

Thermal Adjustment TemBreak MCCBs have a wide thermal adjustment range, one of

the largest on the market. The rated current 'Ir' is continuously

adjustable from 63 % to 100 % of its nominal current in'. There

are three main points of calibration marked at 63 %, 80 % and

100 %, as shown in the diagram below.

0.63 0.8 1.0

Thermal adjustment range

Examples

Current x In

TERASAK Inner...Ion in Pr ...wino Technalogy

Magnetic Adjustment The magnetic adjustment is available on MCCBs of 400 AF and

above. The magnetic setting 'Im' is continuously adjustable from

500 % to 1000 % of its rated current 'In. There are five main

points of calibration marked as multiples of In; 5, 6, 7.1, 8.5

and 10. These are shown in the diagram below.

Magnetic adjustment range

1. XS125NJ/125A MCCB set at Ir = 0.8, the rated current is calculated as 125 x 0.8 = 100 A

2. XS400NJ/400A MCCB set at Im = 6, the magnetic setting is calculated as 400 x 6 = 2400 A

3. XS63ONJ/630A MCCB set at Ir = 0.8 and Im = 5.0

The rated current is calculated as 630 x 0.8 = 504 A

The magnetic setting is calculated as 630 x 5 = 3150 A

Note that the magnetic setting is a multiple of the nominal current In and not the rated current Ir.

All thermal and magnetic trip settings are expressed as AC RMS values.

All MCCBs are calibrated at 45 'C unless otherwise specified.

Breakers with adjustable magnetic trip

Rated Magnetic trip current (A)

Breaker current (A) Scale 10 8.5

XS400CJ 250 2500 2125

IXS400NJ 400 4000 3400

XH400PJ 400

XS630CJ

XS63ONJ

X/1630PJ

XS800NJ

XE18001)J

4000

400

630

800

800

4000

6300

6300

8000

7.1 6 5

1775 1500 1250

2840 2400 2000

2840

2840

4473

4473

6800

2400

2400

3780

3780

4800

2000

2000

3150

3150

4000

4000

Note: Settings; 3-poles can be adjusted simultaneously with one adjustment dial.

--,

7 - 3



aInnen... in Proirviow Trekno log TERASAK1

MCCB Technical data

Time/current characteristic curves

3

2

50 40 30

20

10

4

3

2

50 40 30

20

10 8

5 4

3

2

1

0.8 06 0.5 0.4 0.3

0.2

0.1 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04 003

0.02

0.01 0.008 000E 0 005

z Ma

Mln

22E E2EEEEEEEI Hill Percent Rated Current

Example 1

The XS25ONJ set at its maximum thermal setting of

250A experiences an overload of 1000A. What would

be the tripping time?

Solution

As the axis are 'percent' rated current the overload as

a percentage to rated current is

100 A = 400 %

250

The maximum and minimum on the curve are the

tolerance bands. Therefore at 400 % overload the

tripping time would be as follows:

Maximum trip time - 30 seconds

Minimum trip time - 10 seconds

Average trip time - 20 seconds

Due to strict quality control of the manufacturing and

calibration processes, the characteristic curve of most

MCCBs will follow the 'average' curve within the

tolerance band.

Ambient compensating curves Example 2

130

0)

cf,2' 120

110

C cu

4, 100

93%

90 Calibrated at 40 °C - 0

45 °C - 5

I I 1

60-250A mu.) Calibrated temperature

160-250A(min.)

10 20 30 40 50 15 25 35 45 55

Ambient temperature (°C)

60 65

The XS25ONJ is calibrated at 250 A for 45 'C ambient.

If the temperature rose to 55 'C what effect would

this have?

Solution

At 55 'C the ambient compensating factor is 93 %,

i.e. 250 x 0.93 = 232.5 A

In other words the XS25ONJ would act as an MCCB set

at 232.5 A, in 55 'C.



MCCB Technical data

XS125CS, XS125NS


I 3

2

sa 40 30

20

to

8

6 5 4

3

2

1

50 ao 30

20

10 8

6

5 4

3

2

1

0.8 06 0.5 0.4 0.3

02

0 1

0.08 0 MI

I Magnetic trip current

Rated current Wpm& trip wawa (A) (A)

I 56 208.42 I 20 260.52 I 25 325165

32 I

420.84 40 520:104

I 50 650s130 i 8202164

1040.208 1

63 1 ao

100 1300.260 125 1550.310

Max

Min

1

1

I

3

,

1 20-100A

1

, au

I

:

0.05 D.04

0.03

0.02

1

1

1

I

0.01 Ace

l 000wS

I

III it. +,If Percent Rated Current

Ambient compensating curves

140

130

120

110

1-6) 100 a-

90

80

Calibrated at 40 °C - 0 45 °C - 5

16. 50. 63 BOA

20. 1000 I I

1

Calibrated temperature

25. 32.50A

25A

10 20 30 40 50 60

15 25 35 45 55 65

TERASAK1 Inwevalortl. Prrsteetiew Trelmoloo

XS125CJ, XS125NJ, XH125NJ, XH125NJ Time/current characteristic curves

4 3

2

1 50 ao 30

20

10 a

6 5

3

2

1

SO 40

20

10 6

8 5 4

3

2

1

0.8 0.5

0.5 0.4 0.3

0.2

01 0.05 Doe

Magnetic trip current

Rated current (A)

Magnetic trip coma (A)

260.52 20 32

50

420.84 650.130

63 820:164 100 1300.260 125 1550.310

IM=11111111111111111111MMEMI

Nk1111111111 l l hik.30

Alin

11 1 111

1

'

I

1 1

f 20,32,50,83,

'

100A

I250

1-

1,

0.05 0.04

0.03

1

0.02 1

0.01

1

1

008 008 I

005

2 2 ? ',:.1 F 3 3 3 & 3 33331 3 lif ff 111, Percent Rated Current


150

140

130

rn 120

92

;- 110 0

100

90

80

H 1 1

50A. 20A OW) I I

1 1 130 (m."

I 1

1 .00.324 In..)

1 \T I

125A 11111/ 0

I 1

I 1

I A Calibrated

50 20A (min)

\-- temperature

I

63A 1.in) ' \ I

00. 32A Wm) 1

)

I

11 11 1 1 I

1 11 1 11 Ambient temperature (°C) Calibrated at 40 °C - 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

45 °C - 5 15 25 35 45 55 65


7 - 5



aInnovator, irt Pnwertion Technolor TERASAKI

MCCB Technical data

XE225NC Time/current characteristic curves

E

T 2

50 40

30

20

4. 10 8

8 5 4

2

1

50 40

30

20

1

0.8 0.6 0.5 0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.08 0.00 0.05 0.04 0.03

0.02


Rated canard (A)

125

150

175

200

Magnetic trip current (A)

1250:250 1750:350

1750:350

20001450

225 2250:450

z

Min

0.01 0.008

0.006 0.005 " ERR &F, ERRE&

Percent Rated Current


130

Calibrated 125. 200. 2254

temperature-.

Calibrated at 40 °C

7 - 6

110

cu

i,5) 100

_900

I I

I I

10 20 30 40 50 Ambient temperature (°C)

XH160PJ, XS25ONJ, XH25ONJ Time/current characteristic curves

2

2

so ao 30

20

10

2

1

50 40

30

20

to

6 5

3

2

1

0.8 06 0.5 0.4 0.3

0.2

0.1

0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01 0.006 0 006 0.005


Rated current (A NRC

Max

Min

160

250

fftwetictdpcummt (A)

1760:176 2750:275

sgRil R ERR &R Percent Rated Current


130

I 120

z 2.)

'5 110

a)

a-: 100 0_

90

160. 250A Mmx)

Calibrated A temperature

I/I 7 I I _ 160. 250A nnin)

1 1 1

I I 1

I

Calibrated at 40 °C - 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

45 °C - 5 15 25 35 45 55 65




MCCB Technical data

XH250PJ, XS400CJ, XS400NJ, XH400PJ Time/current characteristic curves

T 2

so ao 30

20

10

6

4

3

2

50 40 30

20

1:

6

3

2

1

0.8 06 0.5 0.4 0.3

0.2

0.1

0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04

0.03

0.02


Rated current (A)

NRC

250 400

Magnetic hip current (A)

25003250 40003400

z Ma

PAM

Adjustasle setting range or

magnetic trip. Five stages

within this range.

XS x10

0.01 0.006 0.000

.0°62 F § F,n;1 g gig II gig Percent Rated Current


140

Er'

.7",72 130

120

100

90

250A II ill. i rn.n. temperature

11 Calibrated

1

4005 ,g.,,,,.

Calibrated at 40 °C - 0 10 20 30 40 50


60

TERASAKI Innen...am In Prorenion Technology

XS630CJ, XS63ONJ, XH630PJ


T Magnetic trip current

Rated current (A) Magnetic hip current NRC (A)

4000±400 63C0-.0330

a

6

5 4

3

2

50 40

so

10 6

4

3

o.a 0.6 0.5 0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1 0.08 0.06 0.05 0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01 0.008 0.006 0 005

Adjustable setting range or

magnetic tnp. Five stages

within this range.

g F F. F ?. F.?, ? 1st 1 Percent Rated Current


130

C "rg 120

a2..

0= 110

2 0_ ro 100

90 Calibrated at 40 °C -

45 °C - 5

I I

I - 630A (rnin) ri -- I temperature

Calibrated I

630 (max)

I

10 20 30 40 50 60 15 25 35 45 55 65


7 - 7



aInnovator,- in Protection Technology TERASAK1

MCCB Technical data

XS800NJ, XH800PJ Time/current characteristic curves

E

1

T

1

50 40

30

20

1:

5 4

3

2

50 40

30

20

10

6 5

2

1

0.0 08 0.5 0.4 0.3

0.2

01 0.00 0.08 0.05 0.04 0.03

0.02

0.01 0.008

A..2.011 9a a? 3 $ 3 $ 3.333 3 1131


Rated current (A)

NRC Magnetic tdp canard

800 8030±800

4I

Min z

Adjustable setting range or

magnetic trip. Five stages

within this range

05 X10



130

rn :7.: 120

110

a)

12 100 0_

90

Calibrated at 40 °C - 0

45 °C - 5

8000 On.)

I I I

Calibrated temperature

1300A Wi)

1 1 1 1 1

7 - 8

10 20 30 40 50 60

15 25 35 45 55 65


XM3OPB Time/current characteristic curves

T 3

50 40

30

20

10 8

6

5

2

1

SO

40

30

20

10 8

5 4

3

2

1

0.8 0.0 03 0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.00 0.00 0.05 0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01 0.008

Motor output (kW) and Rated current (A)

(A) OM) (kW)

V

0.2

V V

1.5 3.7 0.7

1 4 0.2 0.4 10 2.2 - 53

2.6 - 0.75

5 - 2.2

Mad

/ Min.

..........._ ............._.._.

0.006 0.005

928 1 F2 3 9 . 3 3 3 3 3333 3 3 3 3 a 3 333



250 E 200

a./ cs, 150 ya 125 cL a 100

- 90

Calibrated at 40 °C - 0 10 20 30 40 50

45 °C - 5 15 25 35 45 55 Ambient temperature (°C)



MCCB Technical data

TL3OF


2

41-

40

40

30

20

10

4

3

2

46- 40 30

20

10

6 5

3

2

1

0.8 06 0.5 0.4

0.3

0.2

01 0.06 0.06 0.05 0.04

0.03

0.02

0.01 0.008 0 ON 0 005

F 3 8 33 3 33E333 3 3 3 3333


111

Rated current (A)

Mare/kelp current (Al

15 195.39 20 260=52

Max 15,20, 30)

30 390578

ti

Min (15, 20,30 Minh.



140

130

120

5 110 0

a )

100 a-

90

80

I I

m I I

I I

Calibrated L

temperature

304

Calibrated at 40 °C - 0 10 20 30 40 50

45 °C - 5 15 25 35 45 55


60 65

TL1 OONJ


E

I 2

50 40 30

20

10.

5

3

2

so 4o

30

20

10

3

2

1

0.6 06 0.5 0.4

0.3

0.2

01 0.04 0 06 0.05 0.04 0 03

0.02

0.01 0.006 0.006 0.005

FL" Fa L F, 333333 31118 8188

TERASAKI Innovator. In Protection Technology ----___---


Rated current

(A)

20

32

50

63

100

Magnetic trip =Wed (Al

260.52 420.64 650.130 820=164 1300..260

Percent Rated Currant


cr,

160

150

140

130

120

0)

5 110

y 100 a-

90

80

634 0060

I

20A (mini

32. 504 (min)

1004 (mini

16..

etemp rature Calibrated

63A (rnax)

I I 32.504 (Ix Ailliiill' \ IIII 10°0(1) IIIII II I I II Il

Calibrated at 40 °C - 0 10 20 30 40

45 °C - 5 15 25 35 45


50 55

60

65 I

7-9



MCCB Technical data

TL25ONJ Time/current characteristic curves

E

t

450

30

Ai- 1

50 40 30

20

10

08 03 0.4 0.3

0.2

0.1 0.08 0.08 0.05 0.04

0.03

002

001 0.004

111111111111111 ii

niesr-miumelm---1-111

11.111111111111101

1111111311E1 Ad ustabie setting range

within 7ngthneUiscrattingpe..Five

stages

62 x10


Rated current Magnetk bip current

(A) (A) 160 100021130

250 2500o250

0.008 030 H a 888

Percen Rated Current


150

140

130

5 120

C

t - , ) 1 1 0 a_

100

90

80

Calibrated at 40 °C - 0

45 °C - 5

I

I

I I

2500 (min)

1 I

Calibrated

600 (0.01 temperature

I

l

*--- 25 001.40

I I

I I I

I I I

I I

I I

10 20 30 40 50 60

15 25 35 45 55 65




TERASAK Innorelon in Inxerriem Trehnoloo

MCCB Technical data Microprocessor based characteristics and adjustments

Characteristics

The standard microprocessor based MCCB from Terasaki has the most flexible characteristics on the European market. In addition to the standard overload and short circuit protection, there are a number of options available to meet specific applications.

MCCB type LTD

XS400, XH400 ')

XS630, XH630

i XS800, XH800 3)

XS1250SE ')

XS1600SE 2)

XS2000NE

XS2500NE

STD INST

I2T Pick-up Test Ramp LED port PTA GFT

internal LEDs

external LEDs

Standard on all TemBreak Microprocessor MCCBs

Note: *Standard Optional

- Not available ') Includes TL400NE & XV400NE

2) Includes TL630NE to TL1250NE

') Includes XV630, 800 & 1250

Legend

LTD

STD

INST

12t RAMP

Pick-up LED

Test Port

PTA

GFT

LEDs

HI-INST

Long Time Delay

Short Time Delay

Instantaneous

Pre-Trip Alarm

Ground Fault Trip

Light Emitting Diodes

High Instantaneous

Application

Overload protection, True RMS

Short circuit protection and selectivity

Short circuit protection, fast acting

Provides easier grading with downstream fuses

Lights on LTD overload, flashes on PTA pick-up

Facility for TNS-1 OCR checker for calibration checking

Useful for loadshedding application

Protection against ground faults

Indication of fault for faster diagnosis

High inrush applications, increased selectivity

Standard for all

TemBreak

Microprocessor

MCCBs

Access to setting dials To adjust the settings on the microprocessor

TemBreak, the sealed label must be broken and

the cover fixing screws removed. To adjust the

individual trip settings, turn the setting dial with a flat bladed screwdriver. Align the setting required between the black dots marked on

the dial.

XH400SE

Integral leads

Shunt trip

Undervoltage trip

Integral leads

Aux switch

Alarm switch XH400SE (cover removed)

7 -11



TERASAK Innovator., in Protection Technology

MCCB Technical data Microprocessor based characteristics - adjustments, operation, settings

Standard time current curves

08 10 4 _>. 11 LTD

30 Ti

2 10 12 STD"

T2

1 0

0'3 1' 13

3<- 12

INST

600% of 11

Standard microprocessor adjustments

SHORT TIME INSTANTANEOUS

2\

CT. RATED CURRENT

1250 .

TEST I

0 0.0 0

BASE CUR.

1250

0.63 -o.e 1.o

x. 6

. SHORT TIME VI- 0.15

OFF ON

11-2 SEC arlOxIo

Setting Dial

Base current setting

LTD pick-up

LTD setting

STD pick-up

STD setting

INST pick-up

Available adjustments

to 0.63 - 0.8 - 1.0 x In

0.8 - 0.85 - 0.9 - 0.95 - 1.0 x to

5 10 - 15 - 20 - 25 - 30 (at 13 x 600 %)

12 2 - 4 - 6 - 8 -10 x lo

T2 0.1 - 0.15 - 0.2 - 0.25 - 0.3

Amps

Amps

Secs

Amps

Secs

13 3 - 12 - x lo (continuously adjustable) Amps

Note: A special generator T1 setting adjustment of 1-5 sec (at Ii x 600 %), is also

available. Please contact NHP for details.

7 -12

Each part of the characteristic curve can be

independently adjusted. This unique adjustability of

LTD, STD and INST enables the standard

microprocessor MCCB to achieve more than 200,000

permutations of its time/current characteristic.

This makes the TemBreak microprocessor range one of

the most flexible on the market.

To complement this range, NHP have developed

TemCurve selectivity analysis software, which contains

the full range of TemBreak MCCBs on database. This

software package highlights the full benefit of having

highly adjustable microprocessor MCCBs when

involved with difficult selectivity problems.

The 12t ramp switch, which is provided as standard,

assists in discrimination with downstream fuses.

With the switch off, the STD operates with a definite time characteristic: L_ with the switch on, the

characteristic alters to a ramp: L , cutting off the

corner which poses a potential selectivity problem.



MCCB Technical data Adjustment of TemBreak (electronic type) tripping characteristics

Electronic models of TemBreak come standard with an 8-bit microprocessor overcurrent relay (OCR). It is the OCR which

provides the functions necessary for protection, while

maintaining a high level of reliability.

Note: The ground fault trip and pre-trip alarm cannot be used

simultaneously in a single breaker.

Front view

IlD

Sealed label

Spare labels (sealing label)

Cover

TERASAKO Innovators in Pnnertion Technology

The wide OCR adjustment range allows the circuit breaker to be

set-up in order to trip under certain conditions. Adjustments can

be made to the tripping current as well as the tripping time of the breaker.

Figure 1. Electronic OCR adjustment possible (with label removed).

T LONG TIME

CURB. $ETI1N I

L RATEDCUR. W.

TIME ` SETTING ,

9,

,,

SHORT TIME

3 \ '

INSTANTANEOUS

E;) I tz

. .

GROUND FAULT

P,1

1 T, SEC

PRE TRIP MAMA:

SNORT

OFF

.

TIME

ON

I Tx SEC

El CT RATED CURRENT BASE CUR.

: A tl 1I50 A

. TEST

'0.0: 02 0 ....,

,,.

al 10x b

Adjustment method

Remove the sealing label, loosen and remove the cover fixing

screws and remove the cover. To adjust the individual trip settings, turn the setting dial with a flat bladed screwdriver.

Note: Align the groove (end marked with dots) between the bands for the required setting. For example, the diagram right shows lo = 1.0. The INST and GFT pick-up currents are continuously adjustable.

E.:10m4s XS1ZSANE

LONG TIME

0.9

CUR. 0.82/7' V95 SETTING

li xlo

DOTS

Secure the cover and apply the sealing label.



TERASAKH Innovator. in PFOIrCriel Technology

MCCB Technical data Microprocessor based characteristics - adjustments, operation and examples

Overload adjustment The rated current of the microprocessor based TemBreak is

adjusted using two current multipliers. This process achieves

high accuracy adjustment from 50 % to 100 %. These are the

LTD pick-up dial (11) and the Base Current (lo) selector switch.

The rated current (LTD pick-up) is achieved as follows:

!RATED = 1 n X 10 X 11

In the example shown on the right the rating would be:

I RATED = 1250 x 1.0 x 1.0 = 1250 A

In total there are 15 possible increments of adjustment between

50 and 100 % as shown below.

Base current

Current dial

= Breaker

rated current

"063 06 1 0' .

:..example

63

T I

. RATED CURRENT,

A 1,25.1 TEST IN

0-0 0 0

..:BASE CUR.

Ic "9'

043 00'1.0

LONG TIME

0.9 -

CORR: °eV."'" on SETrIOOG

oe

hj 'RATE[4CUR:(A)

TIME ' SETRNG

PICK UP

3, SEC 016011

8-01 5. 7901 551 ;,10(1) 117.8371

7-1

[50 1 54 1 571 60

85 0 i 95 100

100

90 '1 951 1560

100

r85 1

Example - Settings In the example shown on the right, what are all the settings in Amps?

Solution

(RATING LTD pick-up = In x 10 X 11

1250 x 0.8 x 0.9 = 900 A

STD pick-up = In x 10 x 12

1250 x 0.8 x 4 = 4000 A

INST pick-up = In x 10 X 13

1250 x 0.8 x 12 = 12,000 A

GFT pick-up = In x lo

1250 x 0.1 = 125 A

(Note that GFT is a function of In and not lo)

Example - Time/Current curves

T2 = 100 msec

7 -14

LTD

STD

INST

,

T. N

LONG TIME

0.0

CsURR.N00.94,47,\0.94

DA VIIIIINI 0

' 1i f3ATEgCUFL IA)

. TIME

vo SETTING 1

, , 1, X

r -SEC

O ,818101

PICK Up ,

SNORT TIME

4

:1 ' ' ''

INSTANTANEOUS

9

3 MT 6, II.

GROUND FAULT

oz oa

' 0 0.1 0.4

I. Y4

0.3

°2437N4 (A .-v.),,ba

h SEC

oa SNORT TIME Pt

o 1.y.... 024 CT RATED. CURRENT BASE CUR

-,, 1250 A o :, /LI

TEST IN

14 ^ SEC OFF ON -

I I TT SEC 0' 0% 0 0 0.43 0 $ 10 ,

Al 10 519

.6.

11 = 900 A 12 = 4000 A 13= 12000 A I

T

E'

To = 100 msec

GFT

lo = 125 A



TERASAM Innovalon In Protectinn Technology

MCCB Technical data Options (electronic type) TemBreak

Pre-trip alarm (PTA)

The PTA continuously monitors the true RMS value of the load current. When

the load current exceeds the pre-set current (Ip) an LED gives local alarm

that the MCCB is approaching an overload situation.

Should the current Ip be exceeded for 40 secs a (N/0) contact will close to

provide remote indication and/or load shedding.

PTA specifications

Pick up current (A): [Ip]

IP X11

Operating time (s) [Ip]

Output contact

Adjustable steps of 70, 80, 90, 100 % of the

selected rated current [Ii].

Setting tolerance ±10 %

Note: The long time-delay trip does not operate 'first' when the pick-up current is adjusted to 100 %

of the rated current [11].

PTA characteristics

PTA characteristics

time in )

40

MEM 111111

1111 IMMEMlial=MINEMNIMIN MNIIMIEMIIMMMIMIMMI ....imm......m.

11111E2LTD characteristic curve

IIIIEMIEIMMIMIMME= 11111111--- I"IIIMirli'M 11119111111111111

ligNridIZMINN IIIIIIMME

PTA pick-up current setting range

IN=.1

1101161MM==11110=111MI IMILIMIMENTIMM== Ell:::== .711WINEM III En 70 100 150 % X (I,)

40 secs (fixed definite time-delay) setting tolerance is ±10 %

Normally open contact, (1a) Integral lead is standard length (450 mm)

Inductive load

20 VA (2 A max

10 W (2 A max)

Rating of 250 V AC

contact 220 V DC

PTA indication Pick-up LED flickers

TemBreak MCCB

Output contact (N/O)

C: of the pre-trip alarm

Computer Essential Load -essential -essential



IMAM MCCB Technical data Adjustment of TemBreak electronic type OCR

with ground fault

Ground fault trip The GFT pick-up current is continuously adjustable from 10 % to 40 % of the rated CT current.

Notes: The ground fault trip and pre-trip alarm cannot be used simultaneously in a single breaker.

XS400SE, XH400SE are not available with ground fault function. When a three pole breaker is used in a 3 phase, 4 wire system,

a separate CT is required for the neutral line. (refer NHP).

GFT specifications

Pick-up current (A): [IG] 0.2 0.3

0.1 0.4

IG X lc+

Time-delay (S): [TG]

0.3

0.1 \ - ' i0.8

TG SEC

4th CT for GFT

Rating (A) Type

2500 UX0Y0007A

:2000 - UX0Y0006A

1600 UX0Y0005A

UX0Y0004A

1000 UX0Y0003A

800 UX0Y0002A

630 UX0Y0001A

Continuously adjustable from 10 to 40 % of the rated CT

current (let) setting tolerance is ± 15 %

The GFT has a definite time-delay characteristic and is

adjustable in steps of 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.8 s. Total clearing

time is +50 ms and resettable time is -20 ms for the preset

time delay.

Tripping time (s)

0.8

GFT characteristics 0.1

F N

Dimensions (mm)

1./ GFT pick-up current setting range

10 40 Vox (Ici)

- 0--

Rating (A) A B C D E F H CH M N

!2500-1000 140 110 50 10 80 85 145 75 85 35

.800-630 105 100 40 8 50 75 110 57 50 20

7 -16



TERASAKII lAwnwaor. M pretertion Terhwolog

MCCB Technical data Tem Break electronic type with ground fault

External neutral sensor (4th CT)

External neutral sensors are required whenever optional earth fault is used on 3 phase 4 wire systems

The position and direction of 4th CT

LINE LOAD

3 PHASE SUPPLY

THE POSITION OF 4TH CT.

The direction of 4th CT

DIRECTION LINE SIDE

A

^ _L_ o m o 0 0 ," 0

c I c

ONE SIDE

ml

OFF : SIDE

° 1 °

jo o

11

-WIRES 1 me MIN. TWISTED TOGETHER

NEUTRAL BAR

EARTH BAR

L EXTERNAL NEUTRAL SENSOR



aInnotwom in Pr %version Technology TERASAKO

MCCB Technical data Trip indicators

The LEDs when lit, indicate which trip function tripped the breaker

eg, long-time-delay (LTD), short-time delay/ instantaneous

(STD/INST) or ground fault (GFT) (control power required).

Trip indicator display (1250 AF and above)

reset button pushed to turn OFF the LED

LED for LTD tripped indication

Note: If a pre-trip alarm (PTA) is fitted, the LED control power can be

used (common).

LED for STD/INST tripped indication

TRIP INDICATORS

LED for OFT tripped indication

11

T.

LONG TIME

CURR oty 0 95

SETTING 0 8 1

GT RATED CURRENT

,In ) 1250 , A

,TEST IN

0 0 0 0

BASE CUR '

A.

063 09 10

h RATED CUR (A)

' 15

TIME, to Arti..\2o

SETTING st\r4 T, SEC

at6x11'

PICK UP

SHORT TIME INSTANTANEOUS

t, xb

02 o 1.4,"".

011 Tz SE

to xb

SHORT TIME 12t

0 25

03

OFF ON

112 SEC all° x lo

GROUND'FAULT

0.2

of

to X I.

03

04

PICK UP LED turns on when LTD function picks up. In case PTA is fitted, this LED flickers when PTA function picks up. (seperate control power required).

Trip indicator display (400 AF to 800 AF) and OCR controller example: XS, XH400

An optional feature available with TemBreak electronic type are

fault indication contacts - these are voltage free and provide a

signal of the cause of a trip (long time, STD/INST).

260 228 - 214

Example XS1250SE

An external trip indicator box is required with 400AF models.

140

, I

(t.

r ON

IOFT

- OCR

21

CONTROLLER

L- 145 145-"

RSV O

.4 gm(

al74145 CAA/ na,

44

45

CONNECTION TERMINALS FOR FAULT (CONTACTS / OUTPUT)

4

8° \ \- LED INDICATORS

\_ OPTIONAL

Notes: For dimensions of XS/XH800SE and PE refer to pages 7 - 40 and 7 - 41, add dimensions of OCR controller and trip indication box (above).

7 -18



MCCB Technical data OCR controller (PTA and trip indication)

OCR controller mounting position Dimension table (mm)

OP2 OP, OSa os, OFF

OCR controller Terminal screw M3.5

21 B

Ampere frame

;400

1 ;

030

1800

;

Type of MCCB

A

With UVT

controller

XS400 34

XH400/TL400NE 34

XS630 /XVI 64

XH630 64

XS800/XV 64

XH800 64

[71256 ., xs1250sEixv ,

TERM= Inwormari r Pngerdow, Terknolexy

B

Without UVT

controller

1600 XS1600SE/TL-NE 51

12000

2500

OCR controller (PTA and trip indication) The OCR controller is installed in the left hand side of the breaker

(standard). This can also be installed externally to the breaker (please

specify when ordering).

OCR controller specifications Control power source

Rated voltage 100-120 V AC or 200-240 V AC

Consumption 2 VA

Note: The permissible range of control power is 85-110 % of the rated voltage.

OCR controller connection diagram ') 2)

OCR controller mounted on the left OCR controller installed external to hand side of the breaker the breaker

ON

niate 10N

1°P on, OFF

OS,

Laid *rt. coo wo., 6-ye,

1 I

- PALO - PALO PTA

! output contact, (I a) '"

P, coma

OS OS,

Lead Wire

(450 nn long)

ON

OFF PALc PTA wiper contact la

Lead wire 450 mm long)

NOTE: Terminal OS, and 0S2 are already connected.

Notes: ') Standard torque for the terminal screws M3.5 - 0.88-1.18 Nm (9-12 Kgf.cm). 2) Connected cable size - Max 2.0 mm2.

97 48

97 48

151 60

151

151

151

114

114

60

60

XS2000NE 54 180 115

XS2500NE 54 180

OCR controller dimensions (Installed external to the breaker)

115

7 -19



alosowlers la Preen-lion Trchneiew TERASAKO

MCCB Technical data

Time/Current curves XS400, XH400, TL400NE, XV400 Time/current characteristic curves

t I

2.

1

to

2

it- 1

50 40

SO

20

10

3

2

0.6 0.6 03 0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.08 0.06 0355 0.04 003

002

005 0.006 0.006 0.005

P. 7.; 8 R r 8 8 13E3E1

Curves beset, on standard setttnos


Overcurrent tripping characteristics

CT rated current (A) (10 250, 400

Base current setting (A) (I0) (lo) x (0.63-0.8-1k

Long time-delay pick-up current (A): (14 (10) x (0.8-0.85-0.9-0.95-1k Non-tripping at

(Ii) setting x 105 % and below. Tripping at

125 % and above.

Long time-delay time settings (S) (TO (5-10-15-24 -30) at (10 x 600 % current.

Setting tolerance a 20 %

Short time-delay pick-up current (A): (14 (10) x (2-4-6-8-n) Setting tolerance a 15 %

Short time-delay time settings (5) (Tz) Opening time al, 0.15, 0.2, 0.25. 0.3) in the

definite time-delay. Total clearing time is +50

ms and resettable time - 20 ms for the time-

delay setting

Instantaneous trip pick-up current (A) (13) Continuously adjustable from (10) x (3 to 12)

Setting tolerance ± 20 %

Pre-trip alarm pick-up current (A) (I.) x (0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1.0) Setting tolerance ± 10 %

Pre-trip alarm time setting (S) (To) 40 fixed definite time-delay. Setting tolerance

± 10 %

Note: Optional. Underlined values will be applied as standard ratings unless otherwise specified when ordering.

7-20

XS630, XH630, XS800, XH800, XV630, XV800 Time/current characteristic curves

T

S

2

30

5.

10

a.

10

2

Os

° 00.6

0.;0

0.2

0.1 008 0.00 0.05 0.04 OD3

0.02

OA, 0.001 0001 -'- 0.005

Curves based en standard settings

111111111111111111 1M= 1111=11=11M1 11111 11111=11=M BEN= 1.1

11.1

01111I 1MIMII MM.= BM I___

=1=.1

ggg gg n. ° ° n. n.8o lig Percent retell cerrent of

CT rated current (In) Pe cent rated current el base Cliff nt ill


CT rated current (A) (I.) 630, 800

Base current setting (A) (14 (14 x (0.63-0.8-1.0)

Long time-delay pick-up current (A): (h) (I.) x (0.8-0.85-0.9-0.95-1a Non-tripping at (h)

setting x 105 % and below. Tripping at 125 %

and above.

Long time-delay time settings (S) (T4 (5-10-15-20-30) at (14 x 600 % current.


Short time-delay pick-up current (A): (12) (14 x (2-4-6-8-1()) Setting tolerance a 15%

Short time-delay time settings (S) (Tr) Opening time (0.1 0.15, 0.2, 0.25, 0.3) in the

definite time-delay. Total clearing time is +50 ms

and resettable time - 20 ms for the time-delay

setting

Instantaneous trip pick-up current (A) (13) Continuously adjustable from (14 x (3 to 12)


Pre-trip alarm pick-up current (A) (I.)

Pre-trip alarm time setting (S) (To)

Ground fault trip pick-up current (A) (I.)

Ground fault trip time setting (S) (T.)

(14 x (0.7, 0.8, 03, 1.0) Setting tolerance: 10 %

40 fixed definite time-delay. Setting tolerance ± 10 %

Continuously adjustable from (14 x (01 to 0.4)


Opening time (0.1-0.2-a3-0.4-0.8) in the definite

time-delay. Total clearing time is +50 ms and

resettable time is - 20 ms for the time-delay

settings




TERASAKII hmaursin Preget-lion Tcc*s.4nyy

MCCB Technical data Microprocessor based characteristics and adjustments

XS1250SE, XS1600SE, XS2000NE, XS2500NE, TL630NE, TL800NE, TL1250NE & XV1250 Time/current characteristic curves

a

T

20

10

xi

0.11

0.4

0.4 0.3

0.2

0.1

0m

005 0.04 Ott.

0.02

0.01 0.0011

0.0011 0.005

Curves tuned on standar! settings

1111MM - ..ti_- Una WI

MM MI

111 111

MUM= I VIM

Pootere rated anent of CT tilted current gni

' F. ill I `4

Peiatnt sled clirrerd 01 base arr. (to)


CT rated current (A) (I.) 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500

Base current setting (A) (10) (In) x

Long time-delay pick-up current (A): (Id (10) x (0.8-0.85-0.9-0.95-LW Non-tripping at (I,)

setting x 105 % and below. Tripping at 125 %

and above.

Long time-delay time settings (S) (Ti) (5-10-15.2D-30) at (Id x 600 % current.

Setting tolerance t 20 %

Short time-delay pick-up current (A): (12) (10) x (2.4-6-6-10) Setting tolerance t 15 %

Short time-delay time settings (S) (To) Opening time (0.1, 0.15, 02 0.25, 0.3) in the


and resettable time - 20 ms for the time-delay

setting

Instantaneous trip pick-up current (A) (13) Continuously adjustable from (lo) x (3 to )2)


Pre-trip alarm pick-up current (A) (1r) (Id x (0.7, 0.8, 03, 1.0) Settine tolerance ±10 %

Pre-trip alarm time setting (S) (Tr) 40 fixed definite time-delay. Setting tolerance t10 %

Ground fault trip pick-up current (A) (lc) Continuously adjustable from (I.) x ((1,1 to 0.4)


Ground fault trip time setting (S) (To) Opening time (0.1-0.2-0.3-0.4-0,3) in the


and resettable time is - 20 ms for the time-delay

settings


7 -21



TEPAPAY

MCCB Technical data Time/Current curves - Mathematical analysis

MCCB curves A microprocessor MCCB has three major regions on its overcurrent tripping characteristic, namely Long Time Delay (LTD) for overload protection,

Short Time Delay (STD) and Instantaneous (INST), both for short-circuit protection.

The following is an insight into how these curves interact and could act as

a guide for hand-drawing the curves. Tem Curve Selectivity Analysis

Software is available for computerised generation of curves (refer to page

7 - 24).

Firstly consider the following basic characteristic curve shown in figure 1.

The LTD takes the form of a curve and has the following characteristic

equation:

(12-1). t = k

where 'k' is a constant. To determine k, the calibration point of the LTD

should be used, i.e. t = T1 at 11 = 6 (600 %).

IEC - 60947 - 2 states that a breaker must not trip below 105 % of its

rated current, and always trip at 130 % of its rated current.

Terasaki microprocesssor MCCBs however are calibrated to trip between

105 % and 125 %, giving them a higher degree of accuracy. If the middle

point is taken then the pick-up of the MCCB is 115 % of its rated current.

The STD and INST parts of the curve can be drawn more easily as they are

simply a series of horizontal and vertical lines determined by the 12 and T2

settings for the STD, and 13 setting for the INST.

Example

If we assume that we have:

XS125OSE with 1250A CTs and

10 = 1, I, = 0.8, T1 = 30 secs,

12 = 8, T2 = 0.2 sec and

13 = 12 (dial setting on OCR)

then the characteristic curve can be constructed as follows.

To draw the LTD we firstly need to determine the constant k, as follows:

k = (12 - 1) t = (62 - 1) 30 = 1050

giving the characteristic equation:

(12 - 1) t = 1050

By simple arithmetic the tripping times for each level of overload can now

be determined.

For 400 % overload (for the example this is equivalent to 1250 x 1.0 x 0.8

x 4 = 400 A).

1050 = 1050 = 70 secs

(12 - 1) (42 - 1)

The STD and INST can be constructed as follows with

12 =1 x 10 x 12

13 = In X 10 X 13

Please note that 20 ms is taken as an average time for the INST trip of the

MCCB as it is the maximum time it will take the MCCB to trip. In practice

the breaker will open much faster, particularly at high faults where the

current limiting qualities of the MCCB become more effective.

7 -22

Fig. 1

T

LTD

STD

704

1,30s

LTD

LTD

72- 0.2 s

* 20 ms

115% 400% 600% =1150A =4000A =60004

STD/INST

STD

INST

1"250°A.Ig X 8 '':12'50°A.I4 Z

= 80004 = 12000 A



TERASAKO Inninwari in Pinierrimt Techniximt

MCCB Technical data OCR checker, inspection and maintenance

-OCR ,setiReicglt

14

,EIL;Erar-f4ELEG-t,,, Ails.101:644'

TERASPiKt ELECTFE 111D

The TemBreak (Electronic) OCR

checker, Type TNS-1, is a

portable easy-to-use

instrument for field testing the trip functions.

It checks the pick-up current

and tripping time value of the LTD, STD, INST and GFT

functions.

ift!.44,

'CO A R

Ratings and specifications

Power source

Power consumption

Application

Measurement of set

current values

Measurement of tripping

time values

Outline dimensions (mm)

Weight

100-110 V. 220-240 V AC single phase 50/60 Hz

30 VA

LTD

STD

INST

GFT

function check (set current and trip time values)


function check (set current value)


Display

Range

3-digit digital display

0-900 mA

Range 0.00-99.9 seconds

200 W x 84 H x 130 D

2.7 kg



Our:Objective is to'provide yoU,.with the tools

necessarY,to.ensure your time is managed as

effectyely and efficientlyas possible 4

.TeniCurve has been'developed Wholly:by NHP,for.--

the AU-straliari market,,bUt will alSo be used

within,the Terasaki orgamsation-throughout`the-

world,

, Circuit breaker,Selection and set-up can be a,

laborious-;andztime-consuming task NHP has .

ensured that TerriCuve,4'0, for "WindoWSTu'98,,,

2000; NT-and XP is now'even simpler td, operate::

Hence; accurate results"Can,beigained:in`ra,

matter of minutes

The datatiase`With TeiiiCiirVe'h-ardS

characteristiC curves for all Terasakr devices:-

presently-available from NHP In addition fa

this, the extensive 'database of non-Terasaki,,

devices allowsyou to,produce accurate grading

from theqi.arisformers.pr,imarr side'to'theTpoint191

final distribution

'High;_quality prints -canbe outpuf;inaUdifig the A;

characteristic curves for each chosen device::: -

° -

-as well as a complete list -of:device settings



MCCB Technical data Tem Break XM3OPB


Front connected (standard)

ASL

Mounting hole

Mounting hole

Rear connected (optional)

0 et,

Insulated stud block

Line side terminal M5 X0.8 screw

22

L. 6

ASL

115X0.8 l 54 screw

5 117

Preparation of conductor

12 frnia.x)

TERASAK Inninnoort in Protection Teeltwoly7

ASL: Arrangement standard line y: Handle frame centre line

Drilling plan

Drilling plan

Plug-in (optional)

ASL

CIE= .- III if

ill= 78

# 15 for accessory wiring when necessary

# 5.8 Mounting hole

2.3 ASL


E

1"d

la 5.5

25.4 114X0.7 \ Tapped hole

Panel cut-out

ASL -1 : /-2, :

.

L._ I ..__I

.

Panel cut-out dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0 mm around the handle escutcheon.

L

Drilling plan

7 -25



aInnovainrs in Prisierria. Technology TERASAKI

MCCB Technical data TemBreak XS125CS, CJ, NS, NJ, XH125NJ, Pi and TL3OF MCCBs



Interpole barter (remcwable)

3P IP

651.

141

'

4P Mounting hole

sq. 1.. 90

120


ASL._

Mounting plate

hsulated stud dock

--f

:2!

11M,

Plug-in (optional)

0

MEt screw -

ASL

MB screw

ASL: Arrangement standard line

y: Handle frame centre line

Note: XS125NS 1 pole only

Drilling plan

,ii 3P 4P ?

It It

14t9 rt--- 1---,d-.1 -1---f-

(rnx) I I 1

j ASL

1 1 - `.21

L*' N M4 x 07

127 6 Mounting screw

L 79

Drilling plan

3P 4P

111

\ M4 x 0.7

Tapped hole

Panel cut-out LP

I 3P

I it

15

/ 5 15 Q15 lor accessory wiring when necessary

Mounting block

Notzt. x 0:7 Tapped hole Panel cut-out dimensions

shown give an allowance of 1.0 mm around the handle escutcheon.

3P

Drilling plan

4P



MCCB Technical data Tem Break TL100F/TL100EM - TL1OONJ


Front connected (standard) TL100F

AS1.

id 4P

1Pan head screw

C3*3 ON" side: 33.5 'OFF' side: 62_

M8 screw

ASL: Arrangement standard line It: Handle frame centre line

<') e0

.

70

105

Front connected TL100N1

Inter le barrier (removable)

Drilling plan

L.P

I 3P

I 10

1----bd

ASL

52.5 87.5

14 0

67 54 M4x07 mtg. screw

143

35 35 35

là

Mounting hole 3P 4P ,

Rear connected

90

Bold stud type

Moun in

rbasidated stud block

Pan head screw

is 15 for accessory wiring when necessary

Note: Interpole barriers standard on TL100NJ.


104

M4X0.7 Mounting screw

Le. I \ L35 I M4x0.7 TaPPeO hole

Drilling plan

ASL

4P

30

0 CD

M4x0.7 Tapped hole

Drilling plan

Panel cut-out

3P 4P Itt

Panel cut-out shown give

dimensions an allowance of

1.0 mm around the handle escutcheon.

7 - 27



TERASAKQ innovator% in gnomic". Technology -_

MCCB Technical data Motor operators (XMB type) for XS125, XH125, TL1OONJ, TL3OF 1) 2)



Interpoie barriers

(removable) 3P, 4?

Control circuit terminal

11

/ Earth teminal


AS

Plug-in (optional)

Mounting plate

i fl

Detads la AS' connection

M6 Screw

\_ Conductor wicllb

ASL LI,



le: Handle frame centre line

Drilling plan

24 3P 4P MB Screw ''''' M M --

rr M4 Mounting

(max.) 17 r-1

[

A SI

14-'-- .--44*---1 4.1.\ 09

...

27 6

.L ..J

30 j AM x 0.7 Tapped hole

186

/Operatiig Fondle

LrIT".4"

Fi

M8 Screw

Mounting plate

223 lo -

Mounting block

3P

ASL

41

89

M5 Tapped screw

Drilling plan

3P 4P

Po

L291141_60 1'.5

1 (so,\\\ , I .1 I

L 90 Tapped hole

/ 015 tor accessory wiring when necessary 5 15


4P 90 065 30

LtflifULI

119

Notes: ') For dimensions of 7MB-3BA2 used for TL100F refer to NHP.

2) Dimensions for TL1OONJ not showing length of MCCB. Refer page 7 - 27.

Above outline dimensions are for AC motors. Contact NHP for details for DC motors.

7 -28

Drilling plan



6 he f ItIVIIII3 in goner:inn Technology TERASAXO

MCCB Technical data Tem Break XE225NC



Interpole barrier". P. II

(removable)

ASL

Mounting - hole

ASL: Arrangement standard line t: Handle frame centre line


NO_

23(max.)

with terminal bars (optional)

'A!

23 '1.23

97 1 \gyl

_105_ Breakers with terminal bars available on request

Panel cut-out

LI 29.1.

Panel cut-out dimensions shown give an

allowance of 1.5 mm around the handle

escutcheon.


ASI

Insulated stud block Z20

Stud can be turned 90'

I I Conductor overlap max

LO

Mounting plate d-

(max.13. 2)

I

Conductor overlap max.

Drilling plan

lt

r+ ASL

+-1 CO

.0 I

M4x0.7 Tapped hole

Drilling plan

4- -- M4 x0.7 ,cg!

Tapped hare

/ i ,--3L . \ 024 ..._,2161

415 for accessory wiring when necessary

ii-

Note: In the standard shipment mode, terminals on both the line side and the load side are in a horizontal orientation.

"""

7 -29



aInnovator. in Proierrion Technology TERASAKH

MCCB Technical data Motor operators for XE225NC



11 Interpol(' banters

(removable)

ASL

ON-OFf Indicator

Earth terminal

(M4 X0.7 Screw)

Preparation of With terminal bars conductor (optional)

--r It


M: Handle frame centre line

Drilling plan

M8 Screw 18.5

22.5

4 T'

11 It

rt

M3.5 Terminal screw

gar Operating handle

164.1

Breakers with terminal bars available on request.


23 (max.)

ASL ASL Control circuit terminal 9.6 M4x0 7

Mounting screw

26 30 8.5

A SL

M4 X0.7 Tapped hole

Drilling plan

Note: In the standard selection mode, terminals on both the line side

and load side are in a horizontal orientation.

7 -30



MCCB Technical data TemBreak XS25ONJ




24

123i \_09 ASL

;max.) max. 61

m 2, X 0 . 7 IFS

LE78 1

86

:0 Mounting screw


Rear connected (optional) Mounting plate

Stud can be

turned 90° 3P

107 1

TEERASAK Inter...tart Ix Preen-dam Tec4nology



(optional)

With terminal bars

97

Drilling plan

ducts ap ;flax

H

70


Plug-in (optional) Mounting block

CP

Id

ASL

Drilling plan

3P

30

Drilling plan

AP

3p

AS

111-'

31 5

L6:1

Weed hale

Panel cut-out

ASL


4P

L

7 -31



TERASAM Innovate, in Prarction Terhnoloxy

MCCB Technical data Motor operators (XMB type) for XS25ONJ



Mambo* berries 3p Offerable)

ASL

4P Contrd &wit genrilal

_ .

105 52.5 Es7. 5

140

-41

tr,

Me Scree 24


With terminal bars (optional)

cr7


Handle frame centre line

Drilling plan

Atuntiv =my

188

operaing handle



Marring cLate (mm051

11

4p 3P

ii'Vgs.9_ Stud can te , turned 90°

Note: In the standard selection mode, terminals on both the line side and the load side are in a horizontal orientation.

Plug-in (optional) Mounting block

3P

35 35 35 Conduptor

Conductor overlap. max. 1 GierL311 max

4P lj

.1 1 I7-L_ :II 2 el i

- 4-J g, .

1.-3-51-.I-A-1 140

Note: For dimensions and selection of motors for TL225F refer to NHP.

7 - 32

Drilling plan

iM I 1.35

I .20i 35_135_1_20 20135 135 35 120

Idit 5 la accessory gsirigg %hen necessary

Drilling plan

P 4P 30 2830. 66



MCCB Technical data Tem Break XH160PJ and XH25ONJ


Front-connected (standard) Preparation of conductor

(optional) With terminal bars

97 23 213

TERASAKI Innov.on in Protertion TerlopoIngy ------------------



28

i40

Note: Breakers with terminal bars available on request.

Rear-connected (optional) Mounting plate 1 =5 max.

r,/

ASL

Stud can be

turned 90°

\ 0 9

IN Drilling plan 4 P

3 P -1 3P "I 1

Conductor

1

i overlap max, hi

o_24 4P

RI);

k44x0.7 4) 11 Tapped hole_

I

, 70 !35

t ot)all I I I !

' I Os! 20135135 j20 20135 35135 20

015 lor accessory wiring when necessary


Plug-in (optional) Details of connections

ASL

Mounting

plate

121 57 fxs'

accessory connection block

*:-.22..,,.1.11.25 max. conductor width

M8 screw

Mounting block

A51-

Drilling plan

4P

3P

Ft-VT--

ASL

4-- 35

1

Panel cut-out

4P

3P

Cl

\ MAX° '7

Tapped hole

ASL .

I

I I

v";

L2'


Drilling plan

7 -33



eInnovators in Protection Teehnniagy TERASAKI

MCCB Technical data Motor operators for XH160PJ and XH25ONJ



Inteepole barriers 3 p (rernovate)

ASL

Coned cicuitterrnitai 4P

r

(I. Id / M8 Screw

21.

With terminal bars

(optional) Preparation of conductor

-4 7-r

23 \ qg ASL (max.)

r 30 .41

90 105


ASL

)1(44 Wenn screw.

188

Operating handb

Mouneng *4 (may.) 5t

ax

127 11

can be \ turned 90'


47 2.3 23

r,


It: Handle frame centre line

Drilling plan

28 LP

ASL

-I,

23 1-Conductor overtao mat

05- 35 i 35.:4 Conductor .

Conduct( overlap, max. clvertaP, max

Plug-in (optional)

3P

Mounting block

42

Details for connection

7 - 34

Mounting plate 4?

wOM. 25 max

t ts48 Screw 2 Z5 ,.5 1

28

Drilling plan

3P 024 4P

It \ It I . ;

LLSt-t 1 .121 ''':r

'

-1611 - ii m4x0.7.6_-; -i i Taxed hde

tpl. 05.1 -

! I 1 35 I

1 1 - ! 20 35 135 120135 1 35 352O

I015 tor accessory wiring when necessary

514 X 0.7 Tapped hole

Drilling plan



aIwnwyesors 4 Prato/pa TerAnelorr TERASAKEI

MCCB Technical data TemBreak TL225F, TL25ONJ

Outline dimensions (mm) Front connected (standard) TL225F to.in=rx.s#, Wink

DU

I -


With terminal bars (optional)

Front connected TL25ONJ

Interpole barrio( (removable)

3P 4P

Hexagonal socket head screw


ASL: Arrangement standard line le: Handle frame centre line

Drilling plan

IXE

4111

[ ED;rd.kir; 1-2:0=41

,aviixo. frvw.; .,

With Terminal Bars Drilling plan (optional) t=8 3 P

Rear connected Flat bar stud

ASL

Mounting plate

Conductor overiap.max.

i% Values for conductors or optional terminal bars

L 4P

3P

hl

I .

I / d /Stud van be turned 90

Drilling plan

3P 4P

id

4P


90i 33

4 36 I 415 for accessory wiring

when necessary

Panel cut-out

4P

3P

hole

r

Panel cut-out dimensions shown

give an allowance of 1.0 mm

around the handle escutcheon.

7 -35



TERASAK In In:reran,. Terknalary

MCCB Technical data Tem Break XS400, XH400, XH250PJ, XV400



M I 0 ON side.31 _screw OFF side 30

all


y: Handle frame centre line

Optional extension busbars Drilling plan

terminal ON side 120 4P

F3P it bars 7, 14.5

Ast,

! h L

tapped hole


"9' plate

69

7.5e,

L.

jilt' lira' its te,

't116 rr a. IS

Ms CC! ° 4 I IL52-.-5N

§9

Drilling plan

3P Ill

41111.41Ariih IW 111W

I

ASL i

0 er{i

I , firr...,,g....ki I

I

331, 90 133J 33 LS 1GS 45 133 / 1

1

I / Inib tpr accessory wiring when necessary

stud can tte In nee 90'

4? It!

1'4)-

38 OFF side

Panel cut-out

.

4P

h 3P

IN

---1

1------1-"'

1 ASL


Plug-in (optional)


36



MCCB Technical data Tem Break TL400NE


Front connected

Interpole barrier (removable)

3P

ht

4P

Hexagonal socket head screw



It: Handle frame centre line

With Terminal Bars

(optional) t=8 3P

Drilling plan

4P

3P

MS mounting screw

VA6 tapped hole

Rear connected

ASL

Flat bar stud

Mounting plate

Conductor eIn ovenap.max

4p

it: Values for conductors or optional terminal bars

3P

J, Stud can be turned 90

5 145

3P

ht

Drilling plan

4P

it[


ys 15 for accessory wiring when necessary

hi

ASL

cy%

..j


-_ 7 -37



TERASAKI lonovolorx Provettion Technology

MCCB Technical data Motor operators (XMC type) for XS400, XH400, XV400, TL25ONJ, TL400NE 1)



..""

Rear connected (optional) Drilling plan

3P

it


I: Handle frame centre line

Drilling plan

Panel cut-out

4 P .. _3P Iti

R3

ASL z

Note: In the standard selection mode, terminals on both the line side

and the load side are in a horizontal orientation.

I Plug-in (optional)

777 ,comiitr*div f as fro

Mounting block


Drilling plan

3P

Note: ) TL25ONJ and TL400NE length dimension not shown. Refer pages 7 - 35 and 7 - 37.



MCCB Technical data TemBreak 630 AF XS630, XH630


Front connected (standard) 3P 4P

013 8 32



lt Handle frame centre line

4P

3P

I t- t

L \ M8

Plug-in (optional) 3P 4P

401

3P 4P

4P L 40x40x4 e 14 L 40x40x4 0 14

100 F170

7 -39



TERASAKI lonorwors I., Protecrion Technology

MCCB Technical data Tem Break 800 AF XS800, XH800



Mtg. hole

31' 013

4P

extension handle (removable)

10 32 -41-4

t$igi :107k.1 '42 conductor

140 I 105 ! 175 I overlap. Max.

210 280


stud can be turned 90'

41'

ao.5

to I 36

145

3P

Drilling plan


10: Handle frame centre line

Drilling plan

4P 3P

ASt. ASL L'21

I I

I

L,70, j \mg tapped hole M8 Mtg. screw

4P

Panel cut-out

I.. Mtg plate

Plug-in (optional

Details for connection

7 - 40

184

70 L70 13

conductor overlap. max.

"1= , acCesSOry

i

CO nection bloc k ASL

Mkt=IL M loM141g. screw

121 62 45 40 max. conductor width

1 48


Mounting block


Drilling plan



TERASAKO Innovator< in Pnnenlon TechnoIngy

MCCB Technical data Motor operators (XMC type) for XS630, XH630, XS800, XH800



Of V3

ASL: Arrangement standard line t Handle frame centre line

Types

OH, XV, XS800NE

B (mm)

A (mm) 3 pole N pole

10 36 36

XH, XV, XS630NE 8 36 36


Ia .0 0

ASL

Drilling plan

3P 4P

Itt

1113P.

0--114-1 H

*15 for accessory wirin

as Mr

Drilling plan 4P

3P

ASL

M8 Tapped hole

Panel cut-out

3 70 70 70

when necessary


Plug-in (optional)

ASL

Panel cut-out dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0 mm around the motor operator frame.

3P tl

Mounting block

4P

tl

Drilling plan

0 _175 2Rn /Mourning angle

-41



a....J...., la Prow lion Tremolo*, TERASAKQ

MCCB Technical data Tem Break XS1250, XV1250


Front connected (standard) 3 r Mtg. hobo

1

913


4 P


Drilling plan

4P

3P

'5

A51

4P

Drilling plan

ill

3P 4 P

L3-

Panel cut-out

70 70 conductor overlap, max

Soft plastic tubing, 050, to be provided on center Dole and

\neutral pole of vertical terminal type for Insulation.

59 13

I 70 .;

L 1

230 300



Plug-in (optional)

ASL

. 138

accessory u Connection -2

block

r

3P

Mounting block

Panel cut out dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.5 mm around the handle escutcheon.

Drilling plan

P

Mtg. angle

!

it i

ASL

hAl 0 Mtg. screw ?I

7 -42

L 85 j 45j

70.1 0\113. L 210 Conduct, overlap. max.

140



MCCB Technical data Motor operators (XMD type) for XS1250, XV1250



ASL


3P

13

4P tl

TERASAK hlwavoon 4 Preferr4. Trchn.lart

ASL: Arrangement standard line Handle frame centre line

Drilling plan


ASL

Mounting plate M8 Mounting screw

Drilling plan

4P

Panel cut-out

4

3P

Solt plasbc tubing # 50 no

to be provided on center pole and neutral pole of verbcal _

242.5 21 terminal type for insulation

Conductor width.max.


Plug-in (optional)

Auxiliary circuit terminal__ 4P

_ _ la r

Mounting block

Panel cut-out dimensions shown give an allowance of 1.0 mm around the motor operator frame.

Drilling plan

3P

Mounting angle

ASL

M10 Mountin screw

Conductor width max.

7.43



aInnovoion in I...rain Technology TERASAKI

MCCB Technical data Tem Break XS1600SE, TL630, TL800, TL1250NE


Front connected (standard) 3P

Mtg. hole

P 20. It

Insulator extension handle (removable)



Drilling plan

r<f- Mtg. angle

MB Mtg. screw

I_ 3P

111111111 --I :conductor l'pvertay. max.

2 \0l3

Rear connected with motor operator

191

v 4P

3P

1 - '1

,., mg Mtg screw gf -

Panel cut-out

Mounting angle

r?

Draw-out (optional)

accessory connection block

ASL

7 - 44

Breaker fixing screw

Mtg hole draw-our handle .

/ (rrtmovnble)

It extension hand e

(removable)

395 (draw-Out)

325 (dIsconnocted) 295 (testl

265 (connected1

012

L.P

hole

ASL

a


Drilling plan

112.5 182.5 4P

3000,m.) L5031 2A) 282

315 I 396 (connected)

526 (drawout)

RT- RI

conductor !

overlap, max

j t2Q17°

conductor overlap, max.

111 re., i I i

I

L 215 200 I Mtg.

L. 1 CRINIMC211t311

GPIXO 170



MCCB Technical data Motor operators (XMD type) for XS1600SE types, TL630NE, TL800NE, TL1250NE



ASL



ASL

3P

0.5 %I

13

Mounting angle

MO Mounting screw

4P

280

Draw out (optional)

Lock Diate

TERASAKII IN.Men u Preleview Terkstaing


lid: Handle frame centre line

20

Insulator

ASL

II II

Conductor wictlh.max

n Ill 11

max.9 4.5

20

262.5

357

46

Mounting angle

M8 Mounting screw

Drilling plan

Accessory connection b10Ck

4P

Draw-out handle (rernova0le)

Breaker fixing screw

12

Mounting hole

28

28

150 220

370(.8.4 28

7 -45



YE;' ASAK6

MCCB Technical data Motor operators for XS1600 TL630NE, TL800NE, TL1250NE



Drilling plan

Draw out

Mounting hole #12

4P


Panel cut-out

Drilling plan

Panel cut-out dimensions shown give an allowance

of 1.0 mm around the motor operator frame.

12

ASL

0 0.

Conductor weltri,max. 1

70 70 Conductor width max.

200 (3P)

100(4P) 170(4P) Mounting angle



MCCB Technical data Tem Break XS2000NE


Front-connected (optional) 4 P

TERASAKI Iea,eej.,e La Preterriew Technology --_-_--_---


Drilling plan

Rear-connected (standard)

extenvon handle (removable) A, Mtg. angle

M 10 M19 screw

4P

,i- 20

[ I I I

conductor L105 1 105 1104

i .,.. Overilfp. rt.,

40 Note: ') Use non-magnetic angle (SUS 304 etc).

Drilling plan

14i1E:4-1 1) f 1 ASL

Panel cut-out

I I r- - -i- - -1

LL 302

Draw-out (optional) draw-out handle (removable) 56i (draw-out)

extension handle ,

s

371 (nisconnectod) (removable!

I

r 34 1 Pesti

311 (con.necteo)

\ \ P

4P 1 3P

Mtg. nom 014 I

Oil

308 3 ri

L__ .666...

L. oct106litcj

overlap, max.

Panel cut-out dimensions shown give an allowance of 2 mm around the handle escutcheon.

Drilling plan

170(4P) 779(48)

1_3/6381 014i I/

ASLI

! 4S7 _911

268

7 - 47



TERASAK Innovator. in Protection Ter/mato,.

MCCB Technical data Tem Break XS2500NE


Rear-connected (RC standard, no FC version)

3P P

Iti

-e ; TN)

C)

105 105 110

60 269

429

Panel cut-out

Panel cut-out dimensions shown

give an allowance of 2 mm around

the handle escutcheon.

Note: RC - Rear connected, FC - Front connected.

7 -48


It Handle frame centre line

extension handle (removable) MW Mtg. screw

130 Mtg. angle

///

GP

3P

ASL

10

245

340

Drilling plan

20 conductor overlap,

Note: ') Use non-magnetic

angle (SUS 304 etc)

Note: 1) Use non-magnetic angle (SUS 304 etc)



aInnovnlon in Prageerion Technology TERASAKI

MCCB Technical data Motor operators (XMB type) for XS2000NE & XS2500NE


Front connected (optional)

65 3P

Mounting

jL 111

MEM WIMP

Rear connected (standard)

Draw-out (optional)

ASL

3?

334

4? It' Draw-out handle

(removable)

28.8

MCCB accessories


Ii!: Handle frame centre line

Drilling plan

ASL

429

width. max.

MID Mounting screw

Drawbul handle

(removable)

405 (ma()

P")

514 (mu.)

55 351

4P

3P

276

687 (Draw-o( l

4SL

497 Disconnected

46

437 (Careled

- -20

105 1105 110

Draw-out handle (removable)

Mourding hot 014

RE

elI

-Cce

to

!105

_Conduct( win,. max.

Note: Use non-magnetic angle

(SUS 304 etc)

Drilling plan 4P

ASL

14 I I I

/ I 454! 2S: 4? 2,

Mounting angt.

268 I

7 - 49



aInnovator, la Pm...lion Techwo logy TERASAKI

MCCB Technical data Motor operators XMB types for XS2000NE & XS2500NE



3P

Manual operating handle

4P (rerncwoble) M10 Mounting screw

M

Mount^9. angle oulting hole

It1

/ ./

Drilling plan

105 105 110 .1,

160 269 1

429

7 - 50

\ 0)4

306 20140 20 Conductor '20 311 150 °verlaP. mat 05 1105 1110

MCCB accessories



4P

i

3P

276

III

Note: 1) Use non-magnetic angle

(SUS 304 etc)



aInnomom in PIWITI4111 Technology TERASAKII

MCCB Technical data

AC power watts loss -3 Pole MCCBs

Notes: Standard terminal arrangements. 125 - 1600 front connection. 2000 and above rear connection. ') Watts loss figures are for 3 poles.

e.g. An XH125NJ operating at 125 A, will have a total watts loss of 41 watts. 2) Watts loss values are approximate and will vary according to ambient conditions and switchboard construction.

7 -51



'44;4

' r,"). ,

. 404-44,4\

0 ' 0 ' ' . 0 0 0 -. , .-- - v%4'... +:,-li -4 ...`';-- ., . - . . ' *, .: en,,;('1 O* 7.'4

0 0 0 0 0 0 4,-

0 0 " . " 0 . 0

0 . - I .° '

;7-A4n jk.41 PoWerGad

4...,' t - , , T. - a

0 ' " S 0 S a

a, ' ^ x'. ,'

f, 414;4,

S 0 0 0

° 42 ^

0 0 .5. 0 0 0 0 " 5

0 0

- o .

. . 0

,- rel_la-tatr..,?4, wt.; ,arre,,,Otrol',4actirre.

A 11:4-_ ,,,A4Arta4.,,,,ASA1 , 7, ' _

surris..141.... (-ardor:4i .

- " "

,160.oloo 0.44,

' 44tliga .00,000

0 0 0

V-, 4

kda'' - 14,

2"'TRaYlr'r:Ca. 1

So; 44ar161;";-7P:' 7-C,";:tiltOTIAf;itiql 4440

we 11, ,

- .

.,

. 5 4 4 ,

'. - , 4,, .1- . . e

5 - - .

teriegerrieue 42° .N4: t 4/ 1£0' of. 44A 4

.44 000- "*44 li14.-4A44 40404 ".44,1A

"4*.r..4-1.10Y1,44 teigia6,4

5 , -

"i,..0" . . t, ,, ) ..

. - . " .11.. IS I. . Of. II

. 9 - . . - -

- I-

I

.42

d k

*

4 A CS' 5- - es ' .1

. - . - 5 . ° 94`1'4.' <4 ; sg

. subrnains,cable

- '

I

. 0 . 5.5 4' -"1..r\-7:41,-.. . :

- :, 4

0

Automauc-final

0 0

00 00 .0 determineS * 0 .

- "*"F's ,,4, , , o - 5

0C 0 o . 0. powerful

00 includes

harmonic

software, including

000 0

a - -'2" 4.,,e,

5 - -1',Y,,''./: ,.30°.4 ..! fr.:. ' --r ' '"'. , - ' -. . i ,-4% ..,-4

4 .,

''''' ' '24,. .- 7,4 '-'4' ''.4Y - . "-,-.4', - --t---- ,-,...., r'' . - - -

- ` 116 - . -.-i'", 7,...,'.. ,.;,-?.., -12,',,,-,,, - : ;,,,,-1,k,::: ;,t,4,,';'',':-,,,

D -

, : . ..., breakers:

Note PowerCad is a product of PowerCad Software Pty Ltd. Purchases of this software can be obtained from PowerCad www.powercad corn au

, Generator gizing '4.-0

. ° ' .

* 0 D

0 00

-



ID 10

8. Switchboard Works Test Results



4. 11) 411) al di

i




8.0 SWITCHBOARD WORKS TEST RESULTS

File: / /Jpr _Server /docs /!sched/Masters.doc Revision 0 Date: 25 May 2001



J. & P. RICHARDSON INDUSTRIES PTY LTD 111 Campbell Avenue, %VACOL QLD 4076

Pb: (07)3271 2911 - Fax: (07) 3271 3623

&MAI!: jpra p

SWITCHBOARD

Form No. F101713

Customer Name: giv 1) Job No: cac,400 Item:

03i23 no L.k) -Area 600sTER Drawing No:

E02,, co%14001A0

TASK PRODUCT

. DETAIL INSPECTED

BY DATE

PASS / FAIL

coRRECTIVE ACTION REQUEST OR COMMENTS

Design Documents R.0 .. 3-14- 0/1 ...

Drafting Documents 0 _ 5 LiCtii'

Sheetmetal (Refer F1018 for details)

Switchboard dt Doors

r

CeIVPanels Mal -

Painting

Process

Min DFT (40 STD)

Cure Test

Colour Exterior

Colour Internal

Colour Panels

w / Wet - '

IFITfilifillillil 1111311'

.

- -re . .

Cubicle Erection

Electrical Fitout (In accordance with drawings) --

Inspection & Test

(Refer to F1019) . . 'QS

r

Packing ' ...,....c. ....

Comments: I . Z11;7/1-e'r PZ-14-i77L 1,1^-10 I- Cgiire I /



J. & P. RICHARDSON INDUSTRIES PTY LTD 114 Campbell Avenue. WACOL QLD 4076

Ph: (07)3271 2911 - Fax: (07) 3271 3623

jprapr.coM.au

Form No. F1017/3

Customer Name: aim t Job No: CD,WOC) Item:

10 LO ATE 00s-rEA -

Drawing No:

E(:), (LOO JA

TASK PRODUCT

DETAIL INSPECTED

BY DATE

PASS / FAIL

coRRECTIVE ACTION REQUEST OR COMMENTS

Design Documents R.O. . 3-4- Ot Drafting Documents k 0 3-1-1,0$

Sheetmetal (Refer FIO I 8 for details)

Switchboard dt- -

Doors . . .

CeIVPanels TC

Painting

Process .

Min DFT (40 STD)

Cure Test

Colour Exterior

Colour Internal

Colour Panels

/ Wet - - -

_

- .

.

,i I, /

Sa

lin cA-914-re 1,, 4t , . .. .

Cubicle Erection

Electrical Fitout (In accordance with drawings)

tk ,kr-pe-14.

.,

-

Inspection & Test

(Refer to F1019) 5 Foca, 3oHo Poss

1 i

,

Packing S

Comments: A # <Pt

,

1

Z-1 rti ,,,./ ;

.

1 4, . 4 1 IP I I APPLIMPVIMPA19111,-.17117

- .

. .

, .

'A.0,1-'541-ggi,VA.e.:4..' ..itei , - --g., , ' ' ..,,,! VP ., ' g..7 .= :.-1'.1 . .....- _ . ."-j .4 ik:44-?1,

Rectification .

- '..: '

.

Affix Status Here: - Yellow Awaiting Inspection

Green Inspection & Test Passed

Red Inspection & Test Failed, Awaiting



J. & P. RICIIARDSON INDUSTRIES PTY. LTD. 114 Campbell Avenue, WACOL QLD 4076

Ph: (07) 3271 2911 - Fax: (07) 3271 3623 E-mail: jpr®Jpr.com.au.

RWIT(ITBOARD / STOIETMETAT, INSPECTION CI 1FrELIST.

Form No. F1018/2

CLIENT: Etib PRODUCT DESCRIPTION: A/4! 0

(41/7-7FX.: Reepcfr,F,4_

CONSTRUCTION

400 DRAWING & SCHEDULE NUMBERS

®o

REMARKS OR ACTION

NO

2. Welds

i3,

Edges / File

Gauge

V

Equipment Mounting Arrangement

Doors Stiffened

Escutcheons and Lexan Covers

10. Cable Saddles r

11. Grinding

12. Door Stays Fitted

13. Earth Studs

14. Rubber Retainer

15. Drawing Holder

16. Hat Sections

17. Locking Bars Fitted

18. External Crevice Welded and Ground

19. Legend Cards

20. Gener4l Conditions Satisfactory

21. Cabinet Clean

22. db Name and ,Number Marked

I INSPECTED Br_ cfr/61-.. AFFIX STATUS HERE Yellow Awaiting Iiispeation

Green Inspected/Tested Passed Red InspectecVrested Awaiting Rectification.



J. & P. RICHARDSON INDUSTRIES PTY LTD 114 Campbell Avenue, WACOL QLD 4076

Ph: (07) 3271 2911 - Fax: (07) 3271 3623

E-mail: jpr®jpr.com.au

SWITCHBOARD ELECTRICAL INSPECTION & TEST REPORT

Customer Name: Pro ect: JPR Job No:

Constructed b :

Form No. F1019/8

Page 1 of 6

Item: Date: y0

Main Functional Unit/s

Fuse Fittings Circuit Breakers

Neutral Earthing C.Ts Meters Contactors Overloads Rela s

Qty

Q!

QV Reqd

Checked

Qty Qty

Size Size Size Size.

Size Rating Ratin

Rating Ratin

Volta :e Function

Timers Control Switches

Push Buttons Pilot Lights Transformers ATT/VFD/Soft Starter DC Supply Terminals

Volta :e Vol

Function

Engraving

Busbars Escutcheons / Shrouds

SA. Metering CTs

SA Metering Links S.A. Meters 1PR Label Le end Card PLC/re.lemettY Power Monitor Rela fr-fiAtitt IP Sealing Door Latches/Hinges Ventilation Circuit Schedule Terminal Ti htness

Busbar S stem

Earth Continui

Qty QV Qty Qty. Qty

Type Type Type

Qty Type Type Fitted -

Rating Rating Rating Size Size Size Siie

Material

Correct Size

Ra

Rating

Qy Required Required Power

Bod .to E Doors to E

Operation Operation Checked Result

ID

Panels to E

Cubicle Cleaned

Paint Finish Intact Polarity Check

Function Continuity Check

R -R Power. R -R

W - W Control W - W

B - B

PLC/Telem B - B



J. & P. RICHARDSON INDUSTRIES PTY LTD 114 Campbell Avenue. WACOL QLD 4076

Pb: (07) 3271 2911 - Fax: (07) 3271 3623

E -mail: Jprapr.comau

SWITCHBOARD CONTINUITY & INSULATION TEST REPORT

Form No. FI019/9 Page 6 of 6

Customer Name:

Project: JPR Job No:

Constructed b: 4 . 4, 4

C*% A77: From

p,,4 Pi.c irwx-or) Switchboard: I -

Date: 2.

Ft' ti t T '',..7Z71777.

Red White Blue Neutral

Sketch:

Designation Red to Earth

White to Earth

Blue to Earth

Neutral to Earth Red to Whitc Red to Blue White to Blue

Comments:

'7r7q14. 4P-XV;g05.-i . .

1000 V Test

co:90

TOP

TOO

2.5 kV Test lmin 1000 V Test (Mn)



J. & P. RICHARDSON INDUSTRIES PTY LTD 114 Campbell Avenue, WACOL QLD 4076

Ph: (07) 327l 2911 - Fax: (07)3271 3623

E-mail: jprOpr.com.au

SWITCHBOARD ELECTRICAL INSPECTION & TEST REPORT VFD & SOFT STARTER SETUP

Form No. F1019/8 Page 3 of 6

Customer Name:

Project:

Drive Type:

Drive Rating:

Drive Setup Details:

vt LI/ der JPR Job No: C:2ACt pQ Constructed by: 6, fics,,,,,Iree,

a1 a. . Item:

, I -

Tested by: E _rim 0 r 0

Drive:

Date: 7015/0

Parameter

- zo

-L0 4

-Z1- 1 -1-3 -

/ -go

e7

3 a

-41

-ft 5 -13

Setting Function

141

4tc V 5-0 r

rwisioe ;

Iff fer r -0)

le&sel 446 too 0

lc ISEC.

1S- Ypc_

Facies' y)* I I PPeSei

11.0 is u r Any

kese T (I)

V SP Gal Peese-

Monvej

All otherparanteters are default settings.

Comments:



Pro'ect: t tio

' II I

1

I I

e

1 1'

fiffflieMPIAIM Item:

4,14. lifTM I I N rieektozZ,-MM-.wc 0,41,182 :YAW iYg:fkgrP7;17i--.__f-'-43,7',..,.S'i

I I if A a Tested b : Date:

Qty

MEI"MINIMI =32. R d

Checked ""'-'

Size

Size Size Size Size

Fuses/O/L Fuse Size

OIL ID

I

i4

11

.1

I I I

I I [t(1,--Viffer00.077-

S MOM MB= MIME = IM =I MO= MORI II1== IOW= =UM ""

Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin

Function Function Function Volta e Function Volta e

Volta :e Function Function Vol e

Vol e ME31. MOM

I EMIE Ratin Ratin Ratin

Function Function Function

MWMI Size ID M311 "" Size ID

11151M Size ID

MEM Size ID

WPM ..01- Material IP ratin Size Function Size Function

.r7.7;7

c I .4

Power R -R R -R

Fitted Control

W - W

W - W

..0 Checked Result B - B

B -B

P. ..- .` 4 '4

N -N



-a 4

I IP I I

; I

I I I'

I I 400 - ' s El.1.. 1

CIEMFM,Mc rr.

if .0

21IA ae` "" ;912 e

Tested bqjl7,, r

a

I I I

O.'

II

Qty Im31. mum R d

Checked

MIME

Size

Size Size Size Size

Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Size Size Size Size

Material

Fuses/O/L Fuse Size

0/L ID

Function Function Function Vol c Function

Function Function


ID ID ID ID

I

MAIM P51 01-011g5V

Date: ?O

Power R - R R - R

Control W - W W - W

Result B - B

B - B N - N



; 5 '

. I 1 5

I I

I I I' I

Pro'ect: ; I

.WPFSITMERPPP.0 4.1M174 0 . ..1117XTMEWAIIM, (I MEW /

i I s . I 4.../* 1,1 lif MEM Tested b :

di-4i,eii-1' M A - - 'W_ ' - ' '-',-k L' ','.04',Np'51pi-l4, ), - I V.,._1 t Z IpiTI? j Y Al i t ro- '' g'r-e"-: - i , -2,'-Pk-

u.

I I I

:

I

''I

Qty MM. /NMI

R d Checked

41.1

= Power R - R R - R

MIME

Size

Size Size Size Size

Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Ratin Size Size Size Size

Material Size Size

IIPME

Fuses/O/L Fuse Size

0/L ID

Function Function Function Vole

Function

Function Function Vol e Volt. e


ID ID ID ID

Function Function

Fitted Control W - W

W - W

Checked Result B - B

B - B N - N



0

J. & P. RICHARDSON INDUSTRIES PTY LTD 114 Campbell Avenue, WACOL 4:211) 4076

Ph: (07) 3271 2911 - Fax: (07) 3271 3623

E-mail: jpr(a4pr.com.au

SWITCHBOARD ELECTRICAL INSPECTION & TEST REPORT EARTH LEAKAGE TEST

Form No. F1019/8

Page 5 of 6

Customer Name: ; I L p JPR Job No: C7_ 4 Co Item: pp IN lie/- W ji 17° 'Constructed by: It 116,0,707:41 016 Tested by: 6-E-iticor (Date: 2.gy riot Test Unit iblegger R1CDT330 (Other

MMC



FILE: EMC0381/13L 03/01/03 PAGE 1 OF

JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS

LIVE LOW VOLTAGE WORK

TESTING SWITCHBOARDS AND CONTROL PANELS WITHIN OUR MANUFACTURING PREMISES

APPROVED BY: Eric McCulloch (WHSO)

LOCATION: WACOL WORKSHOP DATE: 28../.0.C:Sr

AUTHORISATIONS

Authorisation from person in charge

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

YES

Switchboard rescue kit in test I' Insulating mats / covers in test

Insulating work gloves in test Long cotton clothing

I YES

Er YES

rrct" yYEE.

TASK Isolation points identified and accessible er YES

Work area clear of obstructions Ck YES

LIVE LOW VOLTAGE WORK Unauthorised access prevented to work area 0/ YES


P.P.E. is fit for purpose

Test equipment is fit for purpose

Er YES

(r. YES

Written authority to proceed has been obtained from tr- YES

a person in charge JPR authorisation to conduct live work is current PC YES

Approved dedicated power supply only used for g' YES

testing.

Approved dedicated power supply in current test 0' YES

OPTION (A) .RCD protected outputs used at power supply 0' YES

> RCD protection checked daily prior to use 0' YES

> Safety Observer jel is not required e YES

OPTION (B) Non RCD protected outputs used at power supply YES

> Supervisor consulted prior to use YES

> Safety Observer is in attendance YES

I understand and am fully aware of the requirements of this job safety analysis.

Signatures:





FILE: EMC0381/BL 03/01/03 PAGE 1 OF

JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS



APPROVED BY: Eric McCulloch (WHSO)

LOCATION: WACOL WORKSHOP DATE: wi.riosi

AUTHORISATIONS

Authorisation from person in YES charge

ignat

TASK


(1) TESTING SWITCHBOARDS AND CONTROL PANELS WITHIN OUR MANUFACTURING PREMISES

OPTION

OPTION

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

Long cotton clothing er YES

Insulating work gloves in test (g- YES

Insulating mats / covers in test td' YES

Switchboard rescue kit in test YES

Isolation points identified and accessible Work area clear of obstructions

Unauthorised access prevented to work area

P.P.E. is fit for purpose

Test equipment is fit for purpose

Witten authority to proceed has been obtained from a person in charge JPR authorisation to conduct live work is current

Approved dedicated power supply only used for testing.

Approved dedicated power supply in current test

(A) RCD protected outputs used at power supply

> RCD protection checked daily prior to use

> Safety Observer,ie is not required

(B) Non RCD protected outputs used at power supply > Supervisor consulted prior to use

> Safety Observer is in attendance

fir YES lit" YES

Er YES

a- YES

[I-- YES

EY YES

g- YES

Er YES

cr YES

0- YES

0- YES

0' YES

O YES O YES

0 YES

I understand and am fully aware of the requirements of this job safety analysis.

Signatures:

